Toshiba Power Supply VF FS1 User Manual

E6581381

Safety

recautions

ntroduction

Industrial Inverter

irst

ꢁFor 3-phase induction motorsꢂ

onnection

Operations

Instruction Manual

ion

-FS1

ers

TOSVERT^TVF-FS

pplied

eration

onit

ing

the

tion

status

eas

ures

the

ards

iph

ral

3-phase 200V class 0.4 VQꢀ30kW

3-phase 400V class 0.4 VQꢀ30kW

ces

bl of

rameters

data

ifications

aking

rvice call

tion

NOTICE

1.Make sure that this instruction manual is delivered to the

end user of the inverter unit.

nty

2.Read this manual before installing or operating the inverter

unit, and store it in a safe place for reference.

posa

the

inve

ter

2006 Ver. 100/101

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

I. Safety precautions

The items described in these instructions and on the inverter itself are very important so that you can use the

inverter safely, prevent injury to yourself and other people around you as well as to prevent damage to property in

the area. Thoroughly familiarize yourself with the symbols and indications shown below and then continue to read

the manual. Make sure that you observe all warnings given.

Explanation of markings

Marking

Meaning of marking

Indicates that errors in operation may lead to death or serious injury.

Danger

Indicates that errors in operation may lead to injury (*1) to people or that these errors may

cause damage to physical property. (*2)

Warning

(*1) Such things as injury, burns or shock that will not require hospitalization or long periods of outpatient

treatment.

(*2) Physical property damage refers to wide-ranging damage to assets and materials.

Meanings of symbols

Marking

Meaning of marking

Indicates prohibition (Don't do it).

What is prohibited will be described in or near the symbol in either text or picture form.

Indicates something mandatory (must be done).

What is mandatory will be described in or near the symbol in either text or picture form.

Indicates danger.

What is dangerous will be described in or near the symbol in either text or picture form.

Indicates warning.

What the warning should be applied to will be described in or near the symbol in either text or picture form.

■ Limits in purpose

This inverter is used for controlling speeds of three-phase induction motors in general industrial use.

Safety precautions

The inverter cannot be used in any device that would present danger to the human body or from which

malfunction or error in operation would present a direct threat to human life (nuclear power control

device, aviation and space flight control device, traffic device, life support or operation system, safety

device, etc.). If the inverter is to be used for any special purpose, first get in touch with the supplier.

This product was manufactured under the strictest quality controls but if it is to be used in critical

equipment, for example, equipment in which errors in malfunctioning signal output system would cause

a major accident, safety devices must be installed on the equipment.

Do not use the inverter for loads other than those of properly applied three-phase induction motors in

general industrial use. (Use in other than properly applied three-phase induction motors may cause an

accident.)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

■ General Operation

See item

Danger

• Never disassemble, modify or repair.

This can result in electric shock, fire and injury. For repairs, call your sales distributor.

Disassembly

prohibited

2.1

• Never remove the front cover when power is on or open door if enclosed in a cabinet.

The unit contains many high voltage parts and contact with them will result in electric shock.

• Don't stick your fingers into openings such as cable wiring hole and cooling fan covers.

This can result in electric shock or other injury.

• Don't place or insert any kind of object into the inverter (electrical wire cuttings, rods, wires etc.).

This can result in electric shock or fire.

• Do not allow water or any other fluid to come in contact with the inverter.

This can result in electric shock or fire.

Prohibited

2.1

• Turn power on only after attaching the front cover or closing door if enclosed in a cabinet.

If power is turned on without the front cover attached or closing door if enclosed in a

cabinet, this can result in electric shock or other injury.

• If the inverter begins to emit smoke or an unusual odor, or unusual sounds, immediately

turn power off.

If the equipment is continued in operation in such a state, the result may be fire. Call your

local sales agency for repairs.

Mandatory

• Always turn power off if the inverter is not used for long periods of time since there is a

possibility of malfunction caused by leaks, dust and other material. If power is left on with

the inverter in that state, it may result in fire.

See item

Warning

• Do not touch heat radiating fins or discharge resistors.

These device are hot, and you'll get burned if you touch them.

Prohibited

contact

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

■ Transportation & installation

See item

1.4.4

Danger

• Do not install or operate the inverter if it is damaged or any component is missing.

This can result in electric shock or fire. Please consult your local sales agency for repairs.

Call your local sales agency for repairs.

1.4.4

• Do not place any inflammable objects nearby.

Prohibited

If a flame is emitted due to malfunction, it may result in a fire.

• Do not install in any location where the inverter could come into contact with water or

other fluids.

This can result in electric shock or fire.

1.4.4

• Must be used in the environmental conditions prescribed in the instruction manual.

Use under any other conditions may result in malfunction.

• Mount the inverter on a metal plate.

The rear panel gets very hot. Do not install in an inflammable object, this can result in fire.

• Do not operate with the front panel cover removed. This can result in electric shock.

Failure to do so can lead to risk of electric shock and can result in death or serious injury.

• An emergency stop device must be installed that fits with system specifications (e.g. shut

off input power then engage mechanical brake). Operation cannot be stopped immediately

by the inverter alone, thus risking an accident or injury.

1.4.4

Mandatory

• All options used must be those specified by Toshiba.

The use of any other option may result in an accident.

1.4.4

See item

Warning

• When transporting or carrying, do not hold by the front panel covers.

The covers may come off and the unit will drop out resulting in injury.

• Do not install in any area where the unit would be subject to large amounts of vibration.

That could result in the unit falling, resulting in injury.

• The main unit must be installed on a base that can bear the unit's weight.

If the unit is installed on a base that cannot withstand that weight, the unit may fall

resulting in injury.

1.4.4

Prohibited

• If braking is necessary (to hold motor shaft), install a mechanical brake.

The brake on the inverter will not function as a mechanical hold, and if used for that

purpose, injury may result.

1.4.4

Mandatory

■ Wiring

See item

2.2

Danger

• Do not connect input power to the output (motor side) terminals (U/T1,V/T2,W/T3).

That will destroy the inverter and may result in fire.

• Do not connect resistors to the DC terminals (between PA/+ and PC/-).

That may cause a fire.

• Within ten minutes after turning off input power, do not touch wires of devices (MCCB)

connected to the input side of the inverter.

2.2

Prohibited

That could result in electric shock.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

See item

2.1

Danger

• Electrical installation work must be done by a qualified expert.

Connection of input power by someone who does not have that expert knowledge may

result in fire or electric shock.

• Connect output terminals (motor side) correctly.

2.1

If the phase sequence is incorrect, the motor will operate in reverse and that may result in

injury.

• Wiring must be done after installation.

2.1

If wiring is done prior to installation that may result in injury or electric shock

• The following steps must be performed before wiring.

(1) Turn off all input power.

Mandatory

(2) Wait at least ten minutes and check to make sure that the charge lamp is no longer lit.

(3) Use a tester that can measure DC voltage (800VDC or more), and check to make sure

that the voltage to the DC main circuits (across PA/+ and PC/-) is 45V or less.

If these steps are not properly performed, the wiring will cause electric shock.

• Tighten the screws on the terminal board to specified torque.

If the screws are not tightened to the specified torque, it may lead to fire.

• Check to make sure that the input power voltage is +10%, -15% of the rated power

voltage written on the rating label (±10% when the load is 100% in continuous operation).

If the input power voltage is not +10%, -15% of the rated power voltage (±10% when the

load is 100% in continuous operation) this may result in fire.

• Ground must be connected securely.

2.1

1.4.4

2.1

2.2

If the ground is not securely connected, it could lead to electric shock or fire when a

malfunction or current leak occurs.

Be Grounded

Prohibited

See item

2.1

Warning

• Do not attach equipment (such as noise filters or surge absorbers) that have built-in

capacitors to the output (motor side) terminals.

That could result in a fire.

■ Operations

See item

Danger

• Do not touch inverter terminals when electrical power is going to the inverter even if the

motor is stopped.

Touching the inverter terminals while power is connected to it may result in electric shock.

• Do not touch switches when the hands are wet and do not try to clean the inverter with a

damp cloth.

Such practices may result in electric shock.

Prohibited

• Do not go near the motor in alarm-stop status when the retry function is selected.

The motor may suddenly restart and that could result in injury.

Take measures for safety, e.g. attaching a cover to the motor, against accidents when the

motor unexpectedly restarts.

• Turn input power on after attaching the front cover.

When installed inside a cabinet and using with the front cover removed, always close the

cabinet doors first and then turn power on. If the power is turned on with the front cover or

the cabinet doors open, it may result in electric shock.

Mandatory

• Make sure that operation signals are off before resetting the inverter after malfunction.

If the inverter is reset before turning off the operating signal, the motor may restart

suddenly causing injury.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

See item

Warning

• Observe all permissible operating ranges of motors and mechanical equipment. (Refer to

the motor's instruction manual.)

Not observing these ranges may result in injury.

Prohibited

When sequence for restart after a momentary failure is selected (inverter)

See item

Warning

6.12.1

• Stand clear of motors and mechanical equipment.

If the motor stops due to a momentary power failure, the equipment will start suddenly

after power recovers. This could result in unexpected injury.

• Attach warnings about sudden restart after a momentary power failure on inverters,

motors and equipment for prevention of accidents in advance.

6.12.1

Mandatory

When retry function is selected (inverter)

See item

6.12.3

Warning

• Stand clear of motors and equipment.

If the motor and equipment stop when the alarm is given, selection of the retry function will

restart them suddenly after the specified time has elapsed. This could result in

unexpected injury.

• Attach warnings about sudden restart in retry function on inverters, motors and equipment 6.12.3

for prevention of accidents in advance.

Mandatory

Maintenance and inspection

See item

14.2

Danger

• Do not replace parts.

This could be a cause of electric shock, fire and bodily injury. To replace parts, call the

local sales agency.

Prohibited

Mandatory

14.

• The equipment must be inspected every day.

If the equipment is not inspected and maintained, errors and malfunctions may not be

discovered and that could result in accidents.

• Before inspection, perform the following steps.

(1) Turn off all input power to the inverter.

(2) Wait at least ten minutes and check to make sure that the charge lamp is no longer lit.

(3) Use a tester that can measure DC voltages (800VDC or more), and check to make

sure that the voltage to the DC main circuits (across PA/+ and PC/-) is 45V or less.

If inspection is performed without performing these steps first, it could lead to electric

shock.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

Disposal

See item

16.

Warning

• If you throw away the inverter, have it done by a specialist in industry waste disposal(*).

If you throw away the inverter by yourself, this can result in explosion of capacitor or

produce noxious gases, resulting in injury.

(*) Persons who specialize in the processing of waste and known as "industrial waste

product collectors and transporters" or "industrial waste disposal persons. "If the

collection, transport and disposal of industrial waste is done by someone who is not

licensed for that job, it is a punishable violation of the law. (Laws in regard to cleaning

and processing of waste materials)

Mandatory

Attach warning labels

Shown here are examples of warning labels to prevent, in advance, accidents in relation to inverters, motors and other

equipment.

Be sure to affix the caution label where it is easily visible when selecting the auto-restart function (⇒ See section

6.12.1) or the retry function (⇒ See section 6.12.3).

If the inverter has been programmed for restart

sequence of momentary power failure, place warning

labels in a place where they can be easily seen and

read.

If the retry function has been selected, place warning

labels in a location where they can be easily seen and

read.

(Example of warning label)

Warning (Functions

programmed for retry)

Warning (Functions

programmed for restart)

Do not go near motors and equipment.

Motors and equipment that have stopped

temporarily after an alarm will restart suddenly

after the specified time has elapsed.

Do not go near motors and equipment.

Motors and equipment that have stopped

temporarily after momentary power failure will

restart suddenly after recovery.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

II. Introduction

Thank you for your purchase of the Toshiba "TOSVERT VF-FS1” industrial inverter.

This is the Ver.100 / Ver.101 CPU version inverter.

Please be informed that CPU version will be frequently upgraded.

■ Features

1. Built-in noise filter

All models in both the 200V and 400V series have a noise filter inside.

Can be compliant with European CE marking standard

Reduces space requirements and cuts down on time and labor needed in wiring.

2. Simple operation

Automatic functions (history, wizard, acceleration/deceleration time, and function programming)

Just by wiring the motor to the power supply allows instant operation without the need to program

parameters.

The RUN/STOP button and LOC/REM button allow easy operation.

3. Superior basic performance

Automatic energy-saving

Smooth operation : Reduced rotation ripple through the use of Toshiba's unique waveform formation.

Built-in current surge suppression circuit : Can be safely connected even if power load is low.

Maximum 200Hz high frequency output : Optimum for use with high speed motors such as those in

lumber machinery and milling machines.

Maximum carrier frequency : 16kHz quiet operation

Toshiba's unique PWM control reduces noise at low carrier.

4. Globally compatible

Compatible with 200V and 400V power supplies

Conforms to CE marking and with UL, CSA.

Sink/source switching of control input.

5. Options allow use with a wide variety of applications

•

Internal communications devices (LonWorks^®, BACnet^®, Metasys^®N2, Siemens APOGEE^TMFLN.)

Extension panel/Parameter writer

EMC noise reduction filter

Other options are common to all models

6. Extended power range

•

Wide range of powers up to 30kW for this class of inverter.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

 Contents 

Safety precautions .........................................................................................................................................................1

II Introduction ....................................................................................................................................................................7

1. Read first........................................................................................................................................................................A-1

1.1

1.2

1.3

1.4

Check product purchase ....................................................................................................................................A-1

Contents of the product......................................................................................................................................A-2

Names and functions .........................................................................................................................................A-3

Notes on the application.....................................................................................................................................A-13

2. Connection.....................................................................................................................................................................B-1

2.1

2.2

2.3

Cautions on wiring..............................................................................................................................................B-1

Standard connections.........................................................................................................................................B-2

Description of terminals......................................................................................................................................B-5

3. Operations .....................................................................................................................................................................C-1

3.1

3.2

Simplified operation of the VF-FS1 ....................................................................................................................C-2

How to operate the VF-FS1 ...............................................................................................................................C-6

4. Basic VF-FS1 operations ...............................................................................................................................................D-1

4.1

4.2

Flow of status monitor mode..............................................................................................................................D-2

How to set parameters.......................................................................................................................................D-3

5. Basic parameters ...........................................................................................................................................................E-1

5.1

5.2

5.3

5.4

5.5

5.6

5.7

5.8

5.9

Setting acceleration/deceleration time ...............................................................................................................E-1

Specifying an operation mode, using parameters ..............................................................................................E-4

Selection of operation mode ..............................................................................................................................E-7

Meter setting and adjustment.............................................................................................................................E-10

Standard default setting .....................................................................................................................................E-13

Forward/reverse run selection (Operation panel operation)...............................................................................E-15

Maximum frequency...........................................................................................................................................E-16

Upper limit and lower limit frequencies...............................................................................................................E-16

Base frequency..................................................................................................................................................E-17

5.10 Selecting control mode.......................................................................................................................................E-18

5.11 Manual torque boost - increasing torque boost at low speeds ...........................................................................E-24

5.12 Setting the electronic thermal.............................................................................................................................E-24

5.13 Preset-speed operation (speeds in 7 steps).......................................................................................................E-28

6. Extended parameters.....................................................................................................................................................F-1

6.1

6.2

Input/output parameters.....................................................................................................................................F-1

Input signal selection..........................................................................................................................................F-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

6.3

6.4

6.5

6.6

6.7

6.8

6.9

Terminal function selection ................................................................................................................................F-5

Basic parameters 2............................................................................................................................................F-13

Frequency priority selection...............................................................................................................................F-14

Operation frequency ..........................................................................................................................................F-22

DC braking.........................................................................................................................................................F-23

Auto-stop in case of lower-limit frequency continuous operation.......................................................................F-24

Jump frequency-jumping resonant frequencies.................................................................................................F-25

6.10 Bumpless operation...........................................................................................................................................F-26

6.11 PWM carrier frequency......................................................................................................................................F-27

6.12 Trip-less intensification ......................................................................................................................................F-31

6.13 Drooping control ................................................................................................................................................F-39

6.14 Conducting PID control......................................................................................................................................F-41

6.15 Setting motor constants.....................................................................................................................................F-45

6.16 Acceleration/deceleration time 2........................................................................................................................F-50

6.17 Protection functions ...........................................................................................................................................F-54

6.18 Forced fire-speed control function .....................................................................................................................F-68

6.19 Adjustment parameters......................................................................................................................................F-69

6.20 Operation panel parameter................................................................................................................................F-70

6.21 Communication function (Common serial).........................................................................................................F-78

6.22 Parameters for options ......................................................................................................................................F-83

6.23 Permanent magnetic motors..............................................................................................................................F-83

7. Applied operation...........................................................................................................................................................G-1

7.1

7.2

Setting the operation frequency.........................................................................................................................G-1

Setting the operation mode................................................................................................................................G-5

8. Monitoring the operation status .....................................................................................................................................H-1

8.1

8.2

Status monitor mode..........................................................................................................................................H-1

Display of trip information ..................................................................................................................................H-5

9. Measures to satisfy the standards.................................................................................................................................I-1

9.1

9.2

How to cope with the CE directive .....................................................................................................................I-1

Compliance with UL Standard and CSA Standard .............................................................................................I-5

10. Peripheral devices.........................................................................................................................................................J-1

10.1 Selection of wiring materials and devices..........................................................................................................J-1

10.2 Installation of a magnetic contactor ...................................................................................................................J-3

10.3 Installation of an overload relay.........................................................................................................................J-4

10.4 Optional external devices ..................................................................................................................................J-5

11. Table of parameters and data........................................................................................................................................K-1

11.1 User parameters................................................................................................................................................K-1

11.2 Basic parameters...............................................................................................................................................K-1

11.3 Extended parameters ........................................................................................................................................K-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

12. Specifications................................................................................................................................................................L-1

12.1 Models and their standard specifications ...........................................................................................................L-1

12.2 Outside dimensions and mass ...........................................................................................................................L-4

13. Before making a service call - Trip information and remedies........................................................................................M-1

13.1 Trip causes/warnings and remedies...................................................................................................................M-1

13.2 Restoring the inverter from a trip........................................................................................................................M-5

13.3 If the motor does not run while no trip message is displayed.............................................................................M-6

13.4 How to determine the causes of other problems................................................................................................M-7

14. Inspection and maintenance ..........................................................................................................................................N-1

14.1 Regular inspection .............................................................................................................................................N-1

14.2 Periodical inspection ..........................................................................................................................................N-2

14.3 Making a call for servicing..................................................................................................................................N-5

14.4 Keeping the inverter in storage ..........................................................................................................................N-5

15. Warranty.........................................................................................................................................................................O-1

16. Disposal of the inverter ..................................................................................................................................................P-1

iii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

1. Read first

1.1

Check product purchase

Before using the product you have purchased, check to make sure that it is exactly what you ordered.

Warning

Use an inverter that conforms to the specifications of power supply and three-phase induction

motor being used. If the inverter being used does not conform to those specifications, not only will

the three-phase induction motor not rotate correctly, it may also cause serious accidents through

overheating and fire.

Mandatory

Inverter main unit

Rating label

Series name

Power supply

Rating label

VF-FS1

3PH-200/240V-0.75kW/1HP

Warning label

Motor capacity

Name plate

Carton box

Warning label

Name plate

Inverter Type

Inverter rated output

capacity

Power supply

Related input current

Related output

current

Type indication label

Instruction manual

EMC plate

This manual

18.5kW or less of

WP models only

A-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

1.2

Contents of the product

Explanation of the name plate label.

Type

Form

V F F S 1 - 4 0 0 7 P L E - W N - A 2 2

Applicable motor

capacity

Default interface

logic*

Special specification code

Model name

Input (AC) voltage

Additional functions I

None: No filter inside

M: Built-in basic filter

L: Built-in

EMI class A filter

D: Built-in

004 : 0.4kW

007 : 0.75kW

015 : 1.5kW

022 : 2.2kW

037 : 4.0kW

055 : 5.5kW

075 : 7.5kW

110 : 11kW

150 : 15kW

185 :18.5kW

220 : 22kW

300 : 30kW

TOSVERT

VF-FS1series

2 : 200V to 240V

4 : 380V to 480V

WN : Negative

WP : Positive

A††:††is the number

EMI class B filter

Additional functions II

Operation panel

P: Provided

None: Standard product

E: Enclosed type

* This code represents the factory default logic setting. You can switch from one input/output logic to the other using

slide switch SW4. ⇒ See section 2.3.2.

Warning: Always shut power off first then check the ratings label of inverter held in a cabinet.

A-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

1.3

Names and functions

1.3.1 Outside view

[Operation panel]

A-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

Unlock position mark

The front panel is unlocked when

the dot on the locking screw is on

this (upper) side.

Charge lamp

Indicates that high voltage is still

present within the inverter. Do not

open the terminal board cover

while this is lit.

Front panel locking screw

The inverter came with this

screw in the locked position.

So from this position, turn the

screw 90° counterclockwise to

unlock the front panel, or turn

it 90° clockwise to lock the

front panel.

The screw does not turn 360°. To

avoid damage to the screw, do

not use excessive force when

turning it.

Front panel

The front panel of the inverter or

terminal board

To avoid touching the terminal

board by mistake, be sure to close

the front panel before starting

operation.

Lock position mark

The front panel is locked when the

dot on the locking screw is on this

(lower) side.

[Front]

Top warning label Note)

Communicatio Connector hole

Colling fin

Ventilation slit

Name plate

Cnotrol cable port

Main circuit

cable port

[Bottom]

[Right side]

Note: Remove this seal and operate it at a current lower than the rated one when installing the inverter side by side with

other inverters where the ambient temperature will rise above 40°C.

A-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

Example of the label

1.3.2 Power circuit and control circuit terminal boards

In case of the lug connector, cover the lug connector with insulated tube, or use the insulated lug connector.

1) Power circuit terminal board

In case of the lug connector, cover the lug connector with insulated tube, or use the insulated lug

connector.

Screw size

M4 screw

M5 screw

M6 screw

M8 screw

M12 screw

tightening torque

1.3Nm

10.7lb y in

22.3lb y in

40.1lb y in

106lb y in

360lb y in

2.5Nm

4.5Nm

12Nm

41Nm

A-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

VFFS1-2004 ∼ 2037PM

VFFS1-4004 ∼ 4055PL

Note: EMC plate is supplied as standard.

A-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

VFFS1-2055, 2075PM

-4075, 4110PL

VFFS1-2110 ∼ 2185PM

-4150 ∼ 4185PL

Note: EMC plate is supplied as standard.

A-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

VFFS1-2220PM

-4220, 4300PL

VFFS1-2300PM

Each main circuit terminal has the

structure shown in the figure below.

Connect a cable to part A if it has a

ring terminal, or to part B if it has no

terminal (bare wire).

Parts A and B accommodate different

sizes of cables, so consult the cable

size list for the size of cable

connectable to each part.

Note: EMC plate is supplied as standard.

A-8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

2) Grounding capacitor disconnecting switch and taps

Warning

The grounding capacitor disconnecting tap is provided with a protection cover. To avoid shock hazards,

always attach the cover after connecting or disconnecting the capacitor to or from the tap.

Mandatory

Every three-phase 400V model has a built-in high-attenuation noise filter, which is grounded through a

capacitor.

If you want to disconnect the capacitor from the grounding line to reduce the amount of leakage current,

you can do so easily using the switch or tap. Keep in mind, however, that disconnecting the capacitor

from the grounding line causes the inverter to become non-compliant with the EMC directive. Also note

that the inverter must always be turned off before the capacitor is disconnected or reconnected.

Note: In case of three phase 400V-5.5kW or less model, if you disconnect the capacitor from ground,

set the parameter of carrier frequency Hꢀꢁꢁ to 6kHz with motor cable length 30m or less.

5.5kW or less, 22kW or more: Switch

To connect the capacitor to ground, push this switch.

(Factory default position)

To disconnect the capacitor from ground, pull up this switch.

7.5∼18.5kW: Tap

To disconnect the capacitor from ground, connect the lug terminal

to this tap.

To connect the capacitor to ground, connect the lug terminal to

this tap. (Factory default setting)

A-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

3) Control circuit terminal board

The control circuit terminal board is common to all equipment.

M3 screw

(0.5N•m)

Connector for common

serial communications

and option (RJ45)

Wire size

Factory default settings of slide switches

Solid wire: 0.3 ∼ 1.5 (mm²)

SW4: SINK (Negative) side (WN type)

SOURCE (Positive) side (WP type)

FM (SW2): V side

Stranded wire: 0.3 ∼ 1.5 (mm²)

(AWG 22 ∼ 16)

VIA (SW3): V side

Sheath strip length: 6 (mm)

Screwdriver: Small-sized flat-blade screwdriver

(Blade thickness: 0.4 mm or less, blade width: 2.5 mm or less)

⇒ See section 2.3.2 for details on all terminal functions.

A-10

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

1.3.3 How to open the front (terminal board) cover-18.5kW or less

To wire the terminal board, remove the front lower cover in line with the steps given below.

(1)

(2)

Turn the locking screw on the right side of the front panel 90°

counterclockwise to align the dot on the screw with the unlock

position mark (upper side). To avoid damage to the screw, do

not apply excessive force to turn the screw more than 90 degrees.

Pull the front panel toward you

and swing it open to the left.

(3)

(4)

Terminal board cover

Wiring port cover

Remove the wiring port cover by pulling it down,

pass cables through the wiring port, and connect

the cables to the terminal board.

Remove the terminal board cover by pulling it up toward you.

A-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

1.3.4 How to open the front (terminal board) cover-22kW or

To wire the main circuit terminal board for models 22kW or more, remomve the front cover.

Remove the screw

Maincircuit terminal board

Control circuit terminal board

Open the control circuit terminal board cover.

To open the cover, lift it with your finger placed

at the part on the right side of the cover.

A-12

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

1.4

Notes on the application

1.4.1 Motors

When the VF-FS1 and the motor are used in conjunction, pay attention to the following items.

Warning

Use an inverter that conforms to the specifications of power supply and three-phase induction motor

being used. If the inverter being used does not conform to those specifications, not only will the three-

phase induction motor not rotate correctly, but it may cause serious accidents through overheating and

fire.

Mandatory

Comparisons with commercial power operation.

The VF-FS1 Inverter employs the sinusoidal PWM system. However, the output voltage and output

current are not perfect sine waves, they have a distorted wave that is close to sinusoidal waveform.

This is why compared to operation with a commercial power there will be a slight increase in motor

temperature, noise and vibration.

Operation in the low-speed area

When running continuously at low speed in conjunction with a general purpose motor, there may be a

decline in that motor's cooling effect. If this happens, operate with the output decreased from rated load.

To carry out low-speed operation continuously at the rated torque, we recommend to use a inverter

rated motor or a forced cooled motor designed for use with an inverter. When operating in conjunction

with a inverter rated motor, you must change the inverter's motor overload protection level to VF motor

use (QNO).

Adjusting the overload protection level

The VF-FS1 Inverter protects against overloads with its overload detection circuits (electronic thermal).

The electronic thermal's reference current is set to the inverter's rated current, so it must be adjusted in

line with the rated current of the general purpose motor being used in combination.

High speed operation at and above 60Hz

Operating at frequencies greater than 60Hz will increase noise and vibration. There is also a possibility

this will exceed the motor's mechanical strength limits and the bearing limits so you should inquire to

the motor's manufacturer about such operation.

Method of lubricating load mechanisms

Operating an oil-lubricated reduction gear and gear motor in the low-speed areas will worsen the

lubricating effect. Check with the manufacturer of the reduction gear to find out about operable gearing

area.

A-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

Low loads and low inertia loads

The motor may demonstrate instability such as abnormal vibrations or overcurrent trips at light loads of

50 % or under of the load percentage, or when the load's inertia moment is extremely small. If that

happens reduce the carrier frequency.

Occurrence of instability

Unstable phenomena may occur with the load and motor combinations shown below.

⋅

Combined with a motor that exceeds applicable motor ratings recommended for the inverter

Combined with special motors

To deal with the above lower the settings of inverter carrier frequency.

Combined with couplings between load devices and motors with high backlash

⋅

When using the inverter in the above combination, use the S-pattern acceleration/deceleration function,

or when vector control is selected, adjust the speed control response/stability factor or switch to V/F

control mode.

⋅

Combined with loads that have sharp fluctuations in rotation such as piston movements

In this case, please do not use this inverter.

Braking a motor when cutting off power supply

A motor with its power cut off goes into free-run, and does not stop immediately. To stop the motor

quickly as soon as the power is cut off install an auxiliary brake. There are different kinds of brake

devices, both electrical and mechanical. Select the brake that is best for the system.

Load that produces regenerative torque

Do not use the inverter in combination with a load, such as an air conditioner, that produces

regenerative torque. Or the overvoltage or overcurrent protection circuit of the inverter may be activated,

causing the inverter to trip. If overvoltage tripping occurs during deceleration, lengthen the deceleration

time.

A-14

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

Braking motor

When using a braking motor, if the braking circuit is directly connected to the inverters's output

terminals, the brake cannot be released because of the lowered starting voltage. Therefore, when

using a braking motor, connect the braking circuit to the inverter's power supply side, as shown in the

figure below. Usually, braking motors produce larger noise in low speed ranges.

Note: In the case of the circuit shown on the below, assign the function of detecting low-speed signals

to the RY and RC terminals. Make sure the parameter Hꢂꢀꢁ is set to ꢃ (factory default

setting).

Measures to protect motors against surge voltages

In a system in which a 400V-class inverter is used to control the operation of a motor, very high surge

voltages may be produced. When applied to the motor coils repeatedly for a long time, may cause

deterioration of their insulation, depending on the cable length, cable routing and types of cables used.

Here are some examples of measures against surge voltages.

(1) Lower the inverter’s carrier frequency.

(2) Set the parameter Hꢀꢂꢄ (Carrier frequency control mode selection) to ꢅ or ꢀ.

(3) Use a motor with high insulation strength.

(4) Insert an AC reactor or a surge voltage suppression filter between the inverter and the motor.

1.4.2 Inverters

Protecting inverters from overcurrent

The inverter has an overcurrent protection function. The programmed current level is set to the

inverter's maximum applicable motor. If the motor used has a small capacity, the overcurrent level and

the electronic thermal protection must be readjusted. If adjustment is necessary, see 5.12, and make

adjustments as directed.

Inverter capacity

Do not use a small-capacity (kVA) inverter to control the operation of a large-capacity motor (two-class

or more larger motor), no matter how light the load is. Current ripple will raise the output peak current

making it easier to set off the overcurrent trip.

A-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

Power factor correction capacitor

Power factor correction capacitors cannot be installed on the output side of the inverter. When a motor

is run that has a power factor correction capacitor attached to it, remove the capacitors. This can cause

inverter malfunction trips and capacitor destruction.

U/T1

Inverter

V/T2

W/T3

Remove the power factor correction

capacitor and surge absorber

Power factor correction capacitor

Operating at other than rated voltage

Connections to voltages other than the rated voltage described in the rating label cannot be made. If a

connection must be made to a power supply other than one with rated voltage, use a transformer to

raise or lower the voltage to the rated voltage.

Circuit breaking when two or more inverters are used on the same power line.

MCCB1

MCCB2 (circuit breaking fuse)

INV1

MCCB3

INV2

MCCBn+1

INVn

Breaking of selected inverter

There is no fuse in the inverter's main circuit. Thus, as the diagram above shows, when more than one

inverter is used on the same power line, you must select interrupting characteristics so that only the

MCCB2 will trip and the MCCB1 will not trip when a short occurs in the inverter (INV1). When you

cannot select the proper characteristics install a circuit interrupting fuse between the MCCB2 and the

INV1.

If power supply distortion is not negligible

If the power supply distortion is not negligible because the inverter shares a power distribution line with

other systems causing distorted waves, such as systems with thyristors or large-capacity inverters,

install an input reactor to improve the input power factor, to reduce higher harmonics, or to suppress

external surges.

A-16

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

■ Disposal

If an inverter is no longer usable, dispose of it as industrial waste.

1.4.3 What to do about the leak current

Warning

Current may leak through the inverter's input/output wires because of insufficient electrostatic capacity on the motor with

bad effects on peripheral equipment.

The leakage current’s value is affected by the carrier frequency and the length of the input/output wires. Test and adopt

the following remedies against leak current.

(1)Effects of leak current across ground

Leakage current may flow not just through the inverter system but also through ground wires to other

systems. Leakage current will cause earth leakage breakers, leakage current relays, ground relays, fire

alarms and sensors to operate improperly, and it will cause superimposed noise on the CRT screen or

display of incorrect current detection with the CT.

ELCB

Inverter

Power

supply

ELCB

Inverter

Leakage current path across ground

Remedies:

1.If there is no radio-frequency interference or similar problem, detach the built-in noise filter

capacitor, using the grounding capacitor disconnecting switch or tap. ⇒ See section 1.3.2-2.

2.Reduce PWM carrier frequency.

The setting of PWM carrier frequency is done with the parameter Hꢀꢁꢁ.

Although the electromagnetic noise level is reduced, the motor acoustic noise is increased.

3. Use high frequency remedial products for earth leakage breakers.

A-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

(2)Affects of leakage current across lines

Thermal relays

Inverter

Power

supply

Leakage current path across wires

(1) Thermal relays

The high frequency component of current leaking into electrostatic capacity between inverter out-

put wires will increase the effective current values and make externally connected thermal relays

operate improperly. If the wires are more than 50 meters long, it will be easy for the external

thermal relay to operate improperly with models having motors of low rated current (several

A(ampere) or less), especially the 400V class low capacity (5.5kW or less) models, because the

leak current will increase in proportion to the motor rating.

Remedies:

1.Use the electronic thermal built into the inverter. ⇒ See section 5.12.

The setting of the electronic thermal is done using parameter QNO, VJT.

2.Reduce the inverter's PWM carrier frequency. However, that will increase the motor's magnetic

noise.

The setting of PWM carrier frequency is done with the parameter Hꢀꢁꢁ. ⇒ See section 6.11.

3.This can be improved by installing 0.1µ~0.5µF - 1000V film capacitor to the input/output terminals of

each phase in the thermal relay.

U/T1

V/T2

W/T3

Thermal relays

A-18

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

(2) CT and ammeter

If a CT and ammeter are connected externally to detect inverter output current, the leak current's high

frequency component may destroy the ammeter. If the wires are more than 50 meters long, it will be

easy for the high frequency component to pass through the externally connected CT and be

superimposed on and burn the ammeter with models having motors of low rated current (several

A(ampere) or less), especially the 400V class low capacity (5.5kW or less) models, because the leak

current will increase in proportion to the motor's rated current.

Remedies:

1.Use a meter output terminal in the inverter control circuit.

The load current can be output on the meter output terminal (FM). If the meter is connected, use an

ammeter of 1mAdc full scale or a voltmeter of 7.5V-1mA full scale.

0-20mAdc (4-20mAdc) can be also output. ⇒ See section 5.4.

2.Use the monitor functions built into the inverter.

Use the monitor functions on the panel built into the inverter to check current values.

⇒See section 8.1.1.

1.4.4 Installation

■ Installation environment

The VF-FS1 Inverter is an electronic control instrument. Take full consideration to installing it in the proper

operating environment.

Danger

• Do not place any inflammable substances near the VF-FS1 Inverter.

If an accident occurs in which flame is emitted, this could lead to fire.

Prohibited

• Operate under the environmental conditions prescribed in the instruction manual.

Operations under any other conditions may result in malfunction.

Mandatory

Warning

• Do not install the VF-FS1 Inverter in any location subject to large amounts of vibration.

This could cause the unit to fall, resulting in bodily injury.

Prohibited

Mandatory

• Check to make sure that the input power voltage is +10%, -15% of the rated power voltage written on

the rating label (±10% when the load is 100% in continuous operation) If the input power voltage is not

+10%, -15% of the rated power voltage (±10% when the load is 100% in continuous operation) this

may result in fire.

A-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

•

Do not install in any location of high temperature, high humidity,

moisture condensation and freezing and avoid locations where

there is exposure to water and/or where there may be large

amounts of dust, metallic fragments and oil mist.

Do not install in any location where corrosive gases or grinding

fluids are present.

•

Operate in areas where ambient temperature ranges from -10°C to 60°C.

When installing the inverter where the ambient temperature will rise above 40°C, remove the label

(seal) from the top and operate it at a current lower than the rated one.

5cm

Measurement position

5cm

Measurement position

Note: The inverter is a heat-emitting body. Make sure proper space and ventilation is provided when

installing in the cabinet. When installing inside a cabinet, we recommend the top seal peeled off

although 40°C or less.

•

Do not install in any location that is subject to large amounts of vibration.

Note:

If the VF-FS1 Inverter is installed in a location that is subject

to vibration, anti-vibration measures are required. Please

consult with Toshiba about these measures.

•

If the VF-FS1 Inverter is installed near any of the equipment listed below, provide measures to insure

against errors in operation.

Solenoids:

Brakes:

Attach surge suppressor on coil.

Magnetic contactors: Attach surge suppressor on coil.

Fluorescent lights:

Resistors:

Attach surge suppressor on coil.

Place far away from VF-FS1 Inverter.

Resistors

A-20

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

■ How to install

Danger

• Do not install or operate the inverter if it is damaged or any component is missing.

This can result in electric shock or fire. Please consult your local sales agency for repairs. Call your

local sales agency for repairs.

Prohibited

Mandatory

• Mount the inverter on a metal plate.

The rear panel gets very hot. Do not install in an inflammable object, this can result in fire.

• Do not operate with the front panel cover removed.

This can result in electric shock.

• An emergency stop device must be installed that fits with system specifications (e.g. shut off input

power then engage mechanical brake).

Operation cannot be stopped immediately by the inverter alone, thus risking an accident or injury.

• All options used must be those specified by Toshiba.

The use of any other option may result in an accident.

Warning

• The main unit must be installed on a base that can bear the unit's weight.

If the unit is installed on a base that cannot withstand that weight, the unit may fall resulting in injury.

• If braking is necessary (to hold motor shaft), install a mechanical brake.

The brake on the inverter will not function as a mechanical hold, and if used for that purpose, injury

may result.

Mandatory

Install the inverter in a well-ventilated indoor place and mount it on a flat metal plate in portrait orientation.

If you are installing more than one inverter, the separation between inverters should be at least 5 centimeters,

and they should be arranged in horizontal rows. If the inverters are horizontally arranged with no space

between them (side-by-side installation), peel off the ventilation seals on top of the inverter. It is necessary to

decrease the current if the inverter is operated at over 40°C.

Standard installation

Side-by-side installation

•

10 cm or more

Remove seals on top

VF-FS1

5 cm or more

10 cm or more

The space shown in the diagram is the minimum allowable space. Because air cooled equipment has cooling

fans built in on the top or bottom surfaces, make the space on top and bottom as large as possible to allow

for air passage.

Note: Do not install in any location where there is high humidity or high temperatures and where there are

large amounts of dust, metallic fragments and oil mist.

A-21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

■ Calorific values of the inverter and the required ventilation

About 5% of the rated power of the inverter will be lost as a result of conversion from AC to DC or from DC to

AC. In order to suppress the rise in temperature inside the cabinet when this loss becomes heat loss, the

interior of the cabinet must be ventilated and cooled.

The amount of forcible air-cooling ventilation required and the necessary heat discharge surface quantity

when operating in a sealed cabinet according to motor capacity are as follows.

Note1: The heat loss for the optional external devices (input reactor, radio noise reduction filters, etc.) is not

included in the calorific values in the table

Note2: Case of 100% Load Continuation operation.

Operating motor

capacity

Calorific Values (w)

Amount of forcible air

cooling ventilation required

(m³/min)

Heat discharge surface

area required for sealed

storage cabinet(m²)

Voltage class

Carrier frequency

12kHz

8kHz

(kW)

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

4.0

5.5

7.5

0.25

0.36

0.58

0.68

1.1

0.88

1.26

2.02

2.4

101

120

193

249

346

459

629

3.86

4.98

6.92

9.18

12.58

13.96

15.26

21.7

0.9

1.42

1.97

2.62

3.59

3.98

4.35

6.18

0.26

0.31

0.44

0.59

1.0

Three-Phase

200V class

18.5

698

763

1085

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

4.0

5.5

7.5

1.1

1.56

2.06

3.52

4.3

103

176

215

291

430

625

1.23

1.66

2.45

3.56

3.44

3.57

4.83

Three-Phase

400V class

5.82

8.6

12.5

12.06

12.52

16.94

18.5

603

626

847

■ Panel designing taking into consideration the effects of noise

The inverter generates high frequency noise. When designing the control panel setup, consideration must be

given to that noise. Examples of measures are given below.

•

Wire so that the main circuit wires and the control circuit wires are separated. Do not place them in the

same conduit, do not run them parallel, and do not bundle them.

•

Provide shielding and twisted wire for control circuit wiring.

Separate the input (power) and output (motor) wires of the main circuit. Do not place them in the same

conduit, do not run them parallel, and do not bundle them.

•

Ground the inverter ground terminals ( ).

A-22

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

•

Install surge suppressor on any magnetic contactor and relay coils used around the inverter.

Install noise filters if necessary.

Install EMC plate and use shielded wires.

EMC plate

■ Installing more than one unit in a cabinet

If you are installing two or more inverters in one cabinet, pay attention to the following.

•

Inverters may be installed side by side with each other with no space left between them.

When installing inverters side by side, detach the caution label on the top surface of each inverter and

use them where the ambient temperature will not rise above 40°C.

When using inverters where the ambient temperature will rise above 40°C, leave a space of 5 cm or

more between them and remove the caution label from the top of each inverter, and operate each

inverter at a current lower than the rated one.

•

Ensure a space of at least 20 centimeters on the top and bottom of the inverters.

Install an air deflecting plate so that the heat rising up from the inverter on the bottom does not affect the

inverter on the top.

Ventilation fan

Inverter

Air deflecting plate

Inverter

A-23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

2. Connection

Danger

• Never disassemble, modify or repair.

This can result in electric shock, fire and injury. For repairs, call your sales agency.

Disassembly

prohibited

• Don't stick your fingers into openings such as cable wiring hole and cooling fan covers.

This can result in electric shock or other injury.

• Don't place or insert any kind of object into the inverter (electrical wire cuttings, rods, wires). This can

result in electric shock or fire.

Prohibited

• Do not allow water or any other fluid to come in contact with the inverter.

That may result in electric shock or fire.

Warning

• When transporting or carrying, do not hold by the front panel covers.

The covers may come off and the unit will drop out resulting in injury.

Prohibited

2.1

Cautions on wiring

Danger

• Never remove the front cover when power is on or open door if enclosed in a cabinet.

The unit contains many high voltage parts and contact with them will result in electric shock.

Prohibited

Mandatory

• Turn power on only after attaching the front cover or closing door if enclosed in a cabinet.

If power is turned on without the front cover attached or closing door if enclosed in a cabinet. This can

result in electric shock or other injury.

• Electrical construction work must be done by a qualified expert.

Connection of input power by someone who does not have that expert knowledge may result in fire or

electric shock.

• Connect output terminals (motor side) correctly.

If the phase sequence is incorrect, the motor will operate in reverse and that may result in injury.

• Wiring must be done after installation.

If wiring is done prior to installation that may result in injury or electric shock.

• The following steps must be performed before wiring.

(1) Shut off all input power.

(2) Wait at least ten minutes and check to make sure that the charge lamp is no longer lit.

(3) Use a tester that can measure DC voltage (800VDC or more), and check to make sure that the

voltage to the DC main circuits (across PA/+ and PC/-) is 45V or less.

If these steps are not properly performed, the wiring will cause electric shock.

• Tighten the screws on the terminal board to specified torque.

If the screws are not tightened to the specified torque, it may lead to fire.

B-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

Danger

• Ground must be connected securely.

If the ground is not securely connected, it could lead to electric shock or fire when a malfunction or

current leak occurs.

Be Grounded

Warning

• Do not attach devices with built-in capacitors (such as noise filters or surge absorber) to the output

(motor side) terminal.

This could cause a fire.

Prohibited

■ Preventing radio noise

To prevent electrical interference such as radio noise, separately bundle wires to the main circuit's power

terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) and wires to the motor terminals (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3).

■ Control and main power supply

The control power supply and the main circuit power supply for the VF-FS1 are the same.

⇒ See section 6.17.3.

If a malfunction or trip causes the main circuit to be shut off, control power will also be shut off. When

checking the cause of the malfunction or the trip, use the trip holding retention selection parameter.

■ Wiring

• Because the space between the main circuit terminals is small use sleeved pressure terminals for the

connections. Connect the terminals so that adjacent terminals do not touch each other.

• For ground terminal

use wires of the size that is equivalent to or larger than those given in table 10.1

and always ground the inverter (200V voltage class: D type ground, 400V class: C type ground).

Use as large and short a ground wire as possible and wire it as close as possible to the inverter.

• For the sizes of electric wires used in the main circuit, see the table in 10.1.

• The length of the main circuit wire in 10.1 should be no longer than 30 meters. If the wire is longer than

30 meters, the wire size (diameter) must be increased.

2.2

Standard connections

Danger

• Do not connect input power to the output (motor side) terminals (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3).

Connecting input power to the output could destroy the inverter or cause a fire.

• Do not insert a resistor between DC terminals (between PA/+ and PC/-).

It could cause a fire.

• First shut off input power and wait at least 10 minutes before touching wires on equipment (MCCB) that

is connected to inverter power side.

Prohibited

Touching the wires before that time could result in electric shock.

B-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

2.2.1 Standard connection diagram 1

This diagram shows a standard wiring of the main circuit.

B-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

2.2.2 Standard connection diagram 2

B-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

2.3

Description of terminals

2.3.1 Power circuit terminals

This diagram shows an example of wiring of the main circuit. Use options if necessary.

■ Power supply and motor connections

■ Connections with peripheral equipment

noise reduction

filter

Surge suppression

filter

Magnetic

connector

No-fuse

braker

Input AC

reactor

Motor

U/T1

R/L1

S/L2

Inverter

Power

supply

V/T2

W/T3

T/L3

Zero-phase

reactor

B-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

■ Power circuit

Terminal symbol

Terminal function

Grounding terminal for connecting inverter. There are 3 terminals in total. 2 terminals in

the terminal board, 1 terminal in the cooling fin.

200V class: three-phase 200 to 240V-50/60Hz

400V class: three-phase 380 to 480V-50/60Hz

Connect to a (three-phase induction) motor.

R/L1,S/L2,T/L3

U/T1,V/T2,W/T3

PA/+ terminal: Positive potential terminal for the internal DC main circuit

PA/+, PC/-

PC/- terminal: Negative potential terminal for the internal DC main circuit

DC power can be supplied through the PA/+ and PC/- terminals.

The arrangement of power circuit terminals are different from each range.

⇒ See section 1.3.2.1) about the arrangement of power circuit terminals.

2.3.2 Control circuit terminals

The control circuit terminal board is common to all equipment.

Regarding to the function and specification of each terminal, please refer to the following table.

⇒ See section 1.3.2.3) about the arrangement of control circuit terminals.

■ Control circuit terminals

Terminal

symbol

Electrical

specifications

Input/output

Function

Inverter internal circuits

Shorting across F-CC causes

forward rotation; open causes slow-

down and stop. (When ST is always

ON)

Shorting across R-CC causes

reverse rotation; open causes slow-

down and stop. (When ST is always

ON)

This inverter protective function is

disabled if RES are CC is connected.

Shorting RES and CC has no effect

when the inverter is in a normal

condition.

Input

No voltage

contact input

24Vdc-5mA or less

Input

*Sink/Source/PLC

selectable using

SW4

RES

PLC

Factory default setting

WN type : SINK side

WP type : SOURCE side

External 24Vdc power input

When the source logic is used, a common

terminal is connected.

24VDC

(Insulation

resistance: DC50V)

Input

(common)

Common to

Input/output

Control circuit's equipotential terminal (2

terminals)

B-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

Terminal

symbol

Electrical

specifications

Input/output

Output

Function

Inverter internal circuits

10Vdc

(permissible load

current: 10mA)

Analog power supply output

Multifunction programmable analog input.

Factory default setting: 0~10Vdc/0~60Hz

(0~50Hz) frequency input.

The function can be changed to

4~20mAdc (0~20mA) current input by

flipping the VIA (SW3) dip switch to the I

position.

10Vdc

(internal impedance:

30kΩ)

VIA

Input

By changing parameter setting, this

terminal can also be used as a

4-20mA

(internal impedance:

250Ω)

multifunction programmable contact input

terminal. When using the sink logic, be

sure to insert a resistor between P24-VIA

(4.7 kΩ-1/2 W). Also move the VIA (SW3)

dip switch to the V position.

Multifunction programmable analog input.

Standard default setting: 0~10Vdc/0~60Hz

(0~50Hz) frequency input.

10Vdc

(internal

impedance: 30kΩ)

VIB

Input

PTC thermal input ⇒ See section 6.17.15.

1mAdc full-scale

ammeter or 7.5Vdc

(10Vdc)1mA full-

scale voltmeter

Multifunction programmable analog

output. Standard default setting: output

frequency.

The function can be changed to 0-20mAdc

(4-20mA) current output by flipping the FM

(SW2) slide switch to the I position.

0-20mA (4-20mA)

DC ammeter

Output

Permissible load

resistance:

750Ω or less

P24

Output

24Vdc power output

24Vdc-50mA

* PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient) : Resettable thermal fuse resistor for over current protection

B-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

Terminal

symbol

Electrical

specifications

Input/output

Function

Inverter internal circuits

Multifunction programmable relay contact

output.

Detects the operation of the inverter's

protection function.

Contact across FLA-FLC is closed and FLB-

FLC is opened during protection function

operation.

250Vac-1A

(cosφ=1)

: at resistance load

30Vdc-0.5A

250Vac-0.5A

(cosφ=0.4)

FLA

FLB

FLC

Output

Multifunction programmable relay contact

output.

Standard default settings detect and

output low-speed signal output

frequencies.

250Vac-1A

(cosφ=1)

: at resistance load

30Vdc-0.5A

250Vac-0.5A

(cosφ=0.4)

Output

Multifunction output terminals to which two

different functions can be assigned.

■ SINK (Negative) logic/SOURCE (Positive) logic (When the

inverter's internal power supply is used)

Current flowing out turns control input terminals on. These are called sink logic terminals.

The general used method in Europe is source logic in which current flowing into the input terminal turns it

on.

Sink logic is sometimes referred to as negative logic, and source logic is referred to as positive logic.

Each logic is supplied with electricity from either the inverter's internal power supply or an external power

supply, and its connections vary depending on the power supply used.

Slide switch SW4:SINK

Sink (Negative) logic

Slide switch SW4:SOURCE

Source (Positive) logic

24V_DC

Input

Common P24

Output

Common

Programmable

controller

Programmable

controller

Inverter

B-8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

■ SINK (Negative) logic/SOURCE (Positive) logic (When an external power supply

is used)

The PLC terminal is used to connect to an external power supply or to insulate a terminal from other input

or output terminals. As for input terminals, turn the SW4 slide switch to the PLC position.

Slide switch SW4:PLC

Sink (Negative) logic

Slide switch SW4:PLC

Source (Positive) logic

24V_DC

Input

Common

Output

PLC

Input

Output

Common PLC

Programmable

controller

Programmable

controller

Inverter

■ Selecting the functions of the VIA terminals between analog input and contact

input

The functions of the VIA terminal can be selected between analog input and contact input by changing

parameter settings (Hꢀꢁꢂ). (Factory default setting: Analog input)

When using these terminals as contact input terminals in a sink logic circuit, be sure to insert a resistor

between the P24 and VIA terminals. (Recommended resistance: 4.7KΩ-1/2W)

When using the VIA terminal as a contact input terminal, be sure to turn the VIA (SW3) switch to the V

position. If no resistor is inserted or the VIA (SW3) slide switch is not turned to the V position, contact input

will be left always ON, which is very dangerous.

Switch between analog input and contact input before connecting the terminals to the control circuit

terminals. Otherwise the inverter or devices connected to it may be damaged.

B-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

+ The figure on the right shows an example of the

connection of input terminals VIA when there is used

as contact input terminals. This example illustrates

the connection when the inverter is used in sink

(Negative) logic mode.

■ Logic switching/Voltage-current output switching (slide switch)

(1) Logic switching

Use SW4 to switch between logics.

Switch between logics before wiring to the inverter and without supplying power. If switching between

sink, source and PLC is done when power is turned on after switching or when the inverter is supplied

with power, the inverter might become damaged. Confirm it before supplying power.

(2) Voltage-current output switching

Use the FM (SW2) switch to switch between voltage output and current output.

Switch the FM terminal's voltage-current output before wiring to inverter or without supplying power.

Factory default settings of slide switches

SW4 : SINK (Negative) side (WN type)

SOURCE (Positive) side (WP type)

FM (SW2): V side

VIA (SW3): V side

B-10

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

3. Operations

Danger

• Do not touch inverter terminals when electrical power is going to the inverter even if the motor is

stopped.

Touching the inverter terminals while power is connected to it may result in electric shock.

• Do not touch switches when the hands are wet and do not try to clean the inverter with a damp cloth.

Such practices may result in electric shock.

Prohibited

• Do not go near the motor in alarm-stop status when the retry function is selected.

The motor may suddenly restart and that could result in injury.

Take measures for safety, e.g. attaching a cover to the motor, against accidents when the motor

unexpectedly restarts.

• Turn power on only after attaching the front cover or closing door if enclosed in a cabinet.

If power is turned on without the front cover attached or closing door if enclosed in a cabinet, that may

result in electric shock or other injury.

• If the inverter begins to emit smoke or an unusual odor, or unusual sounds, immediately turn power off.

If the equipment is continued in operation in such a state, the result may be fire. Call your local sales

agency for repairs.

Mandatory

• Always turn power off if the inverter is not used for long periods of time.

• Turn input power on after attaching the front cover.

When enclosed inside a cabinet and using with the front cover removed, always close the cabinet

doors first and then turn power on. If the power is turned on with the front cover or the cabinet doors

open, it may result in electric shock.

• Make sure that operation signals are off before resetting the inverter after malfunction.

If the inverter is reset before turning off the operating signal, the motor may restart suddenly causing

injury.

Warning

• Do not touch heat radiating fins or discharge resistors.

These device are hot, and you'll get burned if you touch them.

Contact

prohibited

• Observe all permissible operating ranges of motors and mechanical equipment. (Refer to the motor's

instruction manual.)

Not observing these ranges may result in injury.

Prohibited

C-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

3.1

Simplified Operation of the VF-FS1

The procedures for setting operation frequency and the methods of operation can be selected from the following.

(1) Run and stop from the operation panel

(2) Run and stop using external signals to the terminal

board

Start / Stop

(3) Run and stop through serial communication

(1) Setting using the operation panel

(2) Setting using external signals to the terminal board

(0-10Vdc, 4-20mAdc)

(3) Setting through serial communication

(4) Setting using external contact up/down

Setting the frequency

Local mode and Remote mode

LOC

REM

LOC

REM

Local mode : When Local mode selected by

key, start and stop, and frequency setting are

effective only by operation panel keys.

The LOC/REM key lamp is lit while Local mode selected.

Remote mode : Start and stop, and frequency setting follow the selection of EOQF(Command

mode),or HOQF(Frequency setting mode).

*1 At default setting, the switching between Local mode and Remote mode is effective. When prohibiting this

function, refer to the chapter 6.20.1.

*2 At default setting, when switched from remote of start or stop and running frequency at Remote mode are

shifted to Local mode. When changing from Local mode to Remote mode, the inverter can start in case of

running mode selection at remote side. In case of prohibiting this function. ⇒ See section 6.10.

*3 The status of Local/Remote mode is memoried when power off.

Remote mode selection, use the basic parameters EOQF (Command

mode selection), HOQF (Frequency setting mode selection 1).

Title

Function

Adjustment range

0: Terminal board

1: Panel

Default setting

EOQF

Command mode selection

2:Serial communication

1: VIA

2: VIB

Frequency setting mode

selection 1

HOQF

3: Operation panel

4: Serial communication

5: External contact up/down

* See 5.3 for EOQF,HOQF.

C-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

3.1.1 How to start and stop

■ Example of a EOQF setting procedure

Key operated

LED display

Operation

Displays the operation frequency (operation stopped).

ꢀꢁꢀ

(When standard monitor display selection Hꢂꢃꢀ=ꢀ [Operation

frequency])

MODE

ENT

Displays the first basic parameter [Wizard function (CWH)].

Press either the or key to select “EOQF”.

CWH

EOQF

ꢀ

Press ENT key to display the parameter setting. (Default setting:ꢀ).

Change the parameter to ꢃ (panel) by pressing the key.

ꢃ

Press the ENT key to save the changed parameter. EOQF and the

parameter set value are displayed alternately.

ENT

ꢃ⇔EOQF

(1)Start and stop using the operation panel keys (EOQF=ꢃ)

STOP

RUN

Use the

and

keys on the operation panel to start and stop the motor.

RUN

STOP

: Motor starts.

: Motor stops.

To switch between forward run and reverse run from the control panel, the parameter HT

(forward/reverse run selection) needs to be set to ꢄ or ꢅ.

(2)RUN/STOP by means of an external signal to the terminal board (EOQF=ꢀ):

Sink (Negative) logic

Use external signals to the inverter terminal board to start and stop the motor.

Slow down

and stop

Short

Open

and

terminals: run forward

Frequency

F-CC

OFF

terminals: slow down and stop

(3)Coast stop

Coast stop

The standard default setting is for slowdown stop. To

make a coast stop, assign a "1(ST)" terminal function

to an idle terminal using the programmable terminal

function.

Motor

speed

OFF

F-CC

Change to Hꢃꢃꢀ=ꢀ.

For coast stop, open the ST-CC when stopping the

motor in the state described at left.The monitor on the

inverter at this time will display QHH.

OFF

ST-CC

C-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

3.1.2 How to set the frequency

■ Example of a HOQF setting procedure

Key operated

LED display

Operation

Displays the operation frequency (operation stopped).

(When standard monitor display selection Hꢂꢃꢀ=ꢀ [Operation

frequency])

ꢀꢁꢀ

MODE

Displays the first basic parameter [Wizard function (CWH)].

CWH

HOQF

ꢃ

Press either the key or key to select “HOQF”.

ENT

Press ENT key to display the parameter setting. (Default setting: ꢃ).

Change the parameter to ꢅ (Operation panel) by pressing the key.

ꢅ

Press the ENT key to save the changed parameter. HOQF and the

parameter set value are displayed alternately.

ENT

ꢅ⇔HOQF

Pressing the MODE key twice returns the display to standard monitor mode (displaying operation frequency).

(1) Setting the frequency using the operation panel (HOQF=ꢅ)

Set the frequency with the operation panel..

: Moves the frequency up

: Moves the frequency down

■ Example of operating a run from the panel

Key operated

LED display

Operation

Displays the operation frequency.

(When standard monitor display selection Hꢂꢃꢀ=ꢀ [Operation

ꢀꢁꢀ

frequency])

ꢆꢀꢁꢀ

ꢆꢀꢁꢀ⇔HE

ꢇꢀꢁꢀ

Set the operation frequency.

Press the ENT key to save the operation frequency. HE and the

frequency are displayed alternately.

ENT

Pressing the key or the key will change the operation frequency

even during operation.

C-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

(2)Setting the frequency using the operation panel (HOQF=ꢃ or ꢄ)

■ Frequency setting

Setting the frequency using external potentiometer

+Potentiometer

Setting frequency using the potentiometer (1-10kΩ, 1/4W)

⇒ For more detailed information on adjustments, see

section 6.5.

: Setting frequency

using potentiometer

VIB

60Hz

Frequency

MIN

MAX

The input terminal VIA can be used in the same way.

HOQF=ꢃ: VIA effective, HOQF=ꢄ: VIB effective

⇒ For more details, see section 6.5.

Setting the frequency using input voltage (0~10V)

+Voltage signal

Setting frequency using voltage signals (0∼10V).

⇒ For more detailed information on adjustments, see

section6.5.

VIA

: Voltage signal 0-10Vdc

60Hz

Frequency

The input terminal VIB can be used in the same way.

HOQF=ꢃ: VIA effective, HOQF=ꢄ: VIB effective

⇒ For more details, see section 6.5.

0Vdc

10Vdc

Note: Be sure to turn the VIA (SW3) slide switch to the V (voltage) position.

Setting the frequency using current input (4~20mA)

+Current Signal

Current signal Setting frequency using current signals (4~20mA).

⇒ For more detailed information on adjustments, see section 6.5.

VIA

: Current signal 4-20mAdc

60Hz

Frequency

4mAdc

20mAdc

* Setting of parameters also allow 0-20mAdc.

Note: Be sure to turn the VIA (SW3) slide switch to the I (current) position.

C-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

3.2

How to operate the VF-FS1

Overview of how to operate the inverter with simple examples.

Remote mode selection,

Ex.1

Setting the operation frequency using the operation panel and

running and stopping using the operation panel.

(1) Wiring

PA/+

PC/-

Motor

MCCB

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

U/T1

V/T2

W/T3

filter

Noise

Power circuit

Control

circuit

(2) Parameter setting

Title

Function

Command mode selection

Frequency setting mode selection 1

Setting value

EOQF

HOQF

(3) Operation

Run/stop: Press the

and STOP keys on the panel.

RUN

Frequency setting: Set with the

keys on the operation panel.

ENT

To store the set frequencies in memory, press the

key.

HEand the set frequency will flash on and off alternately.

C-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

Remote mode selection,

Operation frequency setting, running and stopping using external

signals.

Ex.2

(1) Wiring

PA/+

PC/-

Motor

MCCB

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

U/T1

V/T2

W/T3

Noise

filter

Power circuit

Run forward signal

Control

circuit

Run backward signal

Common

VIA

VIB

Voltage signal: 0∼10V, Current signal: 4∼20mA

External potentiometer

(Otherwise, input voltage signal (0~10V) between the terminals VIA-CC.)

(2) Parameter setting

Title

Function

Setting value

Command mode selection

EOQF

HOQF

Frequency setting mode selection 1

1or2

(3) Operation

Run/stop: ON/OFF input to F-CC, R-CC. (Set SW4 to Sink logic)

Frequency setting: VIA and VIB: 0-10Vdc (External potentiometer)

VIA: Input 4-20mAdc.

Use the VIA (SW3) slide switch to switch between voltage and current to the VIA terminal.

Voltage input: V side

Current input: I side

LOC

REM

+Please turn off the lamp by pressing the

key when the LOC/REM key lamp is lit.

C-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

4. Basic VF-FS1 operations

The VF-FS1 has the following three monitor modes.

: The standard inverter mode. This mode is enabled when

inverter power goes on.

Standard monitor mode

This mode is for monitoring the output frequency and setting the frequency

designated value. In it is also displayed information about status alarms during

running and trips.

•

Setting frequency designated values ⇒ See section 3.1.2

Status alarm

If there is an error in the inverter, the alarm signal and the frequency will flash

alternately in the LED display.

When a current flows at or higher than the overcurrent stall level.

When a voltage is generated at or higher than the over voltage stall

level.

When a load reaches 50% or higher of the overload trip value.

When the temperature reaches the overheating protection alarm level.

Setting monitor mode

Status monitor mode

: The mode for setting inverter parameters.

How to set parameters ⇒ See section 4.2.

: The mode for monitoring all inverter status.

Allows monitoring of set frequencies, output current/voltage and terminal

information.

For more on how to use the monitor ⇒ See section 8.1.

MODE

Pressing the key

will move the inverter through each of the modes.

Standard monitor

mode

MODE

Status monitor

mode

Setting monitor

mode

MODE

D-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

4.1

Flow of status monitor mode

Flow of monitor as following

D-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

4.2

How to set parameters

The standard default parameters are programmed before the unit is shipped from the factory. Parameters can be

divided into 5 major categories. Select the parameter to be changed or to be searched and retrieved.

The basic parameters that must be programmed

before the first use. ⇒ See section 4.2.1.

Basic parameters

The parameters for detailed and special setting.

⇒ See section 4.2.2.

Extended parameters

Indicates parameters that are different from the

standard default setting parameters. Use them to

check after setting and to change setting.

User parameters

(automatic edit function)

(Parameter title: I4W). ⇒ See section 4.2.3.

The wizard function refers to the special function of

calling up ten frequently used parameters.

You can set up the inverter easily by simply setting the

parameters in one after another. (Parameter name:

CWH). ⇒ See section 4.2.4.

Wizard function

This parameter has the function of displaying, in

reverse chronological order, the five parameters that

were changed last. This function comes in very handy

when you adjust the inverter repeatedly using the

same parameter. (Parameter name: CWJ).

⇒ See section 4.2.5.

History parameter

Adjustment range of parameters

JK: An attempt has been made to assign a value that is higher than the programmable range. Or, as

a result of changing other parameters, the programmed value of the parameter that is now

selected exceeds the upper limit.

NQ: An attempt has been made to assign a value that is lower than the programmable range. Or, as a

result of changing other parameters, the programmed value of the parameter that is now selected

exceeds the lower limit.

If the above alarm is flashing on and off, no setting can be done of values that are equal to or greater

than JK or equal to or lower than NQ.

D-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

4.2.1 How to set the basic parameters

All of the basic parameters can be set by the same step procedures.

[Steps in key entry for basic parameters]

* Parameters were

factory-set by default

Switches to the setting monitor mode.

before shipment.

* Select the parameter to

be changed from "Table

of parameters".

MODE

* If there is something

that you do not

Selects parameter to be changed.

understand during the

operation, press the

MODE key to return to

the ꢀꢁꢀ indication.

⇒ See section 11.2 for

basic parameters.

Reads the programmed parameter

setting.

ENT

Changes the parameter setting.

Saves the changed value of the

parameter setting.

ENT

■

Example of setting procedure (Changing the maximum frequency from 80Hz to 60Hz).

Key operated

LED display

Operation

Displays the operation frequency (operation stopped).

(When standard monitor display selection Hꢂꢃꢀ=ꢀ [Operation

frequency])

ꢀꢁꢀ

MODE

The first basic parameter “CWH” (Wizard function) is displayed.

Press either the or key to select “HJ”.

CWH

ENT

Pressing the ENT key reads the maximum frequency.

Press the key to change the maximum frequency to 60Hz.

ꢄꢀꢁꢀ

ꢅꢀꢁꢀ

Press the ENT key to save the maximum frequency. HJ and the

frequency are displayed alternately.

ENT

ꢅꢀꢁꢀ⇔HJ

After this,

→Displays the same

programmed

parameter.

→Switches to the

display in the

status monitor

mode.

→Displays names

of other

parameters.

ENT

MODE

D-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

4.2.2 How to set extended parameters

The VF-FS1 has extended parameters to allow you to make full use of its functions.

All extended parameters are expressed with H and three digits.

Basic parameters

ENT

Hꢃꢀꢀ∼Hꢇꢇꢇ

Hꢆꢆꢆ

MODE

Press the

key or the

key to

Press the MODE key once and use the

key

change the set value. Pressing

the ENT key allows the reading of

parameter setting.

to select Hꢆꢆꢆ from the basic parameters.

[Steps in key entry for extended parameters]

⇒ See section 11.3 for

extended parameters.

: Switches to the setting monitor mode.(Displays CWH)

MODE

: Selects "Hꢆꢆꢆ" from basic parameters.

: The first extended parameter “HKꢀꢀ” (Low-speed signal output frequency) is displayed.

: Selects the extended parameter whose setting needs to be changed.

: Reads the programmed parameter setting.

ENT

: Changes the parameter setting.

Saves the changed value of the extended parameter setting.

ENT

MODE

ENT

Pressing the

key instead of the

key moves back to the previous status.

D-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

■ Example of parameter setting

Steps in setting are as follows

(Example of Auto-restart control selectionꢈHꢉꢀꢃ from 0 to 1.)

Key operated

LED display

Operation

Displays the operation frequency (operation stopped).

(When standard monitor display selection Hꢂꢃꢀ=ꢀ [Operation

frequency])

ꢀ.ꢀ

MODE

The first basic parameter “CWH” (Wizard function) is displayed.

CWH

Hꢆꢆꢆ

Hꢃꢀꢀ

Hꢉꢀꢃ

ꢀ

Press either the or the to change to the parameter group

Hꢆꢆꢆ.

ENT

Press the ENT key to display the first extended parameter Hꢃꢀꢀ.

Press the key to change to the auto-restarte control selection

Hꢉꢀꢃ.

ENT

Pressing the ENT key allows the reading of parameter setting.

Press the key to change the auto-restarte control selection from ꢀ

to ꢃ.

ꢃ

Pressing the ENT key alternately flashes on and off the parameter

and changed value and allows the save of those values.

ꢃ⇔Hꢉꢀꢃ

If there is anything you do not understand during this operation, press the MODE key several times to

start over from the step of CWH display.

4.2.3 Search and resetting of changed parameters (I4W)

Automatically searches for only those parameters that are programmed with values different from the

standard default setting and displays them in the user parameter group I4W. Parameter setting can also be

changed within this group.

Notes on operation

•

If you reset a parameter to its factory default, the parameter will no longer appear in I4W.

HO, HꢊꢂꢀꢆHꢊꢂꢉ are not appeared, if the value of these parameters are changed.

■ How to search and reprogram parameters

The operations of search and resetting of parameters are as follows.

Key operated

LED display

Operation

Displays the operation frequency (operation stopped).

(When standard monitor display selection Hꢂꢃꢀ=ꢀ [Operation

frequency])

ꢀꢁꢀ

MODE

CWH

ITꢁW

The first basic parameter “CWH” (Wizard function) is displayed.

Press or key to select I4W.

D-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

Key operated

ENT

LED display

Operation

Press the ENT key to enable the user parameter automatic edit

function.

Wꢆꢆꢆ

Searches for parameters that are different in value from the standard

default setting and displays those parameters. Press the ENT key or

the key to change the parameter displayed. (Pressing the key

moves the search in the reverse direction).

WꢆꢆH

ENT

(WꢆꢆT)

↓

CEE

ENT

Press the ENT key to display the set value.

ꢄꢁꢀ

ꢋꢁꢀ

Press the key and key to change set value.

Press the ENT key to save the changed value. The parameter name

and the programmed value will flash on and off alternately.

After the change has been saved, “Wꢆꢆꢆ“ is displayed.

ENT

ꢋꢁꢀ⇔CEE

Use the same steps as those given above to display parameters that

you want to search for or change setting with the key and key.

WꢆꢆH

(WꢆꢆT)

(

)

When IT. W appears again, the search is ended.

ITꢁW

A search can be canceled by pressing the MODE key. Press the

MODE key once while the search is underway to return to the display

of parameter setting mode.

After that you can press the MODE key to return to the status

monitor mode or the standard monitor mode (display of operation

frequency).

ITꢁW

↓

HTꢆH

↓

ꢀꢁꢀ

MODE

If there is anything you do not understand during this operation, press the

key several times to

start over from the step of CWHꢈdisplay.

4.2.4 Setting a parameter, using the wizard function (CWH)

Wizard function (CWH):

The wizard function refers to the special function of calling up ten frequently used parameters.

You can set up the inverter easily by simply setting the parameters in one after another.

Notes on operation

MODE

• If there is anything you do not understand during this operation, press the

key several times to

start over from the step of CWH display.

JGCF or GPF is affixed respectively to the first or last parameter.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

The wizard function refers to the

special function of calling up ten

frequently used parameters.

CWH

Wizard function

D-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

■ How to use the wizard function

Key operated

LED display

Operation

Displays the operation frequency (operation stopped).

ꢀꢁꢀ

(When standard monitor display selection Hꢂꢃꢀ=ꢀ [Operation

frequency])

MODE

ENT

CWH

CWꢃ

****

The first basic parameter “CWH” (Wizard function) is displayed.

Press the ENT key to confirm your choice. The first parameter in the

purpose-specific wizard parameter group is displayed. (See Table below)

After moving to the purpose-specific wizard parameter group, change the

setting of each parameter by pressing the or key and the ENT key.

(

)

GPF is dialyzed on completion of the setting of the wizard parameter

group.

GPF

Parameter

MODE

display

↓

CWH

↓

HTꢆH

↓

Press the MODE key to exit the wizard parameter group.

By pressing the MODE key, you can return to the default monitoring mode

(display of operation frequency).

ꢀꢁꢀ

■ How Parameters of Quick setting wizard

Title

Function

Automatic

acceleration/deceleration

Acceleration time 1

CWꢃ

CEE

FGE

Deceleration time 1

Lower limit frequency

Upper limit frequency

Motor thermal protection

Meter adjustment

VJT

V/F control mode selection

Base frequency 1

Base frequency voltage 1

XNX

D-8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

4.2.5 Searching for a history of changes, using the history

function (CWJ)

History function (CWJ):

Automatically searches for 5 latest parameters that are programmed with values different from the

standard default setting and displays them in the CWJ. Parameter setting can also be changed

within this group CWJ.

Notes on operation

•

If no history information is stored, this parameter is skipped and the next parameter “CWꢃ” is

displayed.

•

JGCF and GPF are added respectively to the first and last parameters in a history of changes.

■ How to use the history function

Key operated

LED display

Operation

Displays the operation frequency (operation stopped).

(When standard monitor display selection Hꢂꢃꢀ=ꢀ [Operation

frequency])

ꢀꢁꢀ

MODE

CWH

CWJ

The first basic parameter “CWH” (Wizard function) is displayed.

Select the History function (CWJ) by pressing the or key.

The parameter that was set or changed last is displayed.

Press the ENT key to display the set value.

ENT

CEE

ꢄꢁꢀ

ꢋꢁꢀ

Press the key and key to change set value.

Press the ENT key to save the changed value. The parameter name

and the programmed value will flash on and off alternately.

ENT

(

ꢋꢁꢀ⇔CEE

****

Use the same steps as those given above to display parameters that

you want to search for or change setting with the key and key.

)

JGCF: First historic record

GPF: Last historic record

JGCF

(

(GPF)

Parameter

MODE

display

Press the MODE key to return to the parameter setting mode

“CWH.”

After that you can press the MODE key to return to the status

monitor mode or the standard monitor mode (display of operation

frequency).

↓

CWH

↓

HTꢆH

↓

ꢀꢁꢀ

Note: Parameter Hꢂꢀꢀ (Prohibition of change of parameter settings) is not displayed in this “CWJ”.

D-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

4.2.6 Parameters that cannot be changed while running

For safety reasons, the following parameters have been set up so that they cannot be reprogrammed while

the inverter is running. Stop operation (“ꢀꢁꢀ” or “QHH” is displayed) before changing parameter settings.

[Basic parameters]

CWꢃ

: Automatic acceleration/deceleration

: Parameter setting macro function

: Command mode selection

: Frequency setting mode selection 1

: Default setting

CWꢊ

EOQF

Set Hꢂꢉꢅ, and they can be changed while

HOQF

the inverter is running.

V[R

: Maximum frequency

: Base frequency 1

XNX

: Base frequency voltage1

: V/F control mode selection 1

[Extended parameters]

Hꢃꢀꢄ∼Hꢃꢃꢄ : Input terminal selection parameters

Hꢃꢉꢀ∼Hꢃꢉꢇ : Output terminal selection parameters

Hꢃꢂꢀ

: Base frequency 2

Hꢃꢂꢃ

: Base frequency voltage 2

Hꢉꢀꢃ∼Hꢉꢃꢃ : Protection parameters

Hꢉꢃꢅ

: Carrier frequency control mode selection

Hꢊꢀꢀ

: Auto-tuning

Hꢊꢃꢋ∼Hꢊꢃꢇ : Motor constant parameters

Hꢊꢄꢀ∼Hꢊꢇꢅ : Motor control parameters

Hꢅꢀꢃ

Hꢅꢀꢉ

Hꢅꢀꢋ

Hꢅꢀꢄ

Hꢅꢃꢉ

Hꢅꢌꢅ

Hꢅꢌꢂ

Hꢂꢉꢌ

: Stall prevention level 1

: Emergency stop selection

: Output phase failure detection mode selection

: Input phase failure detection mode selection

: Detection of output short-circuit during start-up selection

: Over-voltage stall protection level

: Under voltage trip/alarm selection

: Prohibition of panel local/remote operation (

LOC

REM

key)

Hꢇꢃꢀ∼Hꢇꢃꢌ : PM motor parameters

The setting of any parameter other than the above can be changed even during operation.

Keep in mind, however, that when the parameter Hꢂꢀꢀ (prohibition of change of parameter settings) is set to

ꢃ (prohibited), no parameters can be set or changed.

D-10

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

4.2.7 Returning all parameters to standard default setting

Setting the standard default setting parameter V[R=ꢉ, all parameters can be returned to the those factory

default settings.

⇒ For more details on the standard default setting parameter V[R, see section 5.5.

Notes on operation

•

We recommend that before this operation you write down on paper the values of those parameters,

because when setting V[R=ꢉ, all parameters with changed values will be returned to standard

factory default setting.

•

Note that HO, HOUN, Hꢃꢀꢇ, HꢊꢂꢀꢆHꢊꢂꢉ and Hꢄꢄꢀ will not be reset to their factory

default settings.

■ Steps for returning all parameters to standard default setting

Key operated

LED display

Operation

Displays the operation frequency (perform during operation stopped).

ꢀꢁꢀ

MODE

The first basic parameter “CWH” (Wizard function) is displayed.

CWH

V[R

Press the key or the key to change to V[R.

Pressing the ENT key displays the programmed parameters. (V[R

will always display "ꢀ(zero)" on the right, the previous setting on the

left.)

ENT

ꢉ

ꢀ

ꢉ

Press the key or the key to change the set value.

To return to standard factory default setting, change to "ꢉ".

Pressing the ENT key displays "KPKV" while returning all

parameters to factory default setting.

KPKV

ꢀꢁꢀ

The monitor returns to the display of setup parameters.

MODE

If there is anything you do not understand during this operation, press the

key several times to

start over from the step of CWH display.

4.2.8 How to save/load the user setting parameters

The current settings of all parameters can be stored (saved) in memory at a time by setting the standard

setting mode selection parameter V[R to ꢂ. Also, all parameter settings stored in memory can be restored

(loaded) by setting parameter V[R to ꢄ. This means that you can use this parameter (V[R=ꢂ and ꢄ) as

the parameter for your own initial settings (default settings).

D-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

5. Basic parameters

Before you operate the inverter, the parameters that you must first program are the basic parameters.

5.1

Setting acceleration/deceleration time

CWꢀ ：Automatic acceleration/deceleration

CEE ：Acceleration time 1

FGE ：Deceleration time 1

•

Function

1) For acceleration time 1 CEE programs the time that it takes for the inverter output frequency to go from

0Hz to maximum frequency HJ.

2) For deceleration time 1 FGE programs the time that it takes for the inverter output frequency to got

from maximum frequency HJ to 0Hz.

5.1.1 Automatic acceleration/deceleration

This automatically adjusts acceleration and deceleration time in line with load size.

CWꢀ =ꢀ

Adjusts the acceleration/deceleration time automatically within the range of 1/8 to 8 times as long as the

time set with the CEE or FGE, depending on the current rating of the inverter.

CWꢀ =ꢁ

Automatically adjusts speed during acceleration only. During deceleration, speed is not adjusted

automatically but reduced at the rate set with FGE.

Output

frequency (Hz)

Output

frequency (Hz)

When load is large

When load is small

Time

[sec]

Time

[sec]

Deceleration

time

Acceleration

time

Acceleration

time

Deceleration

time

Shorten acceleration/deceleration time

Lengthen acceleration/deceleration time

Set CWꢀ (automatic acceleration/deceleration) to ꢀ or ꢁ.

E-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

0: Disabled (manual)

1: Automatic

Default setting

CWꢀ

Automatic acceleration/deceleration

2: Automatic (only at acceleration)

+ When automatically setting acceleration/deceleration time, always change the acceleration/deceleration

time so that it conforms to the load. The acceleration/deceleration time changes constantly with load

fluctuations. For inverters that requires a fixed acceleration/deceleration time, use the manual settings

(CEE, FGE).

+ Setting acceleration/deceleration time (CEE,FGE) in conformance with mean load allows optimum

setting that conforms to further changes in load.

+ Use this parameter after actually connecting the motor.

+ When the inverter is used with a load that fluctuates considerably, it may fail to adjust the acceleration or

deceleration time in time, and therefore may be tripped.

■ Methods of setting automatic acceleration/deceleration

Key operated

LED display

Operation

Displays the operation frequency.

(When standard monitor display selection Hꢄꢀꢂ is set to ꢂ

[Operation frequency])

ꢂꢃꢂ

MODE

CWH

CWK

ꢂ

The first basic parameter “CWH” (Wizard function) is displayed.

Press the key to change the parameter to CWK.

ENT

Pressing the ENT key allows the reading of parameter setting.

Press the key to change the parameter to ꢀ or ꢁ.

ꢀ

Press the ENT key to save the changed parameter. CWꢀ and the

parameter are displayed alternately.

ꢀ⇔CWꢀ

5.1.2 Manually setting acceleration/deceleration time

Set acceleration time from 0 (Hz) operation frequency to maximum frequency HJ and deceleration time as

the time when operation frequency goes from maximum frequency HJ to 0 (Hz).

Output frequency (Hz)

CWꢀ = ꢂꢅ(Manual)

Time [sec]

CEE

FGE

E-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

0.0-3200 sec.

Default setting

According to model

(⇒ See page K-14)

According to model

(⇒ See page K-14)

CEE

FGE

Acceleration time 1

Deceleration time 1

0.0-3200 sec.

Note:When the acceleration/deceleration time is set at 0.0 seconds, the inverter speed increases or reduces

speed within 0.05 seconds.

+ If the programmed value is shorter than the optimum acceleration/deceleration time determined by load

conditions, overcurrent stall or overvoltage stall function may make the acceleration/deceleration time

longer than the programmed time. If an even shorter acceleration/deceleration time is programmed, there

may be an overcurrent trip or overvoltage trip for inverter protection.

⇒ For further details, see section 13.1.

E-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

5.2

Specifying an operation mode, using parameters

CWꢆ : Parameter setting macro function

•

Function

Automatically programs all parameters (parameters described below) related to the functions by selecting

the inverter's operating method.

The major functions can be programmed simply.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

0: Disabled

1: Coast stop

Default setting

CWꢆ

Parameter setting macro function

2: 3-wire operation

3: External input UP/DOWN setting

4: 4-20mA current input operation

Note:When this parameter is invoked after it has been set, ꢂ is always displayed (on the right side).

The number on the left side refers to the number specified previously.

Example ꢀꢅꢂ

Automatically programmed functions and parameter set values

Relational

parameter

Default setting

value

1: Coast stop

2:3-wire

operation

3:External input

UP/DOWN

setting

4: 4-20mA

current input

operation

EOꢂF

HOꢂF

0: Terminal board 0: Terminal board 0: Terminal board 0: Terminal board 0: Terminal board

5:UP/DOWN

1: VIA

from external

contact

1: VIA

Hꢀꢀꢂ (Always)

Hꢀꢀꢀ (F)

1: ST

2:F

0: Disabled

1: ST

2:F

1: ST

2:F

Hꢀꢀꢁ (R)

Hꢀꢀꢇ (RES)

Hꢁꢂꢀ

3:R

1:ST

49:HD

10: RES

41:UP

6:S1

10: RES

0 (%)

10: RES

42:DOWN

10: RES

20 (%)

⇒ See K-14 for input terminal functions.

Disabled (CWꢆ=ꢂ)

The parameter does nothing. Even if set to ꢂ, CWꢆ will not return the setting you made to its factory

default.

E-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

Coast stop (CWꢆ=ꢀ)

Setting for coast stopping. In sink logic mode, closing the circuit between the R and CC terminals places the

inverter in standby mode and opening the circuit places it in coast stop mode, because ST (standby signal)

is assigned to the R terminal.

⇒ See section 3.1.1 (3) and 6.3.1 for details.

3-wire operation (CWꢆ=ꢁ)

Can be operated by a momentary push-button. HD (operation holding) is assigned to the terminal R. A self-

holding of operations is made in the inverter by connecting the stop switch (b-contact) to the R terminal and

connecting the running switch (a-contact) to the F terminal.

Three-wire operation (one-touch operation)

You can carry out operation by simply pressing the ON/OFF button.

Standard connection diagram- Forward run

Parameter setting:

When parameter CWꢆis set to ꢁ, the following

parameters are set automatically.

Hꢀꢀꢂ :ꢀ (ST)

R (HD)

RES

EOQF : ꢂ (terminal board).

R terminal Hꢀꢀꢁ : ꢆꢈ (operation holding).

Note 1 : Even if each terminal is ON, any command entered

through a terminal is ignored when power is turned

on (to prevent the load from starting to move

unexpectedly). Enable to turn the input terminal on

at power on.

PLC

VIA

VIB

Note 2 : When HD is OFF, any attempt to turn on F is

ignored.

RUN

STOP

Note 3 : Sending out a RUN signal during DC braking has

no effect in stopping DC braking.

Selecting HD (operation holding) with the input

terminal selection parameter

Select HD (operation holding) using the input

terminal selection parameter, and turn HD on to

get the inverter ready for operation or turn HD

off to stop operation.

E-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

In the case of reverse operation, the 3 wires operation is also possible as well as forward operation by assigning "R

(reverse function)" to the "RES" terminal.

Output frequency

Operation

frequency

Forward run

Note 4 :

command

When HD is OFF, any

attempt to turn on F or R is

ignored. When R is ON,

you cannot start operation

by turning on HD. Even

when both R and HD are

ON, you cannot start

operation by turning on F.

To start operation, turn off

F and R temporarily, then

turn them back on.

Operation

frequency

command

Reverse run

OFF

Powered

OFF

Note 2,4

Note 1

External input UP/DOWN setting (CWꢆ=ꢇ)

Allows setting of frequency with the input from an external contact. Can be applied to changes of

frequencies from several locations.

In case of cancelling the frequency UP/DOWN, it is necessary to assign "CLR (frequency UP/DOWN

cancellation from external contacts function)" to the "VIA" terminal separately.

⇒ See section 6.5.3 for details.

4-20 mA current input(CWꢆ=ꢆ)

Used for setting frequencies with 4-20mAdc current input.

E-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

5.3

Selection of operation mode

Local mode and Remote mode

LOC

REM

LOC

REM

Local mode : When Local mode selected by

key, start and stop, and frequency setting are

effective only by operation panel keys.

The local lamp is lit while Local mode selected.

Remote mode : Start and stop, and frequency setting follow the selection of EOQF(Command

mode),or HOQF(Frequency setting mode).

Setting mode – Switching of commands and references

Commands

EOQF

LOC

REM Key

Logic input* = CPCA (48)

Com. priority

cancellation

Terminal board

Operation panel

Local/Remote

Run / Forward

Run / Reverse

Serial

communication

Operation

panel

References

HOQF

Logic input* = FCHG (38)

Frequency reference

Hꢁꢂꢄ priority switch

VIA

VIB

Operation panel

Internal

Serial

communication

reference

Operation

panel

Serial

communication

Hꢁꢂꢄ

UP/DOWN

VIA

VIB

Operation panel

Serial

communication

UP/DOWN

E-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

EOQF : Command mode selection

HOQF : Frequency setting mode selection 1

•

Function

Remote mode selection, these parameters are used to specify which input device (operation panel,

terminal board, serial communication) takes priority in entering an operation stop command or a frequency

setting command, VIA, VIB, operation panel, serial communication device, external contact up/down).

At Local mode selection, the start/stop operation and frequency setting by operation panel is prior with no

relation of EOQF/HOQFꢅsetting.

Title

Function

Adjustment range

0: Terminal board

1: Operation panel

Default setting

EOQF

Command mode selection

2: Serial communication

Programmed value

Terminal board

ON and OFF of an external signal Runs and stops operation.

ꢂ:

ꢀ:

ꢁꢉ

operation

Operation panel

operation

RUN

STOP

Press the

and

keys on the operation panel to start and stop.

Serial communication

operation

Run and stop through serial communication.

There are two types of function: the function that conforms to commands selected by EOQF, and the function

that conforms only to commands from the terminal board.

⇒ See the table of input terminal function selection in Chapter 11.

When priority is given to commands from a linked computer or terminal board, they have priority over the

setting of EOQF.

E-8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

1: VIA

2: VIB

HOQF Frequency setting mode selection 1 3: Operation panel

4: Serial communication

5: UP/DOWN from external contact

[Programmed value]

A frequency command is set by means of a signal from an external input device

(VIA terminal: 0-10Vdc or 4-20mAdc).

VIA input

ꢀ:

ꢁ:

ꢇ:

ꢆ:

ꢊ:

An external signal (VIB terminal: 0-10Vdc) is used to specify a frequency

command.

VIB input

Press the

key or the

key on either the operation panel or the

Operation panel

Communication

UP/DOWN frequency

expansion panel (optional) to set frequency.

Frequencies are set by commands from an external control unit.

Terminals are used to specify an up/down frequency command.

No matter what value the command mode selection EOQF and the frequency setting mode selection

HOQF are set to the control input terminal functions described below are always in operative state.

•

Reset terminal (default setting: RES, valid only for tripping)

Standby terminal (when programmed by programmable input terminal functions).

External input tripping stop terminal command (when so set using the programmable input terminal

function)

To make changes in the command mode selection EOQF and the frequency setting mode selection 1

HOQF, first stop the inverter temporarily.

■ Preset-speed operation

EOQF: Set to ꢂ (Terminal board).

HOQF: Valid in all setting values.

E-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

5.4

Meter setting and adjustment

HOUN : Meter selection

ꢅHOꢅ : Meter adjustment

•

Function

The signal output from the FM terminal is an analog voltage signal.

For the meter, use either a full-scale 0-1mAdc ammeter or full-scale 0-7.5Vdc (or 10Vdc-1mA) voltmeter.

Switching to 0-20mAdc (4-20mAdc) output current can be made by turning the FM (SW2) slide switch to

the I position. When switching to 4-20mAdc current input, make adjustments using Hꢋꢈꢀ (analog

output gradient) and Hꢋꢈꢁ (analog output bias).

[Parameter setting]

Supposition output at

Title

Function

Adjustment range

0:Output frequency

1:Output current

2:Set frequency

3:DC voltage

4:Output voltage command value

5:Input power

6:Output power

7:Torque

Default setting

HOUN=ꢀꢄ

Maximum frequency (HJ)

1.5 times of rated current

Maximum frequency (HJ)

1.5 times of rated voltage

1.85 times of rated power

2.5 times of rated torque

Rated load factor

8:Torque current

9:Motor cumulative load factor

10: Inverter cumulative load factor

11: - (Do not select)

Meter

selection

HOUN

12: Frequency setting value (after PID)

13: VIA Input value

14: VIB Input value

15: Fixed output 1 (Output current: 100%)

16: Fixed output 2 (Output current: 50%)

17: Fixed output 3

Maximum frequency (HJ)

Maximum input value

(Supposition output at HOUN=17)

18: Serial communication data

19: For adjustments (HOset value is

displayed.)

FA51=1000

Meter

adjustment

E-10

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

■ Resolution

All FM terminals have a maximum of 1/1000.

■ Example of 4-20mA output adjustment ⇒ For details, see section 6.19.1.

Hꢋꢈꢀ=1, Hꢋꢈꢁ=0

Hꢋꢈꢀ=1, Hꢋꢈꢁ=20

Output

currrent

Hꢋꢈꢁ

Internal calculated value

Note 1: When using the FM terminal for current output, be sure that the external load resistance is less than 750Ω.

Note 2: Note that, if HOUN is set to ꢄ (torque), data will be updated at intervals of more than 40 ms.

■ Adjustment scale with parameter HO (Meter adjustment)

Connect meters as shown below.

Meter: Frequency meter

(default setting)

Meter: ammeter

(HOUN=ꢀ)

VF-FS1

The reading of the

frequency meter

will fluctuate during

scale adjustment.

The reading of the

ammeter will

fluctuate during

scale adjustment.

* Optional frequency meter: QS-60T

* Make the maximum ammeter scale at least 120 percent

of the inverter's rated output current.

E-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

■ Example of how to adjustment the FM terminal frequency meter

Use the meter's adjustment screw to pre-adjust zero-point.

Key operated

LED display

Operation

Displays the operation frequency.

ꢋꢂ. ꢂ

(When standard monitor display selection Hꢄꢀꢂ is set to ꢂ [Operation

frequency])

MODE

ENT

CWH

The first basic parameter “CWH” (Wizard function) is displayed.

Press either the or the key to select “HO”.

ꢋꢂ. ꢂ

Press the ENT key to display the operation frequency

Press either the key or the key to adjust the meter.

The meter reading will change at this time but be careful because there

will be no change in the inverter's digital LED (monitor) indication.

ꢋꢂ. ꢂ

[Hint]

It's easier to make the adjustment if you

push and hold for several seconds.

The adjustment is complete. HO and the frequency are displayed

alternately.

ENT

ꢋꢂꢃꢂ ⇔ HO

The display returns to its original indications.

(When standard monitor display selection Hꢄꢀꢂ is set to ꢂ [Operation

frequency])

MODE

ꢋꢂ. ꢂ

■ Adjusting the meter in inverter stop state

•

Adjustment of output current (HOUN=ꢀ)

If, when adjusting the meter for output current, there are large fluctuations in data during adjustment,

making adjustment difficult, the meter can be adjusted in inverter stop state.

When setting HOUN to ꢀꢊ for fixed output 1 (100% output current), a signal of absolute values will be

output (inverter's rated current = 100%). In this state, adjust the meter with the HO (Meter adjustment)

parameter.

Similarly, if you set HOUN to ꢀꢋ for fixed output 2 (output current at 50%), a signal that is sent out when

half the inverter's rated current is flowing will be output through the FM terminal.

After meter adjustment is ended, set HOUN to ꢀ (output current).

•

Adjustment of other items (HOUN=ꢂ, ꢁ to ꢀꢆ, ꢀꢌ)

If parameter HOUN is set to ꢀꢄ: Fixed output 3 (Other than the output current: 100%), a signal that is

sent out when HOUN is set to ꢂ, ꢁ to ꢀꢆ, ꢀꢌ(100%) will be output through the FM terminal.

100% standard value for each item is the following:

HOUN=ꢂ, ꢁ, ꢀꢁ : Maximum frequency (HJ)

HOUN=ꢇ, ꢆ

HOUN=ꢊ, ꢋ

HOUN=ꢄ, ꢌ

HOUN=ꢈ, ꢀꢂ

HOUN=ꢀꢇ, ꢀꢆ

HOUN=ꢀꢌ

: 1.5 times of rated voltage

: 1.85 times of rated power

: 2.5 times of rated torque

: Rated load factor

: Maximum input value

: FA51=1000

E-12

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

5.5

Standard default setting

V[R : Default setting

•

Function

Allows setting of all parameters to the standard default setting, etc. at one time.

Note that HO, HOUN, Hꢀꢂꢈ, Hꢆꢄꢂ ∼ Hꢆꢄꢇ and Hꢌꢌꢂ will not be reset to their factory

default settings.

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

0: -

1: 50Hz default setting

2: 60Hz default setting

3: Standard default setting

(Initialization)

4: Trip record clear

V[R

Default setting

5: Cumulative operation time clear

6: Initialization of type information

7: Save user-defined parameters

8: Call user-defined parameters

9: Cumulative fan operation time

record clear

This function will be displayed as 0 during reading on the right. This previous setting is displayed.

Example: ꢇ

ꢂ

V[R cannot be set during the inverter operating. Always stop the inverter first and then program.

Programmed value

50Hz default setting (V[R = ꢀ)

Setting V[R at ꢀ causes all the following parameters to be set for operation using a base frequency of 50

Hz. (This does not change the setting of any other parameters.)

Parameter HJ, WN, XN, Hꢀꢄꢂ, Hꢁꢂꢆ, Hꢁꢀꢇ, Hꢌꢀꢆ: 50Hz

Parameter Hꢆꢀꢄ: According to model

⇒ See page K-14.

50Hz default setting (V[R = ꢁ)

Setting V[R at ꢁ causes all the following parameters to be set for operation using a base frequency of 60

Hz. (This does not change the setting of any other parameters.)

Parameter HJ, WN, XN, Hꢀꢄꢂ, Hꢁꢂꢆ, Hꢁꢀꢇ, Hꢌꢀꢆ: 60Hz

Parameter Hꢆꢀꢄ: According to model

⇒ See page K-14.

E-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

Default setting (V[R = ꢇ)

Setting V[R to ꢇ will return all parameters to the standard values that were programmed at the factory.

⇒ See section 4.2.7.

When 3 is programmed, <KPKV will be displayed for a short time after setting and will then be erased

and displayed the original indication ꢂ.ꢂ. Trip history data will be cleared at this time.

Trip clear (V[R = ꢆ)

Setting V[R to ꢆ initializes the past four sets of recorded error history data.

The parameter does not change.

Cumulative operation time clear (V[R = ꢊ)

Setting V[R to ꢊ resets the cumulative operation time to the initial value (zero).

Cumulative operation time clear (V[R = ꢋ)

Setting V[Rto ꢋ clears the trips when an GV[R format error occurs. But if the GV[R displayed, call us.

Save user setting parameters (V[R = ꢄ)

Setting V[R to ꢄ saves the current settings of all parameters.

⇒ See section 4.2.8.

Load user setting parameters (V[R = ꢌ)

Setting V[R to ꢌ loads parameter settings to (calls up) those saved by setting V[R to ꢄ.

⇒ See section 4.2.8.

By setting V[R to ꢄ or ꢌ, you can use parameters as your own default parameters.

Cumulative fan operation time record clear (V[R = ꢈ)

Setting V[R to ꢈ resets the cumulative operation time to the initial value (zero).

Set this parameter when replacing the cooling fan, and so on.

E-14

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

5.6

Forward/reverse run selection (Operation panel

operation)

ꢅHT : Forward/reverse run selection (Operation panel operation)

•

Function

Program the direction of rotation of the motor when the running and stopping are made using the ^RUN

STOP

key and

key on the operation panel.

Valid when EOQF (command mode) is set to ꢀ (operation panel).

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

0:Forward run

Default setting

1:Reverse run

Forward/reverse run selection

(Operation panel operation)

2:Forward run (F/R switching

possible)

3:Reverse run (F/R switching

possible)

ENT

key

When HT is set to ꢁ or ꢇ and an operating status is displayed, pressing the

key with the

held down changes the direction of rotation from reverse to forward after displaying the message

ENT

“HTꢍHꢃ” Pressing the

key again with the

key held down changes the direction of rotation

from forward to reverse after displaying the message “HTꢍTꢃ”

Check the direction of rotation on the status monitor.

⇒ For monitoring, see section 8.1

HTꢍH: Forward run

HTꢍT: Reverse run

When the F and R terminals are used for switching between forward and reverse rotation from the

terminal board, the HT forward/reverse run selection parameter is rendered invalid.

Short across the F-CC terminals: forward rotation

Short across the R-CC terminals: reverse rotation.

The inverter was factory-configured by default so that shorting terminals F-CC and terminals R-CC

simultaneously would cause the motor to slow down to a stop.

Using the parameter Hꢀꢂꢊ, however, you can select between forward run and reverse run.

This function is valid only when EOQF is set to ꢀ (operation panel).

E-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

5.7

Maximum frequency

ꢅHJꢅ: Maximum frequency

•

Function

1) Programs the range of frequencies output by the inverter (maximum output values).

2) This frequency is used as the reference for acceleration/deceleration time.

Output frequency

(Hz)

When HJ=80Hz

・This function determines the value

80Hz

in line with the ratings of the motor

and load.

・Maximum frequency cannot be

adjusted during operation.To

adjust, first stop the inverter.

60Hz

When HJ=60Hz

100%

Frequency setting signal (%)

If HJ is increased, adjust the upper limit frequency WN as necessary.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

30.0-200.0 (Hz)

Default setting

80.0

Maximum frequency

5.8

Upper limit and lower limit frequencies

ꢅWNꢅ: Upper limit frequency

ꢅNNꢅ: Lower limit frequency

•

Function

Programs the lower limit frequency that determines the lower limit of the output frequency and the upper

limit frequency that determines the upper limit of that frequency.

Upper limit

frequency

Lower limit

frequency

Output frequency (Hz)

0　　　　　　　　　　　100%

Frequency setting signal

* The output frequency

cannot be set at less than

NN.

* Frequencies that go

higher than WN will not

be output.

E-16

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

0.5 - HJ (Hz)

0.0 - WN (Hz)

Default setting

50.0 (WP type)

60.0 (WN type)

Upper limit frequency

Lower limit frequency

0.0

5.9

Base frequency

XN : Base frequency 1

XNX : Base frequency voltage 1

•

Function

Sets the base frequency and the base frequency voltage in conformance with load specifications or the

Base frequency.

Note:This is an important parameter that determines the constant torque control area.

Base frequency voltage

XNX

XN Output frequency (Hz)

Title

Function

Base frequency 1

Adjustment range

25.0-200.0 (Hz)

Default setting

50.0 (WP type)

60.0 (WN type)

230 (WP/WN type)

400 (WP type)

460 (WN type)

50-330 (V) : 200V class

50-660 (V) : 400V class

Base frequency voltage1

XNX

E-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

5.10 Selecting control mode

RV : V/F control mode selection

•

Function

With VF-FS1, the V/F controls shown below can be selected.

{ V/F constant

{ Variable torque

{ Automatic torque boost control

{ Vector control

{ Energy saving

{ PM motor control

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

0: V/F constant

Default setting

1: Variable torque

2: Automatic torque boost control

3: Vector control

V/F control mode selection

4: Energy-saving

5: - (Do not select)

6: PM motor control

Steps in setting are as follows

(In this example, the V/F control mode selection parameter RV is set to ꢇ (Vector control).

■ Setting V/F control mode selection to 3 (sensorless vector control)

Key operated

LED display

Operation

Displays the operation frequency. (Perform during operation stopped.)

(When standard monitor display selection Hꢄꢀꢂ is set to ꢂ

[Operation frequency])

ꢂ.ꢂ

MODE

The first basic parameter “CWH” (Wizard function) is displayed.

CWH

Press the key to change the parameter to RV (V/F control mode

selection).

Press the ENT key to display the parameter setting. (Standard

default setting: ꢀ ( Variable torque)).

ENT

ꢀ

ꢇ

Press the key to change the parameter to ꢇ (vector control).

Press the ENT key to save the changed parameter. RV and

ꢇꢅ⇔ RV

parameter set value “ꢇ” are displayed alternately.

E-18

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

Warning:

When setting the V/F control mode selection parameter (RV) to any number between ꢁ and ꢋ, be sure

to set at least the following parameters.

Hꢆꢀꢊ (Motor rated current): See the motor's nameplate.

Hꢆꢀꢋ (No-load current of motor): Refer to the motor test report.

Hꢆꢀꢄ (Rated rotational speed of motor): See the motor's nameplate.

Set also other torque boost parameters (Hꢆꢂꢀ to Hꢆꢈꢋ), as required.

1) Constant torque characteristics

Setting of V/F control mode selection RV to ꢂ (V/F constant)

This is applied to load that requires the same torque at low speeds as at rated speeds.

Base frequency voltage

XNX

Output frequency (Hz)

Base frequency XN

* To increase the torque further, increase the setting value of the manual torque boost XD.

　　　⇒ For more details, see 5.11.

2) Setting for fans and pumps

Setting of V/F control mode selection RV to ꢀ (variable torque)

This is appropriate for load characteristics of such things as fans, pumps and blowers in which the torque in

relation to load rotation speed is proportional to its square.

Base frequency voltage

XNX

Output frequency (Hz)

Base frequency XN

E-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

3) Increasing starting torque

Setting of V/F control mode selection RV to ꢁ (automatic torque boost control)

Detects load current in all speed ranges and automatically adjusts voltage output (torque boost) from inverter.

This gives steady torque for stable runs.

Base frequency voltage

XNX

Hꢆꢂꢁ :Automatically

adjusts the

amountof torque

boost.

Base frequency XN

Output frequency (Hz)

Note: This control system can oscillate and destabilize runs depending on the load. If that should

happen, set V/F control mode selection RV to ꢂ (V/F constant) and increase torque manually.

+ Motor constant must be set

If the motor you are using is a 4P Toshiba standard motor and if it has the same capacity as the inverter,

there is basically no need to set the motor constant. In any other case, be sure to set the parameters Hꢆꢀꢊ

to Hꢆꢀꢄ properly.

Be sure to set Hꢆꢀꢊ (rated current of motor) and Hꢆꢀꢄ (rated speed of motor) correctly, as specified on

the motor’s nameplate. For the setting of Hꢆꢀꢋ (no-load current of motor), refer to the motor test report.

There are two procedures for setting the other motor constants.

1) The motor constant can be automatically set (auto-tuning). Set the extended parameter Hꢆꢂꢂ to ꢁ.

⇒ For details, see selection 1 in 6.15.1.

2) Each motor constant can be set individually.

⇒ For details, see selection 2 in 6.15.1.

4) Vector control - increasing starting torque and achieving high-precision operation.

Setting of V/F control mode selection RV to ꢇ (Vector control)

Using sensor-less vector control with a Toshiba standard motor will provide the highest torque at the low

speed ranges.

(1) Provides large starting torque.

(2) Effective when stable operation is required to move smoothly up from the low speeds.

(3) Effective in elimination of load fluctuations caused by motor slippage.

E-20

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

+ Motor constant must be set

If the motor you are using is a 4P Toshiba standard motor and if it has the same capacity as the inverter,

there is basically no need to set the motor constant. In any other case, be sure to set the parameters Hꢆꢀꢊ

to Hꢆꢀꢄ properly.

Be sure to set Hꢆꢀꢊ (rated current of motor) and Hꢆꢀꢄ (rated speed of motor) correctly, as specified on

the motor’s nameplate. For the setting of Hꢆꢀꢋ (no-load current of motor), refer to the motor test report.

There are two procedures for setting the other motor constants.

1) The motor constant can be automatically set (auto-tuning).

Set the extended parameter Hꢆꢂꢂ to ꢁ.

⇒ For details, see selection 1 in 6.15.1.

2) Each motor constant can be set individually.

⇒ For details, see selection 2 in 6.15.1.

5) Energy-saving

Setting of V/F control mode selection RV to ꢆ (Energy-saving)

Energy can be saved in all speed areas by detecting load current and flowing the optimum current that fits

the load.

+ Motor constant must be set

If the motor you are using is a 4P Toshiba standard motor and if it has the same capacity as the inverter,

there is no need to set the motor constant. In any other case, be sure to set the parameters Hꢆꢀꢊ to

Hꢆꢀꢄ properly.

Be sure to set Hꢆꢀꢊ (rated current of motor) and Hꢆꢀꢄ (rated speed of motor) correctly, as specified on

the motor’s nameplate. For the setting of Hꢆꢀꢋ (no-load current of motor), refer to the motor test report.

There are two procedures for setting the other motor constants.

1) The motor constant can be automatically set (auto-tuning). Set the extended parameter Hꢆꢂꢂ to ꢁ.

⇒ For details, see selection 1 in 6.15.1.

2) Each motor constant can be set individually.

⇒ For details, see selection 2 in 6.15.1.

6) Operating a permanent magnet motor

Setting of V/F control mode selection RV to ꢋ (PM motor control)

Permanent magnet motors (PM motors) that are light, small in size and highly efficient, as compared to

induction motors, can be operated in sensor-less operation mode.

Note that this feature can be used only for specific motors. For more information, contact your Toshiba dealer.

7) Precautions on vector control

1) When exercising vector control, be sure to set the extended parameters Hꢆꢀꢊ to Hꢆꢀꢄ properly. Be

sure to set Hꢆꢀꢊ (rated current of motor) and Hꢆꢀꢄ (rated speed of motor) correctly, as specified on

the motor’s nameplate. For the setting of Hꢆꢀꢋ (no-load current of motor), refer to the motor test report.

2) The sensorless vector control exerts its characteristics effectively in frequency areas below the base

frequency (XN). The same characteristics will not be obtained in areas above the base frequency.

3) Set the base frequency to anywhere from 40 to 120Hz during vector control (RV=ꢇ).

4) Use a general purpose squirrel-cage motor with a capacity that is the same as the inverter's rated capacity or

one rank below.

The minimum applicable motor capacity is 0.1kW.

E-21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

5) Use a motor that has 2-8 P.

6) Always operate the motor in single operation (one inverter to one motor). Sensorless vector control

cannot be used when one inverter is operated with more than one motor.

7) The maximum length of wires between the inverter and motor is 30 meters. If the wires are longer than 30

meters, set standard auto-tuning with the wires connected to improve low-speed torque during sensorless

vector control.

However the effects of voltage drop cause motor-generated torque in the vicinity of rated frequency to be

somewhat lower.

8) Connecting a reactor or surge voltage suppression filter between the inverter and the motor may reduce

motor-generated torque. Setting auto-tuning may also cause a trip (GVPꢀ) rendering sensorless vector

control unusable.

8) The following table shows the relationship between the V/F control mode

selection (RV) and the motor constant parameter.

Under normal conditions, be sure to set or adjust the parameters marked with ‚.

When making detailed settings, adjust the parameters marked with c as well, if necessary.

Do not adjust the parameters marked with °, because they are invalid.

(For instructions about how to adjust the parameter Hꢆꢂꢂ and later, see section 6.17.)

E-22

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

■ Relationship between V/F control mode selection (RV) and Motor constant

parameter

‚&c : Valid, ° : Invalid

Parameter RV (V/F control mode selection)

V/F

constant

Variable

torque

Automatic

torque boost

control

Vector

control

Energy-

saving

Title

Function

‚

XNX

Base frequency 1

Base frequency voltage 1

Torque boost value 1

Hꢀꢄꢂ Base frequency 2

Hꢀꢄꢀ Base frequency voltage 2

Hꢀꢄꢁ Torque boost value 2

Hꢆꢂꢂ Auto-tuning

Hꢆꢂꢀ Slip frequency gain

Hꢆꢂꢁ Automatic torque boost value

Hꢆꢀꢊ Motor rated current

Hꢆꢀꢋ Motor no-load current

Hꢆꢀꢄ Motor rated speed

Hꢆꢀꢌ Speed control response coefficient

Hꢆꢀꢈ Speed control stability coefficient

Hꢆꢌꢂ Exciting current coefficient

Hꢆꢌꢊ Stall prevention control coefficient 1

Hꢆꢈꢁ Stall prevention control coefficient 2

Hꢆꢈꢆ Motor adjustment coefficient

Maximum voltage adjustment

coefficient

Hꢆꢈꢊ

Waveform switching adjustment

coefficient

Hꢆꢈꢋ

‚ : Be sure to set and adjust the parameters.

c : Adjust the parameters if necessary.

E-23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

5.11 Manual torque boost - increasing torque boost at low

speeds

XD : Torque boost 1

•

Function

If torque is inadequate at low speeds, increase torque by raising the torque boost rate with this

parameter.

Base frequency voltage

XNX

Output frequency (Hz)

Base frequency XN

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

0.0 - 30.0 (%)

Valid when RV is set to ꢂ (V/F constant) or ꢀꢅ(square reduction)

Default setting

According to model

(⇒ See page K-14)

Torque boost 1

Note: The optimum value is programmed for each inverter capacity. Be careful not to increase the torque boost

rate too much because it could cause an overcurrent trip at startup.

5.12 Setting the electronic thermal

VJT : Motor electronic-thermal protection level 1

QNO : Electronic thermal protection characteristic selection

Hꢀꢄꢇ : Motor electronic-thermal protection level 2

Hꢋꢂꢄ : Motor 150%-overload time limit

Hꢋꢇꢁ : Thermal memory selection

•

Function

This parameter allows selection of the appropriate electronic thermal protection characteristics according

to the particular rating and characteristics of the motor.

E-24

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

10 – 100 (%) / (A)

Default setting

100

Motor electronic thermal

protection level 1

VJT

Setting

value

Overload

protection

{

Overload

stall

{

Standard

motor

Electronic-thermal protection

characteristic selection

QNO

{

VF motor

(special

motor)

Motor electronic-thermal

protection level 2

Hꢀꢄꢇ

Hꢋꢂꢄ

Hꢋꢇꢁ

10 – 100 (%) / (A)

10 – 2400 (s)

100

300

Motor 150%-overload time

limit

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

Thermal memory selection

* { : valid, × : invalid

1) Setting the electronic thermal protection characteristics selection QNO and

motor electronic thermal protection level 1 VJT, 2 Hꢀꢄꢇ

The electronic thermal protection characteristics selection QNO is used to enable or disable the motor

overload trip function (QNꢁ) and the overload stall function.

While the inverter overload trip (QNꢀ) will be in constant detect operation, the motor overload trip (QNꢁ)

can be selected using the parameter QNOꢃ

Explanation of terms

Overload stall: This is an optimum function for equipment such as fans, pumps and blowers with

variable torque characteristics that the load current decreases as the operating speed

decreases.

When the inverter detects an overload, this function automatically lowers the output

frequency before the motor overload trip QNꢁ is activated. This function operates a

motor at frequencies that allow the load current to keep its balance so that the

inverter can continue operation without being tripped.

Note: Do not use the overload stall function with loads having constant torque characteristics (such as

conveyor belts in which load current is fixed with no relation to speed).

[Using standard motors (other than motors intended for use with inverters)]

When a motor is used in the lower frequency range than the rated frequency, that will decrease the cooling

effects for the motor. This speeds up the start of overload detection operations when a standard motor is

used in order to prevent overheating.

E-25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

■ Setting of electronic thermal protection characteristics selection QNO

Setting value

Overload protection

Overload stall

ꢂ

ꢀ

ꢁ

ꢇ

{

{ : valid, × : invalid

■ Setting of motor electronic thermal protection level 1 VJT (Same as Hꢀꢄꢇ)

If the capacity of the motor is smaller than the capacity of the inverter, or the rated current of the motor

is smaller than the rated current of the inverter, adjust the electronic thermal protection level 1 VJT so

that it fits the motor's rated current.

Output current reduction factor

[%]/[A]

VJT×1.0

VJT×0.55

30Hz

Output frequency (Hz)

Note:

The motor overload protection start level is fixed at 30Hz.

[Example of setting: When the VFFS1-2007PM is running with a 0.4kW motor having 2A rated current]

Key operated

LED display

Operation

Displays the operation frequency. (Perform during operation

stopped.)

(When standard monitor display selection Hꢄꢀꢂ is set to ꢂ

[Operation frequency])

ꢂꢃꢂ

MODE

ENT

CWH

VJT

ꢀꢂꢂ

The first basic parameter “CWH” (Wizard function) is displayed.

Press either the key or the

key to change the parameter to

VJT.

Press the ENT key to display the parameter setting. (Standard

default setting: 100%)

Press the key to change the parameter to ꢆꢁꢅ%

(=motor rated current/inverter output rated current x

100=2.0//4.8×100).

ꢆꢁ

Press the ENT key to save the changed parameter. VJT and the

parameter are displayed alternately.

ENT

ꢆꢁ¶⇔¶VJT

Note: The rated output current of the inverter should be calculated from the rated current, regardless of the

setting of the PWM carrier frequency parameter (Hꢇꢂꢂ).

E-26

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

[Using a VF motor (motor for use with inverter)]

■ Setting of electronic thermal protection characteristics selection QNO

Setting value

Overload protection

Overload stall

ꢆ

ꢊ

ꢋ

ꢄ

{

{ : valid, × : invalid

VF motors (motors designed for use with inverters) can be used in frequency ranges lower than those

for standard motors, but their cooling efficiency decreases at frequencies below 6Hz.

■ Setting of motor electronic thermal protection level 1VJT (Same as Hꢀꢄꢇ)

If the capacity of the motor is smaller than the capacity of the inverter, or the rated current of the motor

is smaller than the rated current of the inverter, adjust the electronic thermal protection level 1 VJT so

that it fits the motor's rated current.

If the indications are in percentages (%), then 100% equals the inverter's rated output current (A).

Output current reduction factor [%]/[A]

VJT×1.0

VJT×0.6

6Hz

Output frequency (Hz)

Setting the motor overload starting level

2) Motor 150%-overload time limit Hꢋꢂꢄ

Parameter Hꢋꢂꢄ is used to set the time elapsed before the motor trips under a load of 150% (overload trip

QNꢁ) within a range of 10 to 2400 seconds.

3) Inverter over load characteristics

Set to protect the inverter unit. Cannot be changed or turned off by parameter setting.

To prevent the inverter overload trip function (QNꢀ) from being activated too easily, lower the stall

prevention level (Hꢋꢂꢀ) or increase the acceleration time (CEE) or deceleration time (FGE).

E-27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

Inverter overload

Time [sec]

To protect the inverter, overload

trip or overcurrent trip activate in

a short period of time when

output current reaches 110% or

higher.

100% = inverter rated output current

0.25

Output current [%]

105%

110%

185%

Inverter overload protection characteristics

4) Thermal memory selectionꢅHꢋꢇꢁ

At the main power off, it is selectable whether retention of electric thermal calculation values or not.

ꢂ: Incase of not activated

The calculated value of the electric thermal is not memorized at power-off.

The calculated value of the electric thermal and the trip state can always be reset.

Don’t reset the unit trip state continually, it may cause the motor and the unit failure.

ꢀ: In case of activated

The calculated value of the electric thermal is memorized at power-off.

The trip state can always be reset but the calculated value of the electric thermal can not be reset.

5.13 Preset-speed operation (speeds in 7 steps)

UTꢀ - UTꢄ : Preset-speed operation frequencies 1-7

•

Function

A maximum of 7 speed steps can be selected just by switching an external contact signal. Multi-speed

frequencies can be programmed anywhere from the lower limit frequency NN to the upper limit frequency

WN.

[Setting method]

Run/stop

The starting and stopping control is done from the terminal board.

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Setting value

0: Terminal board

1: Operation panel

2: Serial communication

EOQF

Command mode selection

Note:If speed commands (analog signal or digital input) are switched in line with preset-speed operations, select

the terminal board using the frequency setting mode selection HOQF. ⇒ See step 3) or section 5.3.

E-28

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

Preset-speed frequency setting

Set the speed (frequency) of the number of steps necessary.

Title

Funtion

Adjustment range

Default setting

UTꢀ

UTꢁ

UTꢇ

UTꢆ

UTꢊ

UTꢋ

UTꢄ

Preset-speed operation frequencies 1

Preset-speed operation frequencies 2

Preset-speed operation frequencies 3

Preset-speed operation frequencies 4

Preset-speed operation frequencies 5

Preset-speed operation frequencies 6

Preset-speed operation frequencies 7

NNꢍ WN(Hz)

15.0

20.0

25.0

30.0

35.0

40.0

45.0

Examples of preset-speed contact input signals: Slide switch SW4 set to sink logic

O: ON -: OFF (Speed commands other than preset-speed commands are valid when all are OFF)

Preset-speed

Terminal

{

R-CC

RES-CC

VIA-CC

{

RES

VIA

{

Preset-speed commands are not allocated to standard default setting. Use the input terminal function

selection to allocate SS1 to SS3 terminal.

Terminal R............... Input terminal function selection 2 (R)

Hꢀꢀꢁ=ꢋ (Preset-speed command 1: SS1)

Terminal RES.......... Input terminal function selection 3 (RES)

Hꢀꢀꢇ=ꢄ (Preset-speed command 2: SS2)

Terminal VIA ........... Input terminal function selection 8 (VIA)

Hꢀꢀꢌ=ꢌ (Preset-speed command 3: SS3)

Analog/contact input function selection

Hꢀꢂꢈ=ꢀ (VIA-contact input(Sink))

Forward

F (Forward run)

VIA

Common

Preset-speed 1 (SS1)

[Example of a connection diagram]

(SW4 set to sink logic)

SW3

RES

VIA

Preset-speed 2 (SS2)

Preset-speed 3 (SS3)

P24

E-29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

Using other speed commands with preset-speed command

Command mode

selection

0: Terminal board

1: Operation panel

2: Serial communication

EOQF

1: VIA

2: VIB

5: UP/DOWN

1: VIA

3: Operation 4:Commun 2: VIB

1: VIA

3: Operation 4:Commun 2: VIB

3: Operation 4:Commun

panel ication

Frequency setting

mode selection

HOQF

panel

ication

5: UP/DOWN

panel

ication

5: UP/DOWN

Operation

panel

command

valid

Terminal

command

valid

Operation

panel

command

valid

Communicatio Communic

Terminal

command

valid

n command

valid

ation

command

valid

Entered

Preset-

speed

Preset-speed command valid Note)

Operation

panel

Communic

command

(The inverter doesn't accept Preset-

speed command.)

Terminal

command

valid

(The inverter doesn't accept Preset-

speed command.)

Not

ation

command

valid

entered

command

valid

Note: The preset-speed command is always given priority when other speed commands are input at the

same time.

Below is an example of 7-step speed operation.

Output frequency

UTꢀꢅ

[Hz]

UTꢁꢅ

UTꢇꢅ

UTꢆꢅ

UTꢊꢅ

UTꢋꢅ

UTꢄꢅ

Time

[sec]

OFF

F-CC

OFF

R-CC

OFF

RES-CC

VIA-CC

OFF

Example of 7-step speed operation

E-30

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

6. Extended parameters

Extended parameters are provided for sophisticated operation, fine adjustment and other special purposes. Modify

parameter settings as required. ⇒ See section 11, table of extended parameters.

6.1

Input/output parameters

6.1.1 Low-speed signal

Hꢀꢁꢁ : Low-speed signal output frequency

•

Function

When the output frequency exceeds the setting of Hꢀꢁꢁ an ON signal will be generated. This signal

can be used as an electromagnetic brake excitation/release signal.

This signal can also be used as an operation signal when Hꢀꢁꢁ is set to 0.0Hz, because an ON

signal is put out if the output frequency exceeds 0.0Hz.

Relay output (250Vac-1A (cosφ=1), 30Vdc-0.5A, 250Vac-0.5A (cosφ=0.4)

at RY-RC, FLA-FLC-FLB terminals.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

0.0 ∼ HJ (Hz)

Default setting

0.0

Hꢀꢁꢁ

Low-speed signal output frequency

Output frequency [Hz]

Set frequency

Hꢀꢁꢁ

Time [s]

Low-speed signal output

RY-RC terminals (Default setting)

FLA-FLC-FLB terminals

OFF

Low-speed signal output:

Inverted

F-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

　　　　　An example of the connection of the relay output terminals

•

Output terminal setting

Output of the low-speed signal (ON signal) between the RY and RC terminals is the factory default

setting of the output terminal selection parameter. This setting must be changed to invert the polarity of

the signal.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Setting value

4 (ON signal)

5 (OFF signal)

0-255

(⇒ See page K-17)

Hꢀꢂꢁ

Output terminal selection 1A (RY-RC)

6.1.2 Output of designated frequency reach signal

Hꢀꢁꢃ : Speed reach detection band

•

Function

When the output frequency becomes equal to the setting by designated frequency ±Hꢀꢁꢃ, an ON or

OFF signal is generated.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

0.0 ∼ HJ (Hz)

Default setting

2.5

Hꢀꢁꢃ

Speed reach detection band

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

0-255

(⇒ See page K-17)

Setting value

Output terminal

selection 1A

(RY-RC)

6: RCH (designated frequency - ON signal), or

7: RCHN (designated frequency - OFF signal)

Hꢀꢂꢁ

Note: Select the Hꢀꢂꢃ parameter to specify FLA-FLC-FLB terminal output.

F-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

Output frequency [Hz]

Designated frequency

Hꢀꢁꢃ

Designated frequency

−

Hꢀꢁꢃ

Time [s]

Set frequency speed reach signal

RY-RC

OFF

FLA/FLC/FLB

OFF

Set frquency spped reach signal:

Inverted

6.1.3 Output of set frequency speed reach signal

Hꢀꢁꢀ : Speed reach setting frequency

Hꢀꢁꢃ : Speed reach detection band

•

Function

When the output frequency becomes equal to the frequency set by Hꢀꢁꢀ ± Hꢀꢁꢃ, an ON or

OFF signal is generated.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

0.0 ∼ HJ (Hz)

Default setting

Hꢀꢁꢀ

Hꢀꢁꢃ

Speed reach setting frequency

Speed reach detection band

0.0

2.5

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Setting value

8: RCHF (designated frequency - ON

signal), or

Output terminal

selection 1A

(RY-RC)

0-255

(⇒ See page K-17)

Hꢀꢂꢁ

9: RCHFN (designated frequency

OFF signal)

Note: Select the Hꢀꢂꢃ parameter function No. 8 or 9 to specify FLA-FLC-FLB terminal output.

F-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

If the detection band value + the set frequency is less than the designated frequency

Output frequency [Hz]

Hꢀꢁꢀ + Hꢀꢁꢃ

Hꢀꢁꢀ

Hꢀꢁꢃ

Time [s]

Set frquency speed reach signal

RY-RC terminals

FLA-FLC-FLB terminals

OFF

Set frequency speed reach signal:

Inverted

6.2

Input signal selection

6.2.1 Changing the functions of VIA terminal

Hꢀꢁꢄ : VIA terminal function selection

•

Function

This parameter allows you to choose between signal input and contact signal input for the VIA terminal.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

0: VIA - analog input

Default setting

Analog/contact input

function selection

(VIA terminal)

1: VIA - contact input (Sink)

Hꢀꢁꢄ

2: VIA - contact input (Source)

When using the VIA terminal as contact input terminals in sink logic connection, be sure to insert a

resistor between the P24 terminal and the VIA terminal. (Recommended resistance: 4.7kΩ-1/2W)

Note: When using the VIA terminal as a contact input terminal, be sure to turn the VIA (SW3) slide switch to

the V position.

+ The figure on the right shows an example of the

connection of input terminal VIA when it is used as

contact input terminal. This example illustrates the

connection when the inverter is used in sink

(Negative) logic mode.

F-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

6.3

Terminal function selection

6.3.1 Keeping an input terminal function always active (ON)

Hꢀꢁꢅ : Always-active function selection 1

Hꢀꢀꢁ : Always-active function selection 2

•

Function

This parameter specifies an input terminal function that is always to be kept active (ON).

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

0 (No function)

Hꢀꢁꢅ

Hꢀꢀꢁ

Always-active function selection 1

Always-active function selection 2

0-71 (⇒ See page K-15)

1 (Standby)

0-71 (⇒ See page K-15)

* Coast stop

Coast stop

Motor

speed

The standard default setting is for deceleration stop.

To make a coast stop, assign a "1(ST)" terminal

function to an idle terminal using the programmable

terminal function.

OFF

F terminal

Change to Hꢀꢀꢁ=ꢁ.

For coast stop, OFF the ST terminal when stopping

the motor in the state described at left.The monitor on

the inverter at this time will display QHH.

OFF

ST terminal

6.3.2 Modifying input terminal functions

Hꢀꢀꢀ : Input terminal selection 1 (F)

Hꢀꢀꢃ : Input terminal selection 2 (R)

Hꢀꢀꢂ : Input terminal selection 3 (RES)

Hꢀꢀꢅ : Input terminal selection 8 (VIA)

F-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

•

Function

Use the above parameters to send signals from an external programmable controller to various control

input terminals to operate and/or set the inverter.

The desired contact input terminal functions can be selected from 57 types (0 to 71). This gives system

design flexibility.

The functions of the VIA terminal can be selected between analog input and contact input by changing

parameter settings Hꢀꢁꢄ.

To use the VIA terminal as contact input terminals, you need to set Hꢀꢁꢄ to the number (1 or 2) that

suits your needs, since analog input (voltage signal input) is assigned to the terminals by default.

■ Setting of contact input terminal function

Terminal

symbol

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

Hꢀꢁꢅ

Hꢀꢀꢁ

Hꢀꢀꢀ

Hꢀꢀꢃ

Hꢀꢀꢂ

Always-active function selection 1

Always-active function selection 2

Input terminal selection 1 (F)

Input terminal selection 2 (R)

Input terminal selection 3 (RES)

1 (ST)

2 (F)

0-71

(⇒ See page K-15)

3 (R)

RES

10 (RES)

0-71 Note 2)

VIA

Input terminal selection 8 (VIA)

6 (SS1)

Hꢀꢀꢅ

Note 1: The function that has been selected using Hꢀꢁꢅ and Hꢀꢀꢁ (always-active function selection

parameter) are always activated.

Note 2: When using the VIA terminal as contact input terminals in sink logic connection, be sure to insert a

resistor between the P24 terminal and the VIA terminal. (Recommended resistance: 4.7kΩ-1/2W)

Be sure to turn the VIA (SW3) slide switch to the V position.

Note 3: Hꢀꢀꢅ (VIA): Enabled only when Hꢀꢁꢄ=ꢀ or ꢃ

Disabled and the set value cannot be read out, if Hꢀꢁꢄ is set at ꢁ.

F-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

■ Connection method

1) A-contact input

Inverter

Sink setting

A-contact switch

Input terminal

* This function is activated when the input

terminal and CC (common) are short-

circuited. Use this function to specify

forward/reverse run or a preset-speed

operation.

2) Connection with transistor output

Programmable controller

Inverter

* Operation can be controlled by connecting the

input and CC (common) terminals to the

Input

terminal

output

programmable controller. Use this function to

specify forward/reverse run or preset-speed

transistor that operates at

(no-contacts

switch)

the

operation. Use

24Vdc/5mA.

Interface between programmable controller and inverter

Note: When using a programmable controller with open collector outputs for control, connect it to the

PCL terminal, as shown in the figure below, to prevent the inverter from malfunctioning

because of a current that flows in.

Also, be sure to turn the SW4 slide switch to the PLC position.

F-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

3) Sink (Negative) logic / Source (Positive) logic input

Sink logic/source logic (input terminal logic) switching is possible.

⇒ For more details, see section 2.3.2.

6.3.3 Modifying output terminal functions

Hꢀꢂꢁ : Output terminal selection 1A (RY-RC)

Hꢀꢂꢃ : Output terminal selection 3 (FLA, FLB, FLC)

•

Function

Use the above parameters to send various signals from the inverter to external equipment.

By setting parameters for the RY-RC and FL (FLA, FLB and FLC) terminals on the terminal board, you

can use 58 functions and functions obtained by combining them.

To assign only one function to RY-RC terminals, assign the function to Hꢀꢂꢁ while leaving Hꢀꢂꢆ

and Hꢀꢂꢄ as they are set by default.

■ Examples of application

Function of FLA, B, C:

Can be set using parameter Hꢀꢂꢃ

Function of RY-RC:

Can be set using parameter Hꢀꢂꢁ,ꢀꢂꢆ,ꢀꢂꢄ

F-8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

■ Assigning one function to an output terminal

Terminal

symbol

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

4 (Low-speed

RY - RC

Output terminal selection 1A

Output terminal selection 3

Hꢀꢂꢁ

Hꢀꢂꢃ

detection signal)

0-255

(⇒ See page K-17)

10(Failure FL)

(A, B, C）

When assigning one function to RY-RC terminals, set parameter Hꢀꢂꢁ only.

Do not change but leave parameters Hꢀꢂꢆ and Hꢀꢂꢄ as they were set by default.

(Default setting: Hꢀꢂꢆ=255, Hꢀꢂꢄ=0)

6.3.4 Assigning two functions to an output terminal

Hꢀꢂꢁ : Output terminal selection 1A (RY-RC)

Hꢀꢂꢆ : Output terminal selection 1B (RY-RC)

Hꢀꢂꢄ : Output terminal logic selection (RY-RC)

•

Function

2 different functions can be assigned to the terminal board output terminal RY-RC.

Signals of 2 functions of the logical product (AND) or logical sum (OR) selected form 58 functions can

be output to 1 output terminal.

F-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

(1)A signal is sent out when the two functions assigned are activated simultaneously.

Terminal

symbol

Function

Title

Adjustment range

Default setting

4 (Low-speed

RY-RC

Output terminal selection 1A

Output terminal selection 1B

Hꢀꢂꢁ

Hꢀꢂꢆ

detection signal)

0-255

(⇒ See page K-17)

255 (Always ON)

Two different functions can be assigned to terminals RY-RC.

If parameter Hꢀꢂꢄ is set to ꢁ (default), a signal will be sent out when the two functions assigned are

activated simultaneously.

Terminals RY-RC: Send out a signal when the functions assigned with Hꢀꢂꢁ and Hꢀꢂꢆ are activated

simultaneously.

Timing chart

Hꢀꢂꢁ

OFF

Hꢀꢂꢆ

OFF

RY-RC output

OFF

Only one function can be assigned to terminals FLA-FLB-FLC at a time.

F-10

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

(2)A signal is sent out when either of the two functions assigned is activated.

Terminal

symbol

Function

Title

Adjustment range

Default setting

4 (Low-speed

RY - RC

Output terminal selection 1A

Output terminal selection 1B

Hꢀꢂꢁ

Hꢀꢂꢆ

0～255

detection signal)

(⇒ See page K-17)

255 (Always ON)

0 : Hꢀꢂꢁ and Hꢀꢂꢆ

RY - RC

Output terminal logic selection

Hꢀꢂꢄ

1 : Hꢀꢂꢁ or Hꢀꢂꢆ

Two different functions can be assigned to terminals RY-RC.

If parameter Hꢀꢂꢄ is set to ꢀ, a signal will be sent out when either of the two functions assigned is

activated.

Terminals RY-RC: Send out a signal when either of the functions set with Hꢀꢂꢁ and Hꢀꢂꢆ is activated.

Timing chart

Hꢀꢂꢁ

Hꢀꢂꢆ

OFF

RY-RC output

OFF

Only one function can be assigned to terminals FLA-FLB-FLC at a time.

(3)Holding the output of signals in ON status

If the conditions for activating the functions assigned to output terminals RY-RC agree with and as a result

the output of signals is put in ON status, the output of signals is held ON, even if the conditions change.

(Output terminal holding function)

Assign input terminal function 62 to a contact input terminal available.

■ Input terminal function

Function No.

Code

Function

Action

ON: Once turned on, RY-RC is held on.

OFF: The status of RY-RC changes in real

time according to conditions.

Holding of RY-RC terminal

output

HDRY

Once output terminal RY-RC is turned on when the contact input terminal to which one of the above

functions (function 62) is assigned is ON, output terminal RY-RC is held ON.

F-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

6.3.5 Comparing the frequency command values

Hꢀꢇꢆ : Frequency command agreement detection range

HOQF : Frequency setting mode selection 1

Hꢃꢁꢆ : Frequency setting mode selection 2

•

Function

If the frequency command value specified using HOQF (or Hꢃꢁꢆ) almost agrees with the

frequency command value from the VIA and VIB terminal with an accuracy of ± Hꢀꢇꢆ, an ON or

OFF signal will be sent out.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

2.5

Frequency command agreement detection

range

Hꢀꢇꢆ

0.0 ∼ HJ (Hz)

HOQF

Hꢃꢁꢆ

Frequency setting mode selection 1

Frequency setting mode selection 2

1-5

Note: When using VIA terminal, set Hꢀꢂꢁ or Hꢀꢂꢃ respectively to 52 or 53 to put out signals to RY-RC or

FLA-FLB-FLC.

When using VIB terminal, set Hꢀꢂꢁ or Hꢀꢂꢃ respectively to 60 or 61 to put out signals to RY-RC or

FLA-FLB-FLC.

Note: This function can be used, for example, to send out a signal indicating whether the amount of

processing and the amount of feedback agree with each other when the PID function is in use.

⇒ For an explanation of the PID function, see section 6.14.

F-12

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

6.4

Basic parameters 2

6.4.1 Switching motor characteristics via terminal input

Hꢀꢆꢁ : Base frequency 2

Hꢀꢆꢀ : Base frequency voltage 2

Hꢀꢆꢃ : Torque boost 2

Hꢀꢆꢂ : Motor electronic-thermal protection level 2

Hꢀꢅꢈ : Stall prevention level 2

•

Function

Use the above parameters to switch the operation of two motors with a single inverter and to select

motor V/F characteristics (two types) according to the particular needs or operation mode.

Note: The RV (V/F control mode selection) parameter is enabled only for motor1.

If motor 2 is selected, V/F control will be given constant torque characteristics.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

25.0-200.0 (Hz)

Default setting

50.0 (WP type)

60.0 (WN type)

230 (WP/WN type)

400 (WP type)

460(WN type)

Hꢀꢆꢁ

Hꢀꢆꢀ

Base frequency 2

50-330 (V) : 200V class

50-660 (V) : 400V class

Base frequency voltage 2

Depending on model

(⇒ See page K-14)

Hꢀꢆꢃ

Hꢀꢆꢂ

Hꢀꢅꢈ

Torque boost 2

0.0-30.0 (%)

Motor electronic-thermal

protection level 2

10-100 (%) / (A)

100

10-110 (%) / (A),

111 : Disabled

Stall prevention level 2

110

F-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

■ Setting of switching terminals

The terminal for switching to motor 2 needs to be set, since this function is not assigned under the default

setting. Assign this function to an idle terminal.

The parameters to be switched depend on the particular identification number of the input terminal selection

function.

Input terminal function number

Parameters used and applicable parameters

AD2

VF2

MOT2

OCS2

Default setting: RV, XN, XNX, XD, VJT, CEE,

OFF

FGE, HUꢁꢃ, Hꢇꢁꢀ

CEE → HUꢁꢁ, FGE → Hꢈꢁꢀ,

Hꢈꢁꢃ → HUꢁꢂ

OFF

Hꢇꢁꢀ → Hꢀꢅꢈ

RV → ꢁ, XN → Hꢀꢆꢁ, XNX → Hꢀꢆꢀ, ꢉ

XD → Hꢀꢆꢃ, VJT → Hꢀꢆꢂ

OFF

RV → ꢁ, XN → Hꢀꢆꢁ, XNX → Hꢀꢆꢀ,

XD → Hꢀꢆꢃ, VJT → Hꢀꢆꢂ,

Hꢇꢁꢀ → Hꢀꢅꢈ, CEE → HUꢁꢁ,

FGE → Hꢈꢁꢀ, Hꢈꢁꢃ → HUꢁꢂ

Note: The parameters XN, XNX, RV, Hꢀꢆꢁ and Hꢀꢆꢀ cannot be switched during operation. You need

to stop operation when switching them.

6.5

Frequency priority selection

6.5.1 Using a frequency command according to the particular

situation

HOQF : Frequency setting mode selection 1

Hꢃꢁꢁ : Frequency priority selection

Hꢃꢁꢆ : Speed setting mode selection 2

•

Function

These parameters are used to switch between two types of frequency command signals.

•

Setting by parameters

Switching by frequency

Switching via terminal board input

F-14

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

Default setting

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

1:VIA

2:VIB

3:Operation panel

4:Serial communication

5:UP/DOWN from external

contact

HOQF

Hꢃꢁꢁ

Frequency setting mode selection 1

Frequency priority selection

0:HOQF(Switchable to Hꢃꢁꢆ

by the input terminal)

1:HOQF (Hꢃꢁꢆ for output

frequencies equal to or lower

than 1.0 Hz)

1:VIA

2:VIB

3:Operation panel

4:Serial communication

5:UP/DOWN from external

contact

Hꢃꢁꢆ

Frequency setting mode selection 2

1) External switching (Input terminal function 38 : FCHG enabled)

Frequency priority selection parameter Hꢃꢁꢁ = ꢁ

Switching between the command specified with HOQF and Hꢃꢁꢆ can be made by entering a command

from a terminal board.

To do so, however, the frequency command forced switching function (input terminal function selection: 38)

needs to be set beforehand to an input terminal board.

If an OFF command is entered to the input terminal board: The command specified with HOQF will be

selected.

If an ON command is entered to the input terminal board: The command specified with Hꢃꢁꢆ will be

selected.

2) Automatic switching by frequency command

Frequency priority selection parameter Hꢃꢁꢁ = ꢀ

The switching between the command specified with HOQF and Hꢃꢁꢆ is done automatically according to

the frequency command entered.

If the frequency set with HOQF is above 1Hz: The command specified with HOQF will be selected.

If the frequency set with HOQF is 1Hz or less: The command specified with Hꢃꢁꢆ will be selected.

F-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

6.5.2 Setting frequency command characteristics

Hꢃꢁꢀ : VIA input point 1 setting

Hꢃꢁꢃ : VIA input point 1 frequency

Hꢃꢁꢂ : VIA input point 2 setting

Hꢃꢁꢊ : VIA input point 2 frequency

Hꢃꢀꢁ : VIB input point 1 setting

Hꢃꢀꢀ : VIB input point 1 frequency

Hꢃꢀꢃ : VIB input point 2 setting

Hꢃꢀꢂ : VIB input point 2 frequency

Hꢅꢀꢀ : Communication command point 1 setting

Hꢅꢀꢃ : Communication command point 1 frequency

Hꢅꢀꢂ : Communication command point 2 setting

Hꢅꢀꢊ : Communication command point 2 frequency

•

Function

These parameters adjust the output frequency according to the externally applied analog signal (0-

10Vdc voltage, 4-20mAdc current) and the entered command for setting an external contact

frequency.

To fine adjust the frequency command characteristics for VIA/VIB input, use the parameters Hꢊꢆꢁ to

Hꢊꢆꢂ. ⇒ See section 6.5.4.

F-16

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

0-100 (%)

Default setting

Hꢃꢁꢀ

Hꢃꢁꢃ

Hꢃꢁꢂ

VIA input point 1 setting

VIA input point 1 frequency

VIA input point 2 setting

0.0-200.0 (Hz)

0-100 (%)

0.0

100

50.0 (WP type)

60.0 (WN type)

Hꢃꢁꢊ

VIA input point 2 frequency

0.0-200.0 (Hz)

Hꢃꢀꢁ

Hꢃꢀꢀ

Hꢃꢀꢃ

VIB input point 1 setting

VIB input point 1 frequency

VIB input point 2 setting

0-100 (%)

0.0-200.0 (Hz)

0-100 (%)

0.0

100

50.0 (WP type)

60.0 (WN type)

Hꢃꢀꢂ

VIB input point 2 frequency

0.0-200.0 (Hz)

Hꢅꢀꢀ

Hꢅꢀꢃ

Hꢅꢀꢂ

Communication command point 1 setting

Communication command point 1 frequency

Communication command point 2 setting

0-100 (%)

0.0-200.0 (Hz)

0-100 (%)

0.0

100

50.0 (WP type)

60.0 (WN type)

Hꢅꢀꢊ

Communication command point 2 frequency

0.0-200.0 (Hz)

Note: Don't set the same value between point 1 and point 2. If set the same falue, the GTTꢀ is displayed.

1) 0-10Vdc voltage input adjustment (VIA, VIB)

VIA, VIB terminals

・The output frequency with

respect to the voltage input is

adjusted according to the

selected reference point.

・Gradient and bias can be set

easily.

Hꢃꢁꢊ/Hꢃꢀꢂ

60 ( Hz )

Output

frequency

Hꢃꢁꢃ/Hꢃꢀꢀ

0 ( Hz)

Hꢃꢁꢀ/Hꢃꢀꢁ

Hꢃꢁꢂ/Hꢃꢀꢃ

100 (%)

10V voltage signal

0 (%)

Frequency commnd

2) 4-20mAdc current input adjustment (VIA: VIA (SW3) slide switch in the I position)

VIA terminal

Hꢃꢁꢊ

60 ( Hz )

The output frequency with respect to

the current input is adjusted

according to the selected reference

point.

・

Output

frequency

Gradient and bias can be set easily.

・

Set

to to create a current

ꢁ

Hꢃꢁꢀ

input from 0 to 20mA.

Hꢃꢁꢃ

0 ( Hz)

Hꢃꢁꢀ

20 (%)

Hꢃꢁꢂ

100 (%)

20mA current signal

Frequency commnd

F-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

6.5.3 Setting of frequency with the input from an external

contact

Hꢃꢇꢊ : External contact input - UP response time

Hꢃꢇꢈ : External contact input - UP frequency steps

Hꢃꢇꢇ : External contact input - DOWN response time

Hꢃꢇꢆ : External contact input - DOWN frequency steps

Hꢃꢇꢅ : Initial up/down frequency

Hꢃꢇꢄ : Change of the initial up/down frequency

•

Function

These parameters are used to set an output frequency by means of a signal from an external device.

Title

Function

Adjustment range

0.0 - 10.0 (s)

Default setting

0.1

External contact input - UP response

time

External contact input - UP frequency

steps

External contact input - DOWN

response time

Hꢃꢇꢊ

Hꢃꢇꢈ

Hꢃꢇꢇ

0.0 - FH (Hz)

0.0 - 10.0 (s)

0.1

External contact input - DOWN

frequency steps

Hꢃꢇꢆ

Hꢃꢇꢅ

0.0 - FH (Hz)

LL - UL (Hz)

0.1

0.0

Initial up/down frequency

0: Not changed

1: Setting of Hꢃꢇꢅ changed

when power is turned off

Change of the initial up/down

frequency

Hꢃꢇꢄ

* These functions take effect when parameter HOQF (frequency setting mode selection 1) is set to ꢈ or

parameter Hꢃꢁꢆ (frequency setting mode selection 2) is set to ꢈ is enabled.

■ Adjustment with continuous signals (Parameter-setting example 1)

Set parameters as follows to adjust the output frequency up or down in proportion to the frequency

adjustment signal input time:

Panel frequency incremental gradient = Hꢃꢇꢈ/Hꢃꢇꢊ setting time

Panel frequency decremental gradient = Hꢃꢇꢆ/Hꢃꢇꢇ setting time

Set parameters as follows to adjust the output frequency up or down almost in synchronization with the

adjustment by the panel frequency command:

Hꢃꢇꢊ = Hꢃꢇꢇ = 1

(HJ/CEE (or Hꢈꢁꢁ)) ≥ (Hꢃꢇꢈ/Hꢃꢇꢊ setting time)

(HJ/FGE (or Hꢈꢁꢀ)) ≥ (Hꢃꢇꢆ/Hꢃꢇꢇ setting time)

F-18

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

<<Sample sequence diagram 1: Adjustment with continuous signals>>

RUN command

Incrementing (UP) signal

Decrementing (DOWN) signal

Set frequency clearing signal

Upper limit frequency

Gradient Hꢃꢇꢆ／Hꢃꢇꢇ

Gradient Hꢃꢇꢈ／Hꢃꢇꢊ

Lower limit frequency

Frequency 0 Hz

The dotted line denotes the output frequency obtained by combining the slowdown speed and the panel

frequency adjustment speed.

Note: If the operation frequency is set to the lower limit frequency, it will increase from 0Hz when power is

turned on for the first time after the setting, and therefore the output frequency will not rise until the

operation frequency reaches the lower limit frequency. (Operation at the lower limit frequency)

In this case, the time required for the operation frequency to reach the lower limit frequency can be

shortened by setting HE to the lower limit frequency.

■ Adjustment with pulse signals (Parameter-setting example 2)

Set parameters as follows to adjust the frequency in steps of one pulse:

Hꢃꢇꢊ, Hꢃꢇꢇ ≤ Pulse On time

Hꢃꢇꢈ, Hꢃꢇꢆ = Frequency obtained with each pulse

The inverter does not respond to any pulses with an ON time shorter than that set with Hꢃꢇꢊ or

Hꢃꢇꢇ. 12ms or more of clearing signal is allowed.

F-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

<<Sample sequence diagram 2: Adjustment with pulse signals>>

■ If two signals are impressed simultaneously

•

If a clear single and an up or down signal are impressed simultaneously, priority will be given to the

clear signal.

•

If up and down signals are impressed simultaneously, The frequency will change at the specified up

or down rate.

■ About the setting of the initial up/down frequency

To adjust the frequency starting at a specified frequency other than 0.0 Hz (default initial frequency)

after turning on the inverter, specify the desired frequency using Hꢃꢇꢅ (initial up/down frequency).

■ About the change of the initial up/down frequency

To make the inverter automatically save the frequency immediately before it is turned off and start

operation at that frequency next time power is turned on, set Hꢃꢇꢄ (change of initial up/down

frequency) to 1 (which changes the setting of Hꢃꢇꢅ when power is turned off).

Keep in mind that the setting of Hꢃꢇꢅ is changed each time power is turned off.

■ Frequency adjustment range

The frequency can be set from 0.0Hz to HJ (Maximum frequency). The lower-limit frequency will be

set as soon as the set frequency clearing function (function number 43, 44) is entered from the input

terminal.

■ Minimum unit of frequency adjustment

If Hꢆꢁꢃ (Frequency free unit magnification) is set to 1.00, the output frequency can be adjusted in

steps of 0.01Hz.

F-20

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

6.5.4 Fine adjustment of frequency setting signal

Hꢊꢆꢁ : VIA input bias

Hꢊꢆꢀ : VIA input gain

Hꢊꢆꢃ : VIB input bias

Hꢊꢆꢂ : VIB input gain

•

Function

These parameters are used to fine adjust the relation between the frequency setting signal input

through the analog input terminals VIA and VIB and the output frequency.

Use these parameters to make fine adjustments after making rough adjustments using the

parameters Hꢃꢁꢀ to Hꢃꢀꢂ.

The figure below shows the characteristic of the frequency setting signal input through the VIA and VIB

terminals and that of the output frequency.

Hꢊꢆꢀ, Hꢊꢆꢂ

Hꢊꢆꢁ, Hꢊꢆꢃ

Frequency setting signal (VIA, VIB input value)

Bias adjustment of VIA and VIB input terminals (Hꢊꢆꢁ and Hꢊꢆꢃ)

To give leeway, the inverter is factory-adjusted by default so that it will not produce an output until a

certain amount of voltage is applied to the VIA and VIB input terminals. If you want to reduce the leeway,

set Hꢊꢆꢁ or Hꢊꢆꢃ to a larger value. Note that specifying a too large value may cause an output

frequency to be output, even though the operation frequency is 0 (zero) Hz.

Gain adjustment of VIA and VIB input terminals (Hꢊꢆꢀ and Hꢊꢆꢂ)

The inverter is factory-adjusted by default so that the operation frequency can reach the maximum

frequency, even though the voltage and current to the VIA and VIB input terminals are below the

maximum levels. If you want to adjust the inverter so that it will output the maximum frequency at the

maximum voltage and current, set Hꢊꢆꢀ or Hꢊꢆꢂ to a smaller value. Note that specifying a too small

value may cause the operation frequency not to reach the maximum frequency, even though the

maximum voltage and current are applied.

F-21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

6.6

Operation frequency

6.6.1 Starting frequency

Hꢃꢊꢁ : Starting frequency setting

•

Function

The frequency set with Hꢃꢊꢁ is put out as soon as operation is started.

Use the Hꢃꢊꢁ parameter when a delay in response of starting torque according to the

acceleration/deceleration time is probably affecting operation. Setting the starting frequency to a

value from 0.5 to 3Hz is recommended. The occurrence of an overcurrent can be suppressed by

setting this frequency below the rated slippage of the motor.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

0.5-10.0 (Hz)

Default setting

0.5

Hꢃꢊꢁ

Starting frequency setting

6.6.2 Run/stop control with frequency setting signals

Hꢃꢊꢀ : Operation starting frequency

Hꢃꢊꢃ : Operation starting frequency hysteresis

•

Function

The Run/stop of operation can be controlled simply with frequency setting signals.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

0.0-HJ (Hz)

Default setting

Hꢃꢊꢀ

Hꢃꢊꢃ

Operation starting frequency

0.0

Operation starting frequency hysteresis

Output frequency [Hz]

HJꢉ

The inverter begins accelerating after

the frequency setting signal has reached

point B.

Deceleration begins when the frequency

setting signal decreases below point A.

Hꢃꢊꢀ

Hꢃꢊꢃ

Hꢃꢊꢀ

Hꢃꢊꢃ

100% Frequency command value

F-22

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

6.7

DC braking

6.7.1 DC braking

Hꢃꢈꢁ : DC braking starting frequency

Hꢃꢈꢀ : DC braking current

Hꢃꢈꢃ : DC braking time

•

Function

A large braking torque can be obtained by applying a direct current to the motor. These parameters

set the direct current to be applied to the motor, the application time and the starting frequency.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

0.0-HJ (Hz)

Default setting

DC braking starting frequency

DC braking current

0.0

Hꢃꢈꢁ

Hꢃꢈꢀ

Hꢃꢈꢃ

0-100 (%) / (A)

0.0- 20.0 (sec)

DC braking time

1.0

Output frequency [Hz]

Set frequency

DC braking

DC braking starting frequency

Hꢃꢈꢁ

Time [s]

Output current [A]

DC braking current

Hꢃꢈꢀ

DC braking time Hꢃꢈꢃ

Operation signal (F or R)

OFF

Note1: During DC braking, the overload protection sensitivity of the inverter increases. The DC braking

current may be adjusted automatically to prevent tripping.

Note 2: During DC braking, the carrier frequency is 6kHz irrespective of the setting of parameter Hꢂꢁꢁ

(PWM carrier frequency).

F-23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

6.8

Auto-stop in case of lower-limit frequency continuous

operation

6.8.1 Auto-stop in case of lower-limit frequency continuous

operation

Hꢃꢈꢇ : Auto-stop in case of lower-limit frequency continuous operation

•

Function

If operation is carried out continuously at a frequency command below the lower-limit frequency (NN) for

the period of time set with Hꢃꢈꢇ, the inverter will automatically slow down the motor to a stop. At that

time, “NUVR” is displayed (alternately) on the operation panel.

This function will be canceled if a frequency command above the lower-limit frequency (NN) +0.2Hz.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

0.0: Disabled

0.1-600.0 (s)

Default setting

0.0

Auto-stop in case of lower-limit

frequency continuous operation time

Hꢃꢈꢇ

Output frequency [Hz]

NN+0.2Hz

Time [s]

Hꢃꢈꢇ

Operation signal (F or R)

OFF

Note: This function is enabled even at the start of operation and during switching between forward and

reverse run.

F-24

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

6.9

Jump frequency - jumping resonant frequencies

Hꢃꢆꢁ : Jump frequency 1

Hꢃꢆꢀ : Jumping width 1

Hꢃꢆꢃ : Jump frequency 2

Hꢃꢆꢂ : Jumping width 2

Hꢃꢆꢊ : Jump frequency 3

Hꢃꢆꢈ : Jumping width 3

•

Function

Resonance due to the natural frequency of the mechanical system can be avoided by jumping the

resonant frequency during operation. During jumping, hysteresis characteristics with respect to the jump

frequency are given to the motor.

Output command frequency

(Hz)

Jumping width 3 (

)

Hꢃꢆꢈ

Jump frequency 3 (

)

Hꢃꢆꢊ

Jump frequency 2 (

)

Jumping width 2 (

)

Hꢃꢆꢂ

Hꢃꢆꢃ

Jump frequency 1 (

Hꢃꢆꢁ

Jumping width 1 (

)

Hꢃꢆꢀ

Frequency setting signal

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

0.0-HJ (Hz)

Default setting

Hꢃꢆꢁ

Hꢃꢆꢀ

Hꢃꢆꢃ

Hꢃꢆꢂ

Hꢃꢆꢊ

Hꢃꢆꢈ

Jump frequency 1

Jumping width 1

0.0

0.0-30.0 (Hz)

0.0-HJ (Hz)

0.0-30.0 (Hz)

0.0-HJ (Hz)

0.0-30.0 (Hz)

Jump frequency 2

Jumping width 2

Jump frequency 3

Jumping width 3

Do not set the jump parameters, if multiple jump frequency setting width overlap.

During acceleration or deceleration, the jumping function is disabled for the operation frequency.

F-25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

6.10 Bumpless operation

Hꢃꢄꢈ : Bumpless operation selection

•

Function

LOC

REM

When switching from Remote mode to Local mode using

key, the status of start and stop, and

operating frequency at Remote mode are moved to Local mode.

By contraries, when switching from Local mode to Remote mode, they are not moved to Remote

mode.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

Default setting

Hꢃꢄꢈ

Bumpless operation selection

Example : Remote mode ( EOQFꢋꢁ (Terminal board))

Remote mode

Local mode

OFF

LOC

REM

Key

Setting frequency and start/stop

status are moved to Local mode

when switching from Remote

mode to Local mode.

Output

frequency

OFF

Motor runs continuously like an

example.

F-CC

Internal

operation

command

OFF

Local mode

Remote mode

OFF

LOC

REM

Key

When switching from Local

mode to Remote mode, setting

frequency and start/stop status

are determined by Remote

mode status.

Output

frequency

Set frequency at

Remote mode

OFF

F-CC

The example shows the motor

runs continuously because the

Remote mode is “run” status.

Internal

operation

command

OFF

To prevent from moving the setting frequency and start/stop status of Remote mode to Local mode,

LOC

REM

the Hꢃꢄꢈ is set to “ꢁ”(Disabled). In this case,

key is effective only while stopping.

F-26

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

6.11 PWM carrier frequency

Hꢂꢁꢁ : PWM carrier frequency

Hꢂꢀꢃ : Random mode

Hꢂꢀꢇ : Carrier frequency control mode selection

•

Function

1) The Hꢂꢁꢁ parameter allows the tone of the magnetic noise from the motor to be changed by

switching the PWM carrier frequency. This parameter is also effective in preventing the motor from

resonating with its load machine or its fan cover.

2) In addition, the Hꢂꢁꢁ parameter reduces the electromagnetic noise generated by the inverter.

Reduce the carrier frequency to reduce electromagnetic noise. Note: Although the electromagnetic

noise level is reduced, the acoustic noise of the motor is increased.

3) The random mode reduces motor electromagnetic noise by changing the pattern of the reduced carrier

frequency.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

12.0 or 8.0

PWM carrier frequency

Random mode

6.0-16.0 (kHz) (*)

Depending on model

(⇒ See page K-14)

Hꢂꢁꢁ

Hꢂꢀꢃ

0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

0: Carrier frequency not reduced

automatically

1: Carrier frequency reduced

automatically

Carrier frequency control mode

selection

2: Carrier frequency not reduced

automatically

Hꢂꢀꢇ

Support for 400V models

3: Carrier frequency reduced

automatically

Support for 400V models.

Reduction of rated current will be required if the PWM carrier frequency is modified for each applicable motor

model. Refer to the following figure.

When the PWM carrier frequency is set high, selecting “Carrier frequency not reduced automatically” causes

the inverter to be tripped more easily than selecting “Carrier frequency reduced automatically.”

F-27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

Reduction of rated current.

[200V Class for IP20]

0.4-0.75kW

1.5kW

2.2kW

Output current

100%

Output current

100%

90%

80%

70%

90%

80%

70%

90%

80%

70%

60%

Switching frequency (kHz)

4kW

3.7kW

5.5kW

Output current

100%

Output current

100%

Output current

100%

7.5kW

90%

80%

70%

90%

80%

70%

90%

80%

70%

60%

Switching frequency (kHz)

11kW

15kW

18.5kW

Output current

100%

Output current

100%

90%

80%

90%

80%

90%

80%

70%

60%

70%

60%

Switching frequency (kHz)

30kW

22kW

Output current

100%

Output current

100%

40degC ambient

90%

80%

70%

90%

80%

50degC ambient

60degC ambient

Coming soon

70%

60%

Switching frequency (kHz)

F-28

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

[400V Class for IP20]

1.5kW

0.4-0.75kW

2.2kW

Output current

100%

Output current

100%

90%

80%

90%

80%

90%

80%

70%

60%

70%

60%

70%

60%

10 12

14 16

10 12

14 16

10 12

14 16

Switching frequency (kHz)

5.5kW

Output current

100%

4kW

3.7kW

Output current

100%

Output current

100%

7.5kW

90%

80%

90%

80%

90%

70%

60%

80%

70%

60%

50%

40%

70%

60%

30%

10 12

14 16

Switching frequency (kHz)

11kW

15kW

18.5kW

Output current

100%

Output current

100%

90%

80%

90%

80%

90%

80%

70%

60%

70%

60%

70%

60%

10 12

14 16

10 12

14 16

10 12

14 16

Switching frequency (kHz)

22kW

30kW

Output current

100%

Output current

100%

90%

80%

90%

80%

40degC ambient

70%

60%

50%

Coming soon

50degC ambient

60degC ambient

50%

40%

30%

Switching frequency (kHz)

F-29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

The currents in the above figure are used as the basis to make calculations for inverter overload trip (QNꢀ).

If Hꢂꢀꢇ is set to ꢁ or ꢃ, QER trip will occur when the current increases and reaches the level above

which the carrier frequency is decreased automatically.

Random control is exercised when the motor is operated in a low-frequency range where it produces

annoying magnetic noise.

If the carrier frequency (Hꢂꢁꢁ) is set above 7.1 kHz, the random control function will not be performed,

because the level of motor magnetic noise is low at high frequencies.

When the carrier frequency control mode selection (Hꢂꢀꢇ) is set to ꢃ or ꢂ, the carrier frequency (Hꢂꢁꢁ)

should be set preferably 6 kHz. Otherwise the output voltage may drop.

F-30

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

6.12 Trip-less intensification

6.12.1 Auto-restart (Restart of coasting motor)

Hꢂꢁꢀ : Auto-restart control selection

Caution

• Stand clear of motors and mechanical equipment

If the motor stops due to a momentary power failure, the equipment will start suddenly when power is

restored.

This could result in unexpected injury.

• Attach warnings about sudden restart after a momentary power failure on inverters, motors and

equipment for prevention of accidents in advance.

Mandatory

•

Function

The Hꢂꢁꢀ parameter detects the rotating speed and rotational direction of the motor during

coasting ing the event of momentary power failure, and then after power haas been restored, restarts

the motor smoothly (motor speed search function). This parameter also allows commercial power

operation to be switched to inverter operation without stopping the motor.

During operation, "TVT[" is displayed.

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

0:Disabled

1:At auto-restart after momentary stop

2: When turning ST-CC on or off

3:At auto-restart or when turning ST-CC on or off

4:At start-up

Auto-restart control

selection

Hꢂꢁꢀ

If the motor is restarted in retry mode, this function will operate, regardless of the setting of this parameter.

1) Auto-restart after momentary power failure (Auto-restart function)

Input voltage

Motor speed

OFF

F or R command

Setting Hꢂꢁꢀ to ꢀ, (ꢂ): This function operates after power has been restored following detection of an

undervoltage by the main circuits and control power.

F-31

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

2) Restarting motor during coasting (Motor speed search function)

Motor speed

OFF

F or R command

ST command

OFF

Setting Hꢂꢁꢀ to ꢃor ꢂ: This function operates after the ST terminal connection has been OFF first and

then ON again.

Note: The terminal function ST needs to be assigned to an input terminal, using the parameters Hꢀꢀꢀ to

Hꢀꢀꢅ.

3) Motor speed search at starting

When Hꢂꢁꢀ is set to ꢊ, a motor speed search is performed each time operation is started.

This function is useful especially when the motor is not operated by the inverter but it is running because of

external force.

Warning!!

•

At restart, it takes about 300 ms for the inverter to check to see the number of revolutions of the

motor.

For this reason, the start-up takes more time than usual.

Use this function when operating a system with one motor connected to one inverter.

This function may not operate properly in a system configuration with multiple motors connected to

one inverter.

•

F-32

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

6.12.2 Instantaneous power failure coast stop selection

Hꢂꢁꢃ : Instantaneous power failure coast stop selection

•

Function

Coast stop in the event of momentary power failure: If a momentary power failure occurs during

operation, the inverter coast stops forcibly. When operation is stopped, the message “UVQR” is

displayed (alternately) on the operation panel.

After the forced coast stop, the inverter remains static until you put off the operation command

momentarily.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

0: Disabled

1: - (Do not select)

2: Coast stop

Default setting

Instantaneous power failure coast stop

selection

Hꢂꢁꢃ

[If momentary power failure occurs]

Input voltage

Motor speed

F-33

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

6.12.3 Retry function

Hꢂꢁꢂ : Retry selection (Selecting the number of times)

Caution

• Do not go near the motor in alarm-stop status when the retry function is selected.

The motor may suddenly restart, which could result in injury.

• Take measures for safety, e.g. attach a cover to the motor, to prevent accidents if the motor suddenly

restarts.

Mandatory

•

Function

This parameter resets the inverter automatically when the inverter gives an alarm. During the retry

mode, the motor speed search function operated automatically as required and thus allows smooth

motor restarting.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

0: Disabled, 1-10 times

Default setting

Retry selection (number of

times)

Hꢂꢁꢂ

The likely causes of tripping and the corresponding retry processes are listed below.

Cause of tripping Retry process Canceling conditions

Momentary power Up to 10 times in succession

The retry function will be canceled at

once if tripping is caused by an unusual

event other than: momentary power

failure, overcurrent, overvoltage or

overload.

failure

1st retry: About 1 sec after tripping

2nd retry: About 2 sec after tripping

3rd retry: About 3 sec after tripping

Overcurrent

Overvoltage

Overload

Overheating

10th retry: About 10 sec after tripping

This function will also be canceled if

retrying is not successful within the

specified number of times.

The retry function is disabled in the following unusual events:

• QEC : Arm overcurrent at start-up • GTTꢃ : Main unit RAM fault

• QEN : Overcurrent on the load side at start-up • GTTꢂ : Main unit ROM fault

• GRJQ : Output phase failure

• GTTꢊ : CPU fault trip

• QJꢃ : External thermal trip

• GTTꢈ : Remote control error

• GTTꢆ : Current detector fault

• GTTꢅ : Control circuit board format error

• GGRꢀ : EEPROM fault 1

• QV

• G

: Overtorque trip

: External trip stop

• WE

: Small-current operation trip

• WRꢀ : Undervoltage trip (main circuit)

• GHꢃ : Ground fault trip

• GGRꢃ : EEPROM fault 2

• GGRꢂ : EEPROM fault 3

• GRJꢀ : Input phase failure

• GV[R : Inverter type error

• GVPꢀ : Auto-tuning error

• Gꢌꢀꢅ : VIA input detection error

• Gꢌꢀꢄ : Main unit CPU communication error

• Gꢌꢃꢁ : Excessive torque boost

• Gꢌꢃꢀ : CPU fault 2

F-34

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

Protective operation detection relay signals (FLA, FLB, FLC terminal signals) are not sent during use of

the retry function. (Default setting)

To allow a signal to be sent to the protective action detection relay (FLA, B and C terminals) even during

the retry process, assign the function 36 or 37 to Hꢀꢂꢃ.

A virtual cooling time is provided for overload tripping (QNꢀ,QNꢃ).

In this case, the retry function operates after the virtual cooling time and retry time.

In the event of tripping caused by an overvoltage (QRꢀ - QRꢂ), the retry function will not be activated

until the voltage in the DC section comes down to a normal level.

In the event of tripping caused by overheating (QJ), the retry function will not be activated until the

temperature in the inverter comes down low enough for it to restart operation.

The retry function does not work even though Hꢂꢁꢂ is activated in case of powering-up with Hꢇꢁꢃ=ꢀ

after trip.

During retrying, the blinking display will alternate between TVT[ and the monitor display specified by

status monitor display mode selection parameter Hꢆꢀꢁ.

The number of retries will be cleared if the inverter is not tripped for the specified period of time after a

successful retry.

"A successful retry" means that the inverter output frequency reaches the command frequency without

causing the inverter to re-trip.

F-35

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

6.12.4 Avoiding overvoltage tripping

Hꢂꢁꢈ : Overvoltage limit operation

Hꢇꢃꢇ : Overvoltage stall protection level

•

Function

These parameters are used to keep the output frequency constant or increase it to prevent

overvoltage tripping in case the voltage in the DC section rises during deceleration or varying speed

operation. The deceleration time during overvoltage limit operation may increase above the

designated time.

Overvoltage limit operation level

Output

Frequency

Hꢇꢃꢇ :Over-voltage stall protection level

DC Voltage

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

0: Enabled

1: Disabled

Overvoltage limit operation

(Slowdown stop mode selection)

2: Enabled (Quick

deceleration)

3: Enabled (Dynamic quick

deceleration)

Hꢂꢁꢈ

Hꢇꢃꢇ

Overvoltage limit operation level

100-150%

140

If Hꢂꢁꢈ is set to ꢃ (quick deceleration), the inverter will increase the voltage to the motor (over-

excitation control) to increase the amount of energy consumed by the motor when the voltage reaches the

overvoltage protection level, and therefore the motor can be decelerated more quickly than normal

deceleration.

If Hꢂꢁꢈ is set to ꢂ (dynamic quick deceleration), the inverter will increase the voltage to the motor

(over-excitation control) to increase the amount of energy consumed by the motor as soon as the motor

begins to slow down, and therefore the motor can be decelerated still more quickly than quick

deceleration.

F-36

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

6.12.5 Output voltage adjustment/Supply voltage correction

XNX : Base frequency voltage 1

Hꢂꢁꢆ : Supply voltage correction (output voltage adjustment)

•

Function

Base frequency voltage1

The Hꢂꢁꢆ parameter adjusts the voltage corresponding to the base frequency 1 XN so that no

voltage exceeding the XNX set value is put out. (This function is enabled only when Hꢂꢁꢆ is set

to either "0" or "1".)

Supply voltage correction

The Hꢂꢁꢆ parameter maintains a constant V/F ratio, even when the input voltage decreases. The

torque during low-speed operation is prevented from decreasing.

Supply voltage correction: Maintains a constant V/F ratio, even when the input voltage fluctuates.

Limitation of output voltage: Limits the voltage at frequencies exceeding the base frequency. Applied when

operating a special motor with low induced voltage.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

50-330 (V) : 200V class

Default setting

230 (WP/WN type)

400 (WP type)

460 (WN type)

XNX

Base frequency voltage1

50-660 (V) : 400V class

0:Supply voltage uncorrected,

output voltage limited

1:Supply voltage corrected,

output voltage limited

2:Supply voltage uncorrected,

output voltage unlimited

3:Supply voltage corrected,

output voltage unlimited

Supply voltage correction

(limitation of output voltage)

Hꢂꢁꢆ

If Hꢂꢁꢆ is set to "ꢁ" or "ꢃ", the output voltage will change in proportion to the input voltage.

Even if the base frequency voltage (XNX parameter ) is set above the input voltage, the output voltage

will not exceed the input voltage.

The rate of voltage to frequency can be adjusted according to the rated motor capacity. For example,

setting Hꢂꢁꢆ to "ꢁ" or "ꢀ" prevents the output voltage from increasing, even if the input voltage

changes when operation frequency exceeds the base frequency.

When the V/F control mode selection parameter (RV) is set to any number between ꢃ and ꢇ, the supply

voltage is corrected regardless of the setting of Hꢂꢁꢆ.

F-37

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

[0: Supply voltage uncorrected, output voltage limited]

[1: Supply voltage corrected, output voltage limited]

Input voltage

High

XNX

High

×Input voltage

XNX

Rated voltage

Low

Output frequency

* The above applies when V/F control mode selection

parameter RV is set to "0" or "1".

XNX

the output voltage can be prevented

Rated voltage

from exceeding the input voltage.

[2: Supply voltage uncorrected, output voltage unlimited]

[3: Supply voltage corrected, output voltage unlimited]

Input voltage

High

Low

High

XNX

×Input voltage

Rated voltage

Low

Output frequency

* The above applies when V/F control mode selection

* Even if XNX is set for an output voltage lower than the input

voltage, the output voltage will exceed the voltage adjusted

by XNX when the output frequency is higher than the base

frequency 1 XN.

parameter

is set to "0" or "1".

XNX

the output voltage can be prevented from

exceeding the input voltage.

Rated voltage

6.12.6 Canceling the operation command

Hꢂꢀꢀ : Reverse-run prohibition

•

Function

This function prevents the motor from running in the forward or reverse direction when it receives the

wrong operation signal.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

0: Forward/reverse run permitted

1: Reverse run prohibited

2: Forward run prohibited

Hꢂꢀꢀ

Reverse-run prohibition

F-38

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

6.13 Droop control

Hꢂꢃꢁ : Droop gain

Hꢂꢃꢂ : Droop insensitive torque band

•

Function

The motor is allowed to “slip” according to the load torque current. Using these parameters, the

insensitive torque band and the gain can be adjusted.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

Hꢂꢃꢁ

Hꢂꢃꢂ

Droop gain

Droop insensitive torque band

0-100%

10%

F-39

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

The droop control function refers to the function of operating the power-running motor at operating

frequency f₁(Hz) that is lower than command frequency f₀(Hz) by droop frequency ∆f (Hz) when the

torque current is T₁(%). (See the above figure.)

•

The droop frequency ∆f can be calculated, using the following expression.

Droop frequency ∆f (Hz)=base frequency XN × Hꢂꢃꢁ× (Torque current T₁- Hꢂꢃꢂ)

When the torque current is above the specified droop insensitive torque band (Hꢂꢃꢂ), the frequency is

reduced during power running or increased during regenerative braking. The above figure shows an

example of the operating frequency during power running. During regenerative braking, control is

performed in such a way as to increase the frequency.

•

The droop function is activated above the torque current set with Hꢂꢃꢂ.

The amount of droop frequency ∆f varies depending on the amount of torque current T₁.

Note: If the base frequency XN exceeds 100Hz, count it as 100Hz.

Control is exercised between the starting frequency (Hꢃꢊꢁ) and the maximum frequency (HJ).

[An example of calculation]

Parameter setting:Base frequency XN=60 (Hz), droop gain Hꢂꢃꢁ=10 (%)

Droop insensitive torque band Hꢂꢃꢂ=30 (%)

Droop frequency ∆f (Hz) and operating frequency f₁when command frequency f₀is 50 (Hz) and torque

current T₁is 100 (%) are as follows.

Droop frequency ∆f (Hz)=XN × Hꢂꢃꢁ × (T₁- Hꢂꢃꢂ)

=60 (Hz) × 10 (%) × (100 (%) - 30 (%))

=4.2 (Hz)

Operation frequency f₁(Hz) = f₀- ∆f = 50 (Hz) - 4.2 (Hz)=45.8 (Hz)

F-40

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

6.14 Conducting PID control

Hꢂꢈꢄ : PID control waiting time

Hꢂꢇꢁ : PID control

Hꢂꢇꢃ : Proportional gain

Hꢂꢇꢂ : Integral gain

Hꢂꢇꢇ : Differential gain

•

Function

Using feedback signals (4 to 20mA, 0 to 10V) from a detector, process control can be exercised, for

example, to keep the airflow, amount of flow or pressure constant.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

0-2400 [s]

Default setting

Hꢂꢈꢄ

PID control waiting time

0: Disabled

Hꢂꢇꢁ

PID control

1: Enabled (Feedback: VIA)

2: Enabled (Feedback: VIB)

Hꢂꢇꢃ

Hꢂꢇꢂ

Hꢂꢇꢇ

Proportional gain

Integral gain

0.01-100.0

0.00-2.55

0.30

0.20

0.00

Differential gain

1) External connection

F-41

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

2) Types of PID control interfaces

Process quantity input data (frequency) and feedback input data can be combined as follows for the PID

control of the VF-FS1:

Process quantity input data (frequency setting)

Feedback input data

Frequency setting mode selection

HOQF / Hꢃꢁꢆ

PID control

Hꢂꢇꢁ

Setting method

(1) External analog setting

VIA (DC: 4-20mA / 0-10V)

(2) External analog setting

VIB (DC: 0-10V)

ꢀ: External analog input

ꢀ

VIA (DC:4-20mA / DC:0-10V)

ꢃ

ꢃ: External analog input

(3) Panel input setting Internal

preset-speed setting

VIB (DC:0-10V)

ꢂ

(4) Serial communication

ꢊ

(5) UP/DOWN from external

contact

ꢈ

(6) Internal preset-speed setting

- (EOQF=0)

Note 1: About the setting of HOQF and Hꢃꢁꢆ: Do not select the same terminal that is used feedback

terminal (VIA or VIB).

Note 2: When using VIA terminal, set Hꢀꢂꢁ or Hꢀꢂꢃ respectively to 52 or 53 to put out signals to RY-RC

or FLA-FLB-FLC.

When using VIB terminal, set Hꢀꢂꢁ or Hꢀꢂꢃ respectively to 60 or 61 to put out signals to RY-RC

or FLA-FLB-FLC.

You can also specify a frequency agreement detection range (Hꢀꢇꢆ).

⇒ For more information, see section 6.3.5.

3) Setting PID control

Set "ꢀ" or "2" in the extended parameter Hꢂꢇꢁ (PID control)ꢍ

(1) Set parameters CEE(acceleration time), and FGE (deceleration time) to the system fitting values.

(2) To limit the output frequency, set parameters WN (upper limit frequency) and NN (lower limit

frequency). If process quantities are set from the operation panel, however, the process quantity setting

range will be limited by the settings of WN and NN.

4) Adjusting the PID control gain level

Adjust the PID control gain level according to the process quantities, the feedback signals and the object to

be controlled.

The following parameters are provided for gain adjustment:

Parameter

Hꢂꢇꢃ (P-gain)

Hꢂꢇꢂ (I-gain)

Hꢂꢇꢇ (D-gain)

Setting range

0.01-100.0

Default setting

0.30

0.01-100.0

0.00-2.55

0.20

0.00

F-42

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

Hꢂꢇꢃ (P-gain adjustment parameter)

This parameter adjusts the proportional gain level during PID control. A correction value proportional to

the particular deviation (the difference between the set frequency and the feedback value) is obtained

by multiplying this deviation by the parameter setting.

A larger P-gain adjustment value gives faster response. Too large an adjustment value, however,

results in an unstable event such as hunting.

Feedback amount

Process quantity setting value

Fast response

= Large gain)

(

Hꢂꢇꢃ

Slow response (

= Small gain)

Hꢂꢇꢃ

Time

Hꢂꢇꢂ (I-gain adjustment parameter)

This parameter adjusts the integral gain level during PID control. Any deviations remaining unremoved

during proportional action are cleared to zero (residual deviation offset function).

A larger I-gain adjustment value reduces residual deviations. Too large an adjustment value, however,

results in an unstable event such as hunting.

(

= Small gain)

Hꢂꢇꢂ

Feedback amount

Process quantity

setting value

Residual deviation

(

= Large gain)

Hꢂꢇꢂ

Time

If one of input terminals is assigned input terminal function 65 (PID control integral value clear), integral

value is always 0 (zero) during the input terminal on.

F-43

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

Hꢂꢇꢇ (D-gain adjustment parameter)

This parameter adjusts the differential gain level during PID control. This gain increases the speed of

response to a rapid change in deviation (difference between the frequency setting and the amount of

feedback).

Note that setting the gain more than necessary may cause great fluctuations in output frequency, and

thus operation to become unstable.

5) Adjusting analog command voltages

To use external analog setting (VIA or VIB) or feedback input (VIA or VIB), perform voltage-scaling

adjustments (input point setting) as required. ⇒ See section 6.5.2 for further details.

If the feedback input data is too small, voltage-scaling adjustment data can also be used for gain adjustment.

Example of VIB terminal setting

Example of VIA terminal setting

(voltage input)

Example of VIA terminal setting

(current input)

Hꢃꢁꢊ

(60Hz)

Hꢃꢁꢊ

(60Hz)

Hꢃꢀꢂ

(60Hz)

Hꢃꢀꢀ

(0Hz)

Hꢃꢀꢁ

Hꢃꢁꢃ

(0Hz)

Hꢃꢁꢃ

(0Hz)

10V

Hꢃꢁꢂ

100%

10V

Hꢃꢀꢃ

100%

4mA

Hꢃꢁꢀ

20%

20mA

Hꢃꢁꢂ

100%

Hꢃꢁꢀ

VIB input value

VIA input value

6) Setting the time elapsed before PID control starts

You can specify a waiting time for PID control to prevent the inverter from starting PID control before the

control system becomes stable, for example, after start-up.

The inverter ignores feedback input signals, carries out operation at the frequency determined by the amount

of processing for the period of time specified with Hꢂꢈꢄ and enters the PID control mode after a lapse of

the specified time.

F-44

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

6.15 Setting motor constants

6.15.1 Setting motor constants 1

Hꢊꢁꢁ : Auto-tuning

Hꢊꢁꢀ : Slip frequency gain

Hꢊꢁꢃ : Autmatic torque boost value

Hꢊꢀꢈ : Motor rated current

Hꢊꢀꢇ : Motor no-load current

Hꢊꢀꢆ : Motor rated speed

Hꢊꢀꢅ : Speed control response coefficient

Hꢊꢀꢄ : Speed control stable coefficient

To use vector control, automatic torque boost and automatic energy saving, motor constant setting (motor tuning)

is required. The following two methods are available to set motor constants.

Setting V/F control mode selection (RV) and auto-tuning (Hꢊꢁꢁ) independently

Combining the V/F control mode selection (RV) and manual tuning

Check to be sure that the setting of the parameter XN and that of the parameter XNX agree with the base

frequency (rated rotational speed) and base frequency voltage (rated voltage) of the motor to be operated,

respectively. If not, set the parameters correctly.

When using the inverter to control the operation of a motor smaller in capacity by one grade or more, be

sure to set the motor rated current setting parameter (Hꢊꢀꢈ) properly.

Vector control may not operate properly if the motor capacity differs from the applicable rated capacity of the

inverter by more than two grades.

If current waveforms oscillate during operation, increase the speed control stability factor (Hꢊꢀꢄ). This is

effective in suppressing oscillation.

F-45

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

[Selection 1: Setting vector control and auto-tuning independently]

This method sets energy-saving,sensorless vector control, automatic torque boost, and auto-tuning

independently.

Specify the control mode selection parameter (RV) and then set auto-tuning.

Set the auto-tuning parameter Hꢊꢁꢁ to ꢃ

(Auto-tuning enabled)

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

0: Auto-tuning disabled (use of internal parameters)

1: Application of individual settings of Hꢊꢁꢃ (after

execution: 0)

Hꢊꢁꢁ

Auto-tuning

2: Auto-tuning enabled (after execution: 0)

(1) At least, set the following parameters, as specified on the nameplate of the motor.

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Base frequency 1

25.0-200.0 (Hz)

50-330 (V) : 200V class

50-660 (V) : 400V class

0.1-200.0 (A)

XNX

Base frequency voltage 1

Hꢊꢀꢈ

Hꢊꢀꢆ

Motor rated current

Motor rated speed

100-15000 (min^-1)

(2)Set Hꢊꢁꢁ to ꢃ to before the start of operation. Tuning is performed at the start of the motor.

Precautions on auto-tuning

(1) Conduct auto-tuning only after the motor has been connected and operation completely stopped.

If auto-tuning is conducted immediately after operation stops, the presence of a residual voltage

may result in abnormal tuning.

(2) Voltage is applied to the motor during tuning even though it barely rotates. During tuning,

“CVPꢀ” is displayed on the operation panel.

(3) Tuning is performed when the motor starts for the first time after Hꢊꢁꢁ is set to ꢃ.

Tuning is usually completed within three seconds. If it is aborted, the motor will trip with the dis-

play of GVPꢀ and no constants will be set for that motor.

(4) High-speed motors, high-slip motors or other special motors cannot be auto-tuned. For these

motors, perform manual tuning using Selection 2 described below.

(5) The resulting insufficient motor torque during tuning could create a risk of machine stalling/falling.

(6) If auto-tuning is impossible or an "GVPꢀ" auto-tuning error is displayed, perform manual tuning

with Selection 2.

(7) If the inverter is tripped during auto-tuning because of an output phase failure (GRJQ), check if

the inverter is connected to the correctly. A check for output phase failures is made during auto-

tuning, regardless of the setting of the output phase failure detection mode selection parameter

(Hꢇꢁꢈ).

F-46

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

[Selection 2: Setting vector control and manual tuning independently]

If an "GVP" tuning error is displayed during auto-tuning or when vector control characteristics are to be

improved, independent motor constants can be set.

Title

Function

Adjustment range

0-150 (%）

Default setting

Hꢊꢁꢀ

Hꢊꢁꢃ

Hꢊꢀꢈ

Hꢊꢀꢇ

Hꢊꢀꢆ

Slip frequency gain

Automatic torque boost value

Motor rated current

0.0-30.0 (%)

0.1-200.0 (A)

10-100 (%)

Depends on the

capacity

(⇒ See page K-14)

Motor no-load current

Motor rated rotational speed

100-15000 (min^-1)

Speed control response

coefficient

Speed control stability

coefficient

Hꢊꢀꢅ

Hꢊꢀꢄ

1-150

1-100

Setting procedure Adjust the following parameters:

Hꢊꢁꢀ: Set the compensation gain for the slipping of the motor. A higher slip frequency reduces motor

slipping correspondingly. After setting Hꢊꢀꢆ, set Hꢊꢁꢀ to adjust in detail.

Hꢊꢁꢃ: Adjust the primary resistive component of the motor. Use the auto-tuning value.

Hꢊꢀꢈ: Set the rated current of the motor. For the rated current, see the motor's nameplate or test report.

Hꢊꢀꢇ: Set the ratio of the no-load current of the motor to the rated current. Enter the value in % that is

obtained by dividing the no-load current specified in the motor's test report by the rated current.

Hꢊꢀꢆ: Set the rated rotational speed of the motor. For the rated current, see the motor's nameplate or test

report.

F-47

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

Hꢊꢀꢅ: Using this parameter along with Hꢊꢀꢄ, adjust the speed of response to the frequency command.

Hꢊꢀꢄ: Using this parameter along with Hꢊꢀꢅ, adjust the speed of response to the frequency command.

How to make adjustments according to the moment of inertia of the load

The moment of inertia of the load (including that of the motor shaft) was set at the factory on the

assumption that it would be three times as large as that of the motor shaft.

Adjust Hꢊꢀꢅ, Hꢊꢀꢄ with the ratio of inertia in case load inertia is different from three times

of the motor inertia.

When making the above adjustments, increase or decrease settings in steps of 10% or so while

checking how things change.

Note also that, depending on the settings of Hꢊꢀꢅ and Hꢊꢀꢄ, the frequency may exceed

the upper-limit frequency if the inverter is set so as to accelerate the load in the shortest

possible time.

6.15.2 Setting motor constants 2 (Details)

Hꢊꢅꢁ : Exciting current coefficient

Hꢊꢅꢈ : Stall prevention control coefficient 1

Hꢊꢄꢃ : Stall prevention control coefficient 2

Hꢊꢄꢊ : Motor adjustment coefficient

Hꢊꢄꢈ : Maximam voltage adjustment coefficient

Hꢊꢄꢇ : Waveform switching adjustment coefficient

* The following parameters enables you to make adjustments more finely.

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

100

Hꢊꢅꢁ

Exciting current coefficient

100-130 (%)

10-250

Stall prevention control

coefficient 1

Stall prevention control

coefficient 2

Hꢊꢅꢈ

Hꢊꢄꢃ

Hꢊꢄꢊ

Hꢊꢄꢈ

Hꢊꢄꢇ

100

50-150

Depends on

the capacity

Motor adjustment coefficient

0-200

Maximam voltage adjustment

coefficient

Waveform switching

adjustment coefficient

90-120 (%)

104

0.1-14.0(kHz)

14.0

Hꢊꢅꢁ: Used to fine adjust the magnetic field increase rate in low-speed range. To increase the torque in

low-speed range, specify a larger value for Hꢊꢅꢁ. Note that this parameter should be adjusted

only when enough torque cannot be obtained, even though auto-tuning (Hꢊꢁꢁ=ꢃ) was made

after the setting of the parameters Hꢊꢁꢀ through Hꢊꢀꢄ. Note also that adjusting this

parameter may cause an increase in the no-load current in low-speed range. If the no-load current

exceeds the rated current, do not adjust this parameter.

Hꢊꢅꢈ: Using this parameter along with Hꢊꢄꢃ adjusts characteristics in a region in which the frequency

is above the base frequency (region where the field is weak).

F-48

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

Hꢊꢄꢃ: Using this parameter along with Hꢊꢅꢈ adjusts characteristics in a region in which the frequency

is above the base frequency (region where the field is weak).

How to make adjustments in a region (region where magnetic field is weak) above the base

frequency

If a heavy load is applied instantaneously (or transiently), the motor may stall before the load

current reaches the current set with the stall prevention level 1 parameter (Hꢇꢁꢀ). In many

cases, this kind of stall can be avoided by gradually reducing the setting of Hꢊꢅꢈ.

A drop in supply voltage may cause fluctuations of the load current or vibration of the motor. In

some cases, such phenomena can be eliminated by changing the setting of Hꢊꢄꢃ to between

80 and 90. However, this may cause an increase in load current, so that it is also necessary to

adjust the setting of the electronic thermal protective level 1 parameter (VJT) properly

according to the motor capacity.

Hꢊꢄꢊ: There is no need to adjust this parameter under normal conditions. (Do not change the setting,

unless otherwise instructed by Toshiba technical staff)

Hꢊꢄꢈ: Specify a larger value for Hꢊꢄꢈ to secure as high an output voltage as possible in a region

(region where magnetic field is weak) above the base frequency. Setting Hꢊꢄꢈ to a larger value

may cause the motor to vibrate or gears to squeak. If such a phenomenon occurs, do not adjust

this parameter.

Hꢊꢄꢇ: Specify a larger value for Hꢊꢄꢇ if switching from a waveform to another results in a considerable

increase in vibration and noise in middle-speed range (region between the start frequency and the

base frequency). If no improvement can be made by specifying a larger value, do not adjust this

parameter.

F-49

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

6.16 Acceleration/deceleration time 2

6.16.1 Selecting an acceleration/deceleration pattern

Hꢈꢁꢃ : Acceleration/deceleration 1 pattern

Hꢈꢁꢇ : S-pattern lower-limit adjustment amount

Hꢈꢁꢆ : S-pattern upper-limit adjustment amount

•

Function

These parameters allow you to select an acceleration/deceleration pattern that suits the intended use.

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

Hꢈꢁꢃ

Hꢈꢁꢇ

Acceleration/ deceleration 1 pattern

0: Linear, 1: S-pattern 1, 2: S-pattern 2

S-pattern lower-limit adjustment

amount

S-pattern upper-limit adjustment

amount

0-50%

10%

Hꢈꢁꢆ

Linear acceleration/deceleration

A general acceleration/

deceleration pattern.

This pattern can usually be

used.

Output frequency

[Hz]

Maximum frequency

Time [s]

CEE

FGE

S-pattern acceleration/deceleration 1

Select this pattern to

accelerate/decelerate the

motor rapidly to a high-speed

region with an output

frequency of 60Hz or more or

to minimize the shocks

applied during

Output frequency

[Hz]

Maximum frequency

Set frequency

acceleration/deceleration.

This pattern is suitable for

pneumatic transport

Time [s]

CEE

Hꢈꢁꢇ × CEE

machines.

Hꢈꢁꢆ × CEE

Actual acceleration time

F-50

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

S-pattern acceleration/deceleration

Select this pattern to obtain

slow acceleration in a

Output frequency

[Hz]

Maximum frequency

demagnetizing region with a

small motor acceleration

torque. This pattern is

Set frequency

Base frequency

suitable for high-speed

spindle operation.

Time [s]

CEE

Actual acceleration time

6.16.2 Switching acceleration/deceleration time 1 and 2

Hꢈꢁꢁ : Acceleration time 2

Hꢈꢁꢀ : Deceleration time 2

Hꢈꢁꢂ : Acceleration/deceleration 2 pattern

Hꢈꢁꢊ: Selecting an acceleration/deceleration pattern

Hꢈꢁꢈ : Acceleration/deceleration 1 and 2 switching frequency

•

Function

Two acceleration times and two deceleration times can be specified individually. A method of selection or

switching can be selected from among the following:

1) Selection by means of parameters

2) Switching by changing frequencies

3) Switching by means of terminals

F-51

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

Default setting

Title

Function

Acceleration time 2

Adjustment range

0.0-3200 [s]

Depends on the

capacity

Hꢈꢁꢁ

(⇒ See page K-14)

Depends on the

capacity

Hꢈꢁꢀ

Hꢈꢁꢊ

Deceleration time 2

0.0-3200 [s]

(⇒ See page K-14)

Selecting an acceleration/deceleration ꢀ: Acc / dec 1

pattern

ꢃ: Acc / dec 2

Selection using parameters

Output frequency [Hz]

FGE

CEE

Time [s]

Hꢈꢁꢊ＝ꢀ

Hꢈꢁꢁ

Hꢈꢁꢀ

Hꢈꢁꢊ＝ꢃ

Acceleration/deceleration time 1 is initially set as the default. Acceleration/deceleration time 2 can be

selected by changing the setting of the Hꢈꢁꢊ.

Enabled if EOQF=ꢀ (panel input enabled)

Switching by frequencies - Switching the acceleration/deceleration time automatically at the frequency

setting of Hꢈꢁꢈ.

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

0.0

Acceleration/deceleration 1 and 2

switching frequency

Hꢈꢁꢈ

0.0-WN

F-52

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

(1) Acceleration at the gradient corresponding

to acceleration time CEE

(3) Deceleration at the gradient corresponding

to deceleration time Hꢈꢁꢀ

(2) Acceleration at the gradient corresponding

to acceleration time Hꢈꢁꢁ

(4) Deceleration at the gradient corresponding

to deceleration time FGE

Switching using external terminals - Switching the acceleration/deceleration time via external

terminals

(1) Acceleration at the gradient corresponding

to acceleration time CEE

(3) Deceleration at the gradient corresponding

to deceleration time Hꢈꢁꢀ

(2) Acceleration at the gradient corresponding

to acceleration time Hꢈꢁꢁ

(4) Deceleration at the gradient corresponding

to deceleration time FGE

F-53

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

■ How to set parameters

a) Operating method: Terminal input

Set the operation control mode selection EOQF to ꢁ.

b) Use the RES terminal for switching. (Instead, other terminals may be used.)

RES: Acceleration/deceleration switching signal

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Setting value

5 (the second

acceleration/deceleration

mode selection)

Hꢀꢀꢂ

Input terminal selection 3 (RES)

0-71

■ Acceleration/ deceleration pattern

Acceleration/deceleration patterns can be selected individually, using the acceleration/deceleration 1, 2

and 3 parameters.

1) Linear acceleration/deceleration

2) S-pattern acceleration/deceleration 1

3) S-pattern acceleration/deceleration 2

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

Hꢈꢁꢃ

Acceleration/ deceleration 1 pattern

0: Linear

1: S-pattern 1

Hꢈꢁꢂ

Acceleration/ deceleration 2 pattern

2: S-pattern 2

+ Both the settings of the S-pattern lower-limit and upper-limit adjustment parameters (Hꢈꢁꢇ and

Hꢈꢁꢆ) are applied to any acceleration/deceleration S-pattern.

⇒ For an explanation of acceleration/deceleration patterns, see section 6.16.1.

6.17 Protection functions

6.17.1 Setting motor electronic thermal protection

VJT : Motor electronic thermal protection level 1

Hꢀꢆꢂ : Motor electronic thermal protection level 2

Hꢇꢁꢆ : Motor 150%-overload time limit

Hꢇꢂꢃ: Motor electronic-thermal protection retention selection

F-54

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

•

Function

This parameter allows selection of the appropriate electronic thermal protection characteristics

according to the particular rating and characteristics of the motor.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

10-100 (%) / (A)

Default setting

100

Motor electronic thermal protection

VJT

level 1

Motor electronic thermal protection

level 2

Hꢀꢆꢂ

Hꢇꢁꢆ

Hꢇꢂꢃ

10-100 (%) / (A)

10-2400 (s)

100

300

Motor 150%-overload time limit

Motor electric-thermal protection

retention selection

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

⇒ For more details, see section 5.12.

Note: The 100% standard value is the rated output current indicated on the nameplate.

6.17.2 Setting current stall

Hꢇꢁꢀ : Stall prevention level 1

Hꢀꢅꢈ : Stall prevention level 2

Caution

• Do not set the stall prevention level (Hꢇꢁꢀ) extremely low.

If the stall prevention level parameter (Hꢇꢁꢀ) is set at or below the no-load current of the motor, the

stall preventive function will be always active and increase the frequency when it judges that

regenerative braking is taking place.

Prohibited

Do not set the stall prevention level parameter (Hꢇꢁꢀ) below 30% under normal use conditions.

•

Function

This parameter adjusts the output frequency by activating a current stall prevention function against a

current exceeding the Hꢇꢁꢀ-specified level.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

10-110 (%) / (A),

111: Deactivated

Default setting

110

Hꢇꢁꢀ

Hꢀꢅꢈ

Stall prevention level 1

Stall prevention level 2

F-55

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

[Display during operation of the stall prevention]

During an QE alarm status, (that is , when there is a current flow in excess of the stall prevention level),

the output frequency changes. At the same time, to the left of this value, "E" is displayed flashing on

and off.

Example of display

E ꢈꢁ

The switching from Hꢇꢁꢀ to Hꢀꢅꢈ can be performed by entering a command through terminals.

⇒ For more details, see section 6.4.1.

Note: The 100% standard value is the rated output current indicated on the nameplate.

6.17.3 Inverter trip retention

Hꢇꢁꢃ : Inverter trip retention selection

•

Function

If the inverter trips, this parameter will retain the corresponding trip information. Trip information that

has thus been stored into memory can be displayed, even after power has been reset.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

0: Canceled with the power off

1: Still retained with the power off

Hꢇꢁꢃ

Inverter trip retention selection

The causes of up to four trips that occurred in the past can be displayed in status monitor mode.

Data displayed in status monitor mode when the inverter is tripped is cleared when power is turned off.

Past trip records can be displayed.

Trip records are retained even if power is turned off and turned back on during retry operation.

■

Flow of operation when Hꢇꢁꢃ=ꢀ

Reset the

inverter by

panel or

Completion of reset

Normal operation

terminal

operation.

Occurrence of a

trip

The relay trips again.

・Display of the cause

・Failure signal FL

activated

If the cause of the

trip is not

eliminated

Turn power off,

then turn it back

on to reset the

inverter.

Trip state is retained

・Display of the cause

・Failure signal FL not

activated

If the cause of the

trip is eliminated

F-56

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

6.17.4 Emergency stop

Hꢇꢁꢂ: Emergency stop

Hꢇꢁꢊ : Emergency DC braking time

•

Function

These parameters allow you to specify how to stop operation using an external control device when

an external trip occurs. When operation is stopped, the trip G and the FL relay also are activated.

When setting Hꢇꢁꢂ to ꢃ (emergency DC braking), set also Hꢃꢈꢀ (DC braking rate) and

Hꢇꢁꢊ (emergency braking time)

1) External trip stop via terminals

The external trip stop function can be executed via the a-contact. Proceed as follows to assign an

external stopping terminal and select the stopping method:

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

0: Coast stop

1: Slowdown stop

Default setting

Hꢇꢁꢂ

Emergency stop selection

2: Emergency DC braking

Hꢇꢁꢊ

Hꢃꢈꢀ

Emergency DC braking time

DC braking current

0.0 ~ 20.0 [sec]

0-100 (%)

1.0

(Example of terminal assignment): Assigning the trip stop function to the RES terminal

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Setting value

11 (External trip

stop)

Hꢀꢀꢂ

Input terminal selection 3 (RES)

0-71

Note 1: Emergency stopping via the specified terminal is possible, even during panel operation.

Note 2: If DC braking is not needed to bring the motor to a stop under normal conditions, although Hꢇꢁꢂ is

set to 2 (emergency DC braking), set the DC braking starting frequency (Hꢃꢈꢁ) at 0.0 Hz.

2) Emergency stopping from the operation panel

Emergency stopping from the operation panel is possible

STOP

by pressing the

key on the panel twice while the inverter is not in the panel control mode.

STOP

(1) Press the

(2) Press the

key................................"GQHH" will blink.

STOP

key once again

Operation will come to a trip stop in accordance with the setting

of the ꢉHꢇꢁꢂ parameter.

After this, "G" will be displayed and a failure detection signal

generated (FL relay deactivated).

F-57

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

6.17.5 Output phase failure detection

Hꢇꢁꢈ : Output phase failure detection mode selection

•

Function

This parameter detects inverter output Phase failure. If the Phase failure status persists for one

second or more, the tripping function and the FL relay will be activated. At the same time, a trip

information GRJQ will also be displayed.

Set Hꢇꢁꢈ to ꢈ to open the motor-inverter connection by switching commercial power operation to

inverter operation.

Detection errors may occur for special motors such as high-speed motors.

Hꢇꢁꢈ=ꢁ: No tripping (FL relay deactivated).

Hꢇꢁꢈ=ꢀ: With the power on, the phase failure detection is enabled only at the start of the first operation.

The inverter will trip if the Phase failure status persists for one second or more.

Hꢇꢁꢈ=ꢃ: The inverter checks for output phase failures each time it starts operation. The inverter will trip if

the Phase failure status persists for one second or more.

Hꢇꢁꢈ=ꢂ: The inverter checks for output phase failures during operation. The inverter will trip if the Phase

failure status persists for one second or more.

Hꢇꢁꢈ=ꢊ: The inverter checks for output phase failures at the start of and during operation. The inverter will

trip if the Phase failure status persists for one second or more.

Hꢇꢁꢈ=ꢈ: If it detects an all-phase failure, it will restart on completion of reconnection.

The inverter does not check for output phase failures when restarting after a momentary power

failure.

Note: A check for output phase failures is made during auto-tuning, regardless of the setting of this

parameter.

Title

Function

Adjustment range

0: Disabled

Default setting

1: At start-up (Only one time after

power is turned on)

Output phase failure detection mode

selection

2: At start-up (each time)

3: During operation

Hꢇꢁꢈ

4: At start-up + during operation

5: Detection of cutoff on output

side

F-58

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

6.17.6 Input phase failure detection

Hꢇꢁꢅ : Input phase failure detection mode selection

•

Function

This parameter detects inverter input Phase failure. If the abnormal voltage status of main circuit

capacitor persists for few minutes or more, the tripping function and the FL relay will be activated.

Therefore, input phase failures cannot always be detected. A trip information GRJK will be

displayed.

If the power capacity is larger than the inverter capacity (more than 200kVA or more than 10 times),

detection errors may occur. If this actually happens, install an input AC reactor.

Hꢇꢁꢅ=ꢁ: No tripping (Failure signal FL not activated)

Hꢇꢁꢅ=ꢀ: Phase failure detection is enabled during operation. The inverter will trip if the abnormal voltage

status of main circuit capacitor persists for ten minutes or more. (Failure signal FL activated)

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

Input phase failure detection mode

selection

Hꢇꢁꢅ

0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

Note: Setting Hꢇꢁꢅ to ꢁ (input phase failure detection: disabled) may result in a breakage of the

capacitor in the inverter main circuit if operation is continued under a heavy load in spite of the

occurrence of an input phase failure.

6.17.7 Control mode for small current

Hꢇꢁꢄ : Small current detection current hysteresis

Hꢇꢀꢁ : Small current trip/alarm selection

Hꢇꢀꢀ : Small current detection current

Hꢇꢀꢃ : Small current detection time

•

Function

The Hꢇꢀꢁ parameter allows the inverter to be tripped if a current smaller than the Hꢇꢀꢀ-

specified value flows for more than the Hꢇꢀꢃ-specified time. When tripping is selected, enter the

detection time to tripping. Trip information is displayed as "WE".

Hꢇꢀꢁ=ꢁ: No tripping (Failure signal FL not activated).

A small current alarm can be put out by setting the output terminal function selection parameter.

Hꢇꢀꢁ=ꢀ: The inverter will trip (Failure signal FL activated) if a current below the current set with Hꢇꢀꢀ

flows for the period of time specified with Hꢇꢀꢃ.

F-59

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

Title

Function

Adjustment range

1-20 (%)

Default setting

Small current detection current hysteresis

Hꢇꢁꢄ

0: Alarm only

1: Tripping

Small current trip/alarm selection

Hꢇꢀꢁ

Small current detection current

Small current detection time

0-100 (%) / (A)

0-255 [s]

Hꢇꢀꢀ

Hꢇꢀꢃ

＜Example of operation＞

Output terminal function: 24 (UC) Low current detection

Hꢇꢀꢁ = ꢁ (Alarm only)

OFF

Low current

signal output

OFF

Hꢇꢀꢃ or less

Output current (%)

Hꢇꢀꢃ

Hꢇꢀꢀ+Hꢇꢁꢄ

Hꢇꢀꢀ

Time [sec]

When setting Hꢇꢀꢁ to ꢀ (Trip), trip after low current detection time setting of Hꢇꢀꢃ. After tripping,

the low current signal remains ON.

6.17.8 Detection of output short-circuit

Hꢇꢀꢂ : Detection of output short-circuit during start-up

•

Function

This parameter detects inverter output short-circuit. It can be usually detected in the length of the

standard pulse. When operating low-impedance motor such as high-speed motor, however, the short-

time pulse should be selected.

Hꢇꢀꢂ=ꢁ: Detection is executed in the length of the standard pulse every time you start up the inverter.

Hꢇꢀꢂ=ꢀ: Detection is executed in the length of standard pulse only during the first start-up after putting on

the power or after resetting.

Hꢇꢀꢂ=ꢃ: Detection is executed with the short-time pulse every time you start up the inverter.

Hꢇꢀꢂ=ꢂ: Detection is executed with the short-time pulse only for the first time after putting power on or

after resetting.

F-60

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

0: Each time (standard pulse)

1: Only one time after power is

turned on (standard pulse)

2: Each time (short-time pulse)

3: Only one time after power is

turned on (short-time pulse)

Detection of output short-circuit during

start-up

Hꢇꢀꢂ

6.17.9 Over-torque trip

Hꢇꢀꢈ : Over-torque trip/alarm selection

Hꢇꢀꢇ : Over-torque detection level

Hꢇꢀꢅ : Over-torque detection time

Hꢇꢀꢄ : Over-torque detection level hysteresis

•

Function

Use the ꢇꢀꢈ parameter to trip the inverter or to output the alarm if a torque currrent exceeding the

Hꢇꢀꢇ-specified level flows for more than the Hꢇꢀꢅ-specified time. Trip information is displayed

as "QV".

Hꢇꢀꢈ=ꢁ: .......... No tripping (FL relay deactivated).

An over-torque alarm can be put out by setting the output terminal function selection

parameter.

Hꢇꢀꢈ=ꢀ: .......... The inverter is tripped (FL relay activated) only after a torque current exceeding the

Hꢇꢀꢇ-specified level has been detected for more than the Hꢇꢀꢅ-specified time.

Title

Function

Adjustment range

0: Alarm only

1: Tripping

Default setting

Over-torque trip/alarm selection

Hꢇꢀꢈ

Over-torque detection level

0-200 (%)

130

0.5

Hꢇꢀꢇ

Hꢇꢀꢅ

Hꢇꢀꢄ

Over-torque detection time

0.0-10.0 [s]

0-100 (%)

Over-torque detection level hysteresis

F-61

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

1) Output terminal function: 12 (OT) Over-torque detection

Hꢇꢀꢈ=ꢁ (Alarm only)

Over-torque

signal output

OFF

less than Hꢇꢀꢅ

Hꢇꢀꢅ

Hꢇꢀꢇ

Hꢇꢀꢇ－Hꢇꢀꢄ

Torque current (%)

Time [sec]

When Hꢇꢀꢈ = ꢀ (tripping), the inverter will trip if over-torque lasts for the period of time set with

Hꢇꢀꢅ. In such a case, the over-torque signal remains ON.

2) Output terminal function: 20 (POT) Over-torque detection pre-alarm

OFF

Over-torque pre-alarm

Signal output

Hꢇꢀꢇ × 0.7

Hꢇꢀꢇ × 0.7−Hꢇꢀꢄ

Torque current

(%)

Time [sec]

F-62

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

6.17.10 Cumulative operation time alarm setting

Hꢇꢃꢀ : Cumulative operation time alarm setting

•

Function

This parameter allows you to set the inverter so that it will put out an alarm signal after a lapse of the

cumulative operation time set with Hꢇꢃꢀ.

"0.1" displayed on the monitor refers to 10 hours, and therefore "1" denotes 100 hours.

Ex.: 38.5 displayed on the monitor = 3850 (hours)

Title

Hꢇꢃꢀ

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

610.0

Cumulative operation time

alarm setting

0.0-999.9

■

Setting of output signal l

Ex.: When assigning the cumulative operation alarm signal output function to the RY-RC terminals

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Setting value

Output terminal selection 1A

(RY-RC)

42 (negative

logic 43)

Hꢀꢂꢁ

0-255

6.17.11 Over-voltage stall protection level

Hꢇꢃꢇ : Over-voltage stall protection level

⇒ For more details, see section 6.12.4.

F-63

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

6.17.12 Undervoltage trip

Hꢇꢃꢆ : Undervoltage trip/alarm selection

•

Function

This parameter is used for selecting the control mode when an undervoltage is detected. Trip

information is displayed as "WRꢀ".

Hꢇꢃꢆ=ꢁ: The inverter is stopped. However, it is not tripped (Failure signal FL not activated).

The inverter is stopped when the voltage does not exceed 60 % or less of its rating.

Hꢇꢃꢆ=ꢀ: Inverter is stopped. It is also tripped (Failure signal FL activated), only after detection of a voltage

not exceeding 60% or less of its rating.

Hꢇꢃꢆ=ꢃ: Inverter is stopped. However, it is not tripped (Failure signal FL not activated). The inverter stop

(Failure signal FL not activated.), only after detection of a voltage not exceeding 50% of its rating.

Be sure to connect the input reactor.

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

0: Alarm only (detection level below 60%)

1: Tripping (detection level below 60%)

2: Alarm only (detection level below 50%,

input reactor needed)

Undervoltage trip/alarm

selection

Hꢇꢃꢆ

F-64

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

6.17.13 Trip at VIA low level input mode

Hꢇꢂꢂ : Trip at VIA low level input mode

•

Function

The inverter will trip if the VIA value remains below the specified value for about 0.3 seconds. In such

a case, "Gꢌꢀꢅ" is displayed.

Hꢇꢂꢂ=0: Disabled........ The detection function is disabled.

Hꢇꢂꢂ=1-100 ................ The inverter will trip if the VIA value remains below the specified value for about

0.3 seconds.

Title

Function

Adjustment range

0: Disabled

1-100%

Default setting

Trip at VIA low level input mode

Hꢇꢂꢂ

Note : The VIA input value may be judged earlier to be abnormal, depending on the degree of deviation of

the analog data detected.

6.17.14 Parts replacement alarms

Hꢇꢂꢊ : Annual average ambient temperature (For parts replacement alarms)

•

Function

You can set the inverter so that it will calculate the remaining useful lives of the cooling fan, main

circuit capacitor and on-board capacitor from the ON time of the inverter, the operating time of the

motor, the output current (load factor) and the setting of Hꢇꢂꢊ, and that it will display and send out

an alarm through output terminals when each component is approaching the time of replacement.

Title

Function

Adjustment range

1: -10 to +10°C

2: 11 to 20°C

3: 21 to 30°C

4: 31 to 40°C

5: 41 to 50°C

6: 51 to 60°C

Default setting

Annual average ambient temperature

(For parts replacement alarms)

Hꢇꢂꢊ

Display of part replacement alarm information

Part replacement alarm information (⇒ See page H-3) in the Status monitor mode allows you to check

on the time of replacement.

An example of display: O___ꢀ

Output of part replacement alarm signal

Assign the part replacement alarm function (function No. 44 or 45. ⇒ See page K-18) to an output terminal.

An example of setting: To assign the function to the RY-RC terminal

Hꢀꢂꢁ=ꢊꢊ

Note 1: Using Hꢇꢂꢊ enter the annual average temperature around the inverter. Be careful not to enter the

annual highest temperatureꢍ

Note 2: Set Hꢇꢂꢊ at the time of installation of the inverter, and do not change its setting after the start of

use. Changing the setting may cause parts replacement alarm calculation error.

F-65

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

6.17.15 Motor PTC thermal protection

Hꢇꢊꢈ : PTC thermal selection

Hꢇꢊꢇ : Resistor value for PTC detection

•

Function

This function is used to protect motor from overheating using the signal of PTC built-in motor.

The trip display is “0Hz”.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

0: Disabled

Default setting

PTC thermal selection

1: Enabled (trip mode)

Hꢇꢊꢈ

Hꢇꢊꢇ

2: Enabled (alarm mode)

PTC detection resistor value

0 - 9999

3000

[Connection]

P10V

Connect the resistor rated 1/4 watts 3.3k

ohm between terminal PP and VIB.

Outer

resistor

VIB

AI [Voltage]

PTC

F-66

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

6.17.16 Evasion from Overvoltage and Imput phase failure

Hꢊꢅꢀ : Power supply compensation filter

Hꢊꢅꢃ : Inhibitor filter

Hꢊꢅꢂ : Inhibitor gain

•

Function

When connecting input reactor or voltage regulator or the impedance of power supply is too big, the

following phenomenon are happened.

•Overvoltage trip (QRꢀ, QRꢃ, QRꢂ)

•Input phase failure (GRJꢀ)

•Unusual noise of inverter

If these phenomenon is occurred, the following parameter should be adjusted.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

0-9999 (µs)

Default setting

Power supply compensation filter

Inhibitor filter

Hꢊꢅꢀ

Hꢊꢅꢃ

Hꢊꢅꢂ

0-9999 (µs)

442

Inhibitor gain

0.0– 300.0 (%)

100.0

At first, please set Hꢊꢅꢀ as 442 and over. Next, set Hꢊꢅꢃ and Hꢊꢅꢂ as bigger value when no effect by

setting Hꢊꢅꢀ as 1000 and over.

F-67

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

6.18 Forced fire-speed control function

Hꢇꢈꢁ : Forced fire-speed control function

Hꢃꢄꢊ : Forced fire-speed setting frequency

•

Function

Forced fire-speed control is used when operating the motor at the specified frequency in case of an

emergency. Two kind of operation are selectable by assignment of terminal board function.

(1)Input terminal function 52 (FORCE) : Input signal is kept to hold once signal is ON.

Motor runs at the speed set by the parameter “Hꢃꢄꢊ”.

Motor does not stop in the event of the occurrence of a soft fault.

(2)Input terminal function 53 (FIRE) : Input signal is kept to hold once signal is ON.

Motor runs at the speed set by the parameter “Hꢃꢄꢊ”.

Note: Both cases need to power off in order to stop.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

0: Disabled

Default setting

Forced fire-speed control selection

Forced fire-speed setting frequency

Hꢇꢈꢁ

Hꢃꢄꢊ

1: Enabled

50.0

NNꢌꢉWN

When setting the parameter “Hꢇꢈꢁ”, “HKTG” is displayed by pressing ^ENTkey. It can be set by

ENT

continuing the

key for 2 seconds.

[Setting the forced operation input terminal (RES-CC)]

The control terminal “RES” (The default setting is “4” (reset function)) shall be assigned to “2” (Forced

operation function ).

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Setting value

Input terminal selection 3 (RES)

0 - 71

( Forced

Hꢀꢀꢂ

operation 2 )

F-68

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

6.19 Adjustment parameters

6.19.1 Calibration of analog outputs

Hꢇꢄꢀ : Inclination characteristic of analog output

Hꢇꢄꢃ : Bias of analog output

•

Function

Output signals from FM terminals are analog voltage signals. Their standard setting range is from 0

to 7.5Vdc.

Using the FM (SW2) slide switch in the inverter, you can switch to 0-20mA output. Also, using these

parameters, you can calibrate the output to 4-20mAdc or 20-4mAdc.

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

Inclination characteristic of

analog output

0: Negative inclination (downward slope)

1: Positive inclination (upward slope)

Hꢇꢄꢀ

Hꢇꢄꢃ

0-100 (%)

Bias of analog output

Note: To switch to 0-20mAdc (4-20mAdc), turn the FM (SW2) slide switch to the I position.

■ Example of setting

Hꢇꢄꢀ=1, Hꢇꢄꢃ=0

Hꢇꢄꢀ=1, Hꢇꢄꢃ=20

Hꢇꢄꢀ=0, Hꢇꢄꢃ=100

The analog output inclination can be adjusted using the parameter HO.

F-69

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

6.20 Operation panel parameter

6.20.1 Prohibition of key operations and parameter settings

Hꢆꢁꢁ : Prohibition of parameter change

Hꢆꢂꢁ : Prohibition of frequency setting on the operation panel (FC)

Hꢆꢂꢃ : Prohibition of panel local/remote operation (LOC/REM key)

Hꢆꢂꢂ : Prohibition of panel operation (RUN/STOP keys)

Hꢆꢂꢊ : Prohibition of panel emergency stop operation

Hꢆꢂꢈ : Prohibition of panel reset operation

•

Function

These parameters allow you to prohibit the operation of the RUN and STOP keys on the operation

panel and the change of parameters. Using these parameters, you can also prohibit various key

operations.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

Hꢆꢁꢁ

Hꢆꢂꢁ

Prohibition of parameter change

0: Permitted, 1: Prohibited

Prohibition of frequency setting on the

operation panel (FC)

0: Permitted, 1: Prohibited

Prohibition of panel local/remote

operation (LOC/REM key)

Prohibition of panel operation

(RUN/STOP keys)

Hꢆꢂꢃ

Hꢆꢂꢂ

Prohibition of panel emergency stop

operation

Hꢆꢂꢊ

Hꢆꢂꢈ

0: Permitted, 1: Prohibited

Prohibition of panel reset operation

■ Resetting method

Only the Hꢆꢁꢁ parameter is designed so that its setting can be modified even if 1 (prohibited) is selected.

F-70

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

6.20.2 Changing the unit to A / V

Hꢆꢁꢀ :Current / voltage unit

•

Function

These parameters are used to change the unit of monitor display.

% ⇔ A (ampere) / V (volt)

■ Example of setting

During the operation of the VFFS1-2037PM (rated current: 17.5A) at the rated load (100% load), units are

displayed as follows:

1) Display in percentage terms

%^{Output current:}

2) Display in amperes/volts

Output current:

Eꢀꢁꢁ ꢎ

Eꢀꢆ.ꢈ

　　100%

17.5A

DC voltage:

200V (value

converted into

%^{DC voltage:}

[ꢀꢁꢁ ꢎ

[ꢃꢁꢁ

　　100%

AC)

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

Current/voltage

display mode

0: %

1: A (ampere)/V (volt)

Hꢆꢁꢀ

The Hꢆꢁꢀ converts the following parameter settings:

• A display Current monitor display

Motor electronic-thermal protection level 1 and 2

VJT, Hꢀꢆꢂ

Hꢃꢈꢀ

DC braking current

Stall prevention level 1 and 2

Small current detection current

Step-out detection current level

(for PM motors)

Hꢇꢁꢀ, Hꢀꢅꢈ

Hꢇꢀꢀ

Hꢄꢀꢁ

•

V display Voltage monitor display

Note: Base frequency voltage 1 and 2 I(XNX, Hꢀꢆꢀ)s always displayed in the unit of V.

F-71

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

6.20.3 Displaying the rotational speed of the motor or the line

speed

Hꢆꢁꢃ : Frequency free unit magnification

Hꢆꢁꢈ : Inclination characteristic of free unit display

Hꢆꢁꢇ : Bias of free unit display

•

Function

The frequency or any other item displayed on the monitor can be converted freely into the rotational

speed of the motor, the operating speed of the load, and so on.

The value obtained by multiplying the displayed frequency by the Hꢆꢁꢃ-set value will be displayed as

follows:

Value displayed = Monitor-displayed or parameter-set frequency

Hꢆꢁꢃ

1) Displaying the motor speed

To switch the display mode from 60Hz (default setting) to 1800min^-1(the rotating speed of the 4P motor)

ꢀꢅꢁꢁ

H z

ꢇꢁꢍꢁ ꢍ

Hꢆꢁꢃ＝ꢁ．ꢁꢁ

Hꢆꢁꢃ＝ꢂꢁꢍꢁꢁ

ꢇꢁ×ꢂꢁ.ꢁꢁ=ꢀꢅꢁꢁ

Displaying the speed of the loading unit

To switch the display mode from 60Hz (default setting) to 6m/min^-1(the speed of the conveyer)

ꢇꢍꢁ

H z

ꢇꢁꢍꢁ ꢍ

Hꢆꢁꢃ＝ꢁ．ꢁꢁ

Hꢆꢁꢃ＝ꢁ.ꢀꢁ

ꢇꢁ×ꢁ.ꢀꢁ=ꢇ.ꢁ

Note: This parameter displays the inverter output frequency as the value obtained by multiplying it by a

positive number. This does not mean that the actual motor speed or line speed are indicated

with accuracy.

F-72

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

0.00: Free unit display disabled (display of

frequency)

0.01-200.0

Frequency free unit

magnification

Hꢆꢁꢃ

0.00

Inclination

characteristic of free

unit display

0: Negative inclination (downward slope)

1: Positive inclination (upward slope)

Hꢆꢁꢈ

Hꢆꢁꢇ

Bias of free unit

display

0.00-HJ

0.00

The Hꢆꢁꢃ to Hꢆꢁꢇ converts the following parameter settings:

•

Free unit Frequency monitor display

Frequency-related parameters

Operation frequency command, Operation

frequency, PID feedback, Frequency command

value (PID-computed), Operation frequency

command at trip

HJ, WN, NN, UTꢀ - UTꢆ,

Hꢀꢁꢁ, Hꢀꢁꢀ, Hꢀꢁꢃ, Hꢀꢇꢆ,

Hꢃꢁꢃ, Hꢃꢁꢊ, Hꢃꢀꢀ, Hꢃꢀꢂ,

Hꢃꢊꢁ, Hꢃꢊꢀ, Hꢃꢊꢃ, Hꢃꢈꢁ,

Hꢃꢇꢈ, Hꢃꢇꢆ, Hꢃꢇꢅ, Hꢃꢆꢁ-Hꢃꢆꢈ,

Hꢃꢄꢊ, Hꢈꢁꢈ, Hꢅꢀꢃ, Hꢅꢀꢊ

■ An example of setting when HJ is 80 and Hꢆꢁꢃ is 10.00

Hꢆꢁꢈ=1, Hꢆꢁꢇ=0.00

Hꢆꢁꢈ=1, Hꢆꢁꢇ=20.00

Hꢆꢁꢈ=0, Hꢆꢁꢇ=80.00

F-73

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

6.20.4 Changing the steps in which the value displayed changes

Hꢆꢁꢆ : Free step 1 (pressing a panel key once)

Hꢆꢁꢅ : Free step 2 (panel display)

•

Function

These parameters are used to specify steps in which the command value or standard monitor output

frequency displayed on the panel changes each time you press the

on the operation panel.

key to set a frequency

Note 1: The settings of these parameters have no effect when the free unit selection (Hꢆꢁꢃ) is enabled.

Note 2: If you press the key on the panel repeatedly to increase the frequency while Hꢆꢁꢆ is set to

any value other than 0, the “HI” alarm will appear immediately before the frequency exceeds the HJ

(maximum frequency) and the frequency will stop increasing. Similarly, if you press the key on

the panel repeatedly to decrease the frequency, the “LO” alarm will appear immediately before the

frequency decreases below the NN (lower-limit frequency) and the frequency will stop decreasing.

■ When Hꢆꢁꢆ is not 0.00, and Hꢆꢁꢅ is not 0 (disabled)

Under normal conditions, the frequency command value from the operation panel increases in steps of 0.1

Hz each time you press the

the value with Hꢆꢁꢆ each time you press the

Hꢆꢁꢆ each time you press the key.

key. If Hꢆꢁꢆ is not 0.00, the frequency command value will increase by

key. Similarly, it will decrease by the value set with

In this case, the output frequency displayed in standard monitor mode changes in steps of 0.1 Hz, as usual.

■ When Hꢆꢁꢆ is not 0.00, and Hꢆꢁꢅ is not 0 (disabled)

The value displayed on the panel also can also be changed in steps.

Hꢆꢁꢅ

Output frequency displayed in standard monitor mode

Internal output frequency

Hꢆꢁꢆ

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

Free step 1 (pressing a panel key

once)

0.00: Disabled

0.01-HJ (Hz)

0: Disabled

1-255

Hꢆꢁꢆ

0.00

Hꢆꢁꢅ

Free step 2 (panel display)

■ Example of setting 1

When Hꢆꢁꢆ=10.00 (Hz):

The frequency (HE) set on the operation panel changes in steps of 10.0 Hz: 0.0 → 10.0 → 20.0 → ... 60.0

(Hz), each time you press the key. This function comes in very handy when operating the load at limited

frequencies that change in steps of 1Hz, 5Hz, 10Hz, and so on.

F-74

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

■ Example of setting 2

When Hꢆꢁꢆ=1.00 (Hz), and Hꢆꢁꢅ=1:

Each time you press the

key, the frequency setting HE changes in steps of 1Hz: 0→ 1 → 2 → ... → 60

(Hz) and also the value displayed on the operation panel changes in steps of 1. Use these settings to hide

decimal fractions and also the value displayed on the operation panel changes in steps of 1. Use these

settings to hide decimal fractions.

6.20.5 Changing the item displayed by default

Hꢆꢀꢁ : Standard monitor display selection

•

Function

This parameter specifies display format while power is on.

■ Changing the display format while power is on

When the power is on, the standard monitor mode displays the operation frequency (default setting) in the

format of "ꢁꢍꢁ" or "QHH". This format can be changed to any other monitor display format by setting

Hꢆꢀꢁ. This new format, however, will not display an assigned prefix such as V or E.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

0: Operation frequency (Hz/free unit/step)

1: Frequency command (Hz/free unit/step)

2: Output current (%/A)

3: Inverter rated current (A)

4: Inverter load factor (%)

5: Output power (kW)

6: Frequency command after PID control

(Hz/free unit/step)

Standard monitor display

selection

Hꢆꢀꢁ

7: Optional item specified from an external

control unit

8: Output speed

9: Communication counter

10: Normal state communication counter

For more information on the Hꢆꢀꢁ option “ꢆ,” refer to “Communications Function Instruction

Manual.”

F-75

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

6.20.6 Selection of operation panel stop pattern

Hꢆꢃꢀ : Selection of operation panel stop pattern

•

Function

RUN

This parameter are used to select a mode in which the motor started by pressing the

key on the

STOP

operation panel is stopped when the

key is pressed.

Slowdown stop

The motor slows down to a stop in the deceleration time set with FGE (or Hꢈꢁꢀ).

Coast stop

The inverter cuts off power supply to the motor. The motor comes to a stop after coasting for a while by

inertia. Depending on the load, the motor may keep running for a good long time.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

Selection of operation panel stop 0: Slowdown stop

pattern 1: Coast stop

Hꢆꢃꢀ

6.20.7 Display of the head of the parameters

Hꢆꢂꢅ : Head of the parameter display selection

•

Function

The parameter can be set at the front of the setting monitor mode.

If selecting “1:CWJ”, the Wizard parameter “CWH” is not displayed.

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

Head of parameter display

selection

0: AUF

1: AUH

Hꢆꢂꢅ

6.20.8 Integral output power

Hꢆꢊꢅ : Integral output power retention selection

Hꢆꢊꢄ : Integral output power display unit selection

•

Function

At the main power off ,it is selectable whether retention of integral output power values or not.

And also, the display unit is selectable.

F-76

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

[Parameter setting]

Title

Function

Adjustment range

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

Default setting

Integral output power retention

selection

Hꢆꢊꢅ

0: 1 = 1 kWh

Accoding to model

(⇒ See page K-14)

Display unit selection for integral

output power

1: 0.1 = 1 kWh

2: 0.01 = 1 kWh

3: 0.001 = 1 kWh

Hꢆꢊꢄ

F-77

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

6.21 Communication function (Common serial)

6.21.1 Setting of common function

Hꢅꢁꢁ : Communication rate

Hꢅꢈꢀ : Operation at communication

error by disconnection

Hꢅꢁꢀ : Parity

Hꢅꢈꢇ : Number of motor poles for

communication

Hꢅꢁꢃ : Inverter number

Hꢅꢆꢁ : Block write data 1

Hꢅꢆꢀ : Block write data 2

Hꢅꢆꢈ : Block read data 1

Hꢅꢆꢇ : Block read data 2

Hꢅꢁꢂ : Communication error trip time

Hꢅꢁꢈ : Communication waiting time

Hꢅꢁꢇ : Setting of master and slave for

communication between inverters

Hꢅꢀꢀ : Communication commmand point Hꢅꢆꢆ : Block read data 3

1 setting

Hꢅꢀꢃ : Communication commmand point Hꢅꢆꢅ : Block read data 4

1 frequency

Hꢅꢀꢂ : Communication commmand point Hꢅꢆꢄ : Block read data 5

2 setting

Hꢅꢀꢊ : Communication commmand point Hꢅꢅꢁ : Free notes

2 frequency

Hꢅꢃꢄ : Selection of communication

protocol

•

Function

Function The VF-FS1 Series allows a data communication network to be constructed for exchanging

data between a host computer or controller (referred to collectively as the computer) and the inverter by

connecting an internal RS485 communication function or optional USB communication conversion unit.

<Computer-linking functions>

The following functions are enabled by data communication between the computer and inverter

(1) Monitoring inverter status (such as the output frequency, current, and voltage)

(2) Sending RUN, STOP and other control commands to the inverter

(3) Reading, editing and writing inverter parameter settings

Data can be exchanged between one computer and one inverter.

Data can be exchanged between the computer and each of the inverters connected.

F-78

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

+ The following are available as common serial optional units:

•

USB communication conversion unit (Model: USB001Z)

Communication cable (Model: CAB0011 (1m), CAB0013 (3m), CAB0015 (5m))

Internal LonWorks^®communication circuit board (Model: ILU007Z)

Internal BACnet^®communication circuit board (Model: BCN002Z)

Internal Metasys^®N2 communication circuit board (Model: MTS002Z)

Internal Siemens APOGEE^TMFLN communication circuit board (Model: APG002Z)

•

These internal products require no interconnect cables, because of built-in type.

■ Communication function parameters (Common serial options)

The data transfer speed, parity type, inverter number, and communication error trip time can be set/edited by

operation panel operation or communication function.

Title

Function

Adjustment range

0: 9600bps

1: 19200bps

Default setting

Hꢅꢁꢁ

Communication rate

0: NON (No parity)

1: EVEN (Even parity)

2: ODD (Odd parity)

Hꢅꢁꢀ

Parity

Hꢅꢁꢃ

Hꢅꢁꢂ

Inverter number

0-247

0: Disabled (*)

1-100 (s)

Communication error trip time

0.00: Regular communication

0.01-2.00 (s)

Hꢅꢁꢈ

Hꢅꢁꢇ

Communication waiting time

0.00

0: Slave (0 Hz command issued in

case the master inverter fails)

1: Slave (Operation continued in

case the master inverter fails)

2: Slave (Emergency stop tripping

in case the master inverter fails)

3: Master (transmission of

frequency commands)

Setting of master and slave

for communication between

inverters

4: Master (transmission of output

frequency signals)

Communication command point 1

setting

Communication command point 1

frequency

Communication command point 2

setting

Communication command point 2

frequency

Hꢅꢀꢀ

Hꢅꢀꢃ

Hꢅꢀꢂ

Hꢅꢀꢊ

0-100 (%)

0-200.0 (Hz)

0-100 (%)

0.0

100

50.0 (WP type)

60.0 (WN type)

0.0-200.0 (Hz)

0: Toshiba inverter protocol

1: ModbusRTU protocol

2: Metasys N2 protocol

3: APOGEE FLN protocol

4: BAC-net protocol

Selection of communication

protocol

Hꢅꢃꢄ

F-79

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

Title

Function

Adjustment range

Default setting

0:Inverter stop, communication

command, frequency mode open

(by EOQF, HOQF)

Operation at communication error

by disconnection

1:None (continued operation)

2:Deceleration stop

Hꢅꢈꢀ

3:Coast stop

4:Communication error (GTTꢈ

trip) or Network error (GTTꢅ trip)

1: 2 poles

2: 4 poles

3: 6 poles

Number of motor poles for

communication

4: 8 poles

5: 10 poles

Hꢅꢈꢇ

6: 12 poles

7: 14 poles

8: 16 poles

0: No selection

1: Command 1

2: Command 2

Hꢅꢆꢁ

Hꢅꢆꢀ

Block write data 1

Block write data 2

3: Frequency command

4: Output data on the terminal

board

5: Analog output for

communications

6: Motor speed command

0: No selection

Hꢅꢆꢈ

Hꢅꢆꢇ

Hꢅꢆꢆ

Hꢅꢆꢅ

Block read data 1

Block read data 2

Block read data 3

Block read data 4

1: Status information

2: Output frequency

3: Output current

4: Output voltage

5: Alarm information

6: PID feedback value

7: Input terminal board monitor

8: Output terminal board monitor

9: VIA terminal board monitor

10: VIB terminal board monitor

11: Output motor speed monitor

Hꢅꢆꢄ

Hꢅꢅꢁ

Block read data 5

Free notes

0-65535

Disabled............Indicates that the inverter will not be tripped even if a communication error occurs.

Trip .................. The inverter trips when a communication time-over occurs.

In this case a trip information GTTꢈ flashes on and off on the operation panel.

F-80

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

6.21.2 Using the RS485

■ Setting the communication functions

Setting commands and frequencies by communications has priority over sending commands from the

operation panel or the terminal board. Command/frequency setting by communications can therefore be

enabled, irrespective of the setting in the command mode (EOQF) or the frequency setting mode (HOQF).

When inverters are connected to each others, however, in order for slave inverters to recognize frequency

signals from the master inverter as frequency commands, the frequency setting mode selection 1 parameter

(HOQF) provided for each slave inverter needs to be set to 4 (serial communications). Refer to the

COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT USER'S MANUAL for details.

However, when the input terminal function selection parameter is set to 48: SC/LC (Serial/Local selection),

the inverter can be operated with the settings of the command mode (EOQF) or the frequency setting mode

(HOQF) by external input.

■ Transmission specifications

Item

Specifications

Transmission scheme

Connection scheme

Synchronization scheme

Transmission rate

2-wire, Half-duplex

Centralized control

Asynchronous

Default: 19200 baud (parameter setting)

Option: Either 9600 or 19200 baud

ASCII code: JIS X 0201 8, 8-bit (fixed)

Binary code: Binary, 8-bit (fixed)

Character transmission

Stop bit length

Error detection

Inverter receiving: 1 bit, Inverter sending: 2 bits

Parity: Even, Odd, or None selectable by parameter setting;

check sum method

Character transmission format

Order of bit transmission

Frame length

Receiving: 11-bit, Sending: 12-bit

Least significant bit first

Variable to a maximum of 17 bytes

■ Example of connection for RS485-communication

Host computer

Option

VF-FS1

F-81

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

Perform computer-inverter connection as follows to send operation frequency commands from the host

computer to inverter No. 3:

: Wiring

:Data (host ? INV)

:Response data (INV R host)

Host computer

FS1 No.00

FS1 No.01

FS1 No.02

FS1 No.03

FS1 No.29

FS1 No.30

"Given away": Only the inverter with the selected inverter number conducts data processing. All other

inverters, even if they have received the data, give it away and stand by to receive the

next data.

: Use the terminal board to branch the cable.

(1) Data is sent from the host computer.

(2) Data from the computer is received at each inverter and the inverter numbers are checked.

(3) The command is decoded and processed only by the inverter with the selected inverter number.

(4) The selected inverter responds by sending the processing results, together with its own inverter

number, to the host computer.

(5) As a result, only the selected inverter starts operating in accordance with the operation frequency

command by communicating independently.

For details of the communication function, refer to the separate instruction manual, “VF-FS1 Serial

Communication Function”.

Note :

Limit the distance between the common serial optional units and the inverter to 5m.

F-82

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

6.22 Parameters for options

Hꢅꢄꢈ : Parameter for option 6

Hꢅꢄꢇ : Parameter for option 7

Hꢅꢄꢆ : Parameter for option 8

Hꢅꢄꢅ : Parameter for option 9

Hꢅꢄꢄ : Parameter for option 10

Hꢅꢄꢁ : Parameter for option 1

Hꢅꢄꢀ : Parameter for option 2

Hꢅꢄꢃ : Parameter for option 3

Hꢅꢄꢂ : Parameter for option 4

Hꢅꢄꢊ : Parameter for option 5

These parameters can be used only when specific optional parts are installed. Do not use these parameters

unless such parts are installed.

6.23 Permanent magnetic motors

Hꢄꢀꢁ : Step-out detection current level

Hꢄꢀꢀ : Step-out detection time

Hꢄꢀꢃ : High-speed torque adjustment coefficient

•

Function

If the permanent magnet motor (PM motor) steps out and if the exciting current increases (it increases

in such a case) and remains above the value set with Hꢄꢀꢁ for the period of time set with Hꢄꢀꢀ,

the inverter will judge the motor to be stepping out and trip it. At that time, the trip message

"UQWV" is displayed.

Title

Function

Adjustment range

10 ~ 150 (%) / (A)

Default setting

100

Hꢄꢀꢁ

Hꢄꢀꢀ

Hꢄꢀꢃ

Step-out detection current level

0.0: No detection

0.1 ~ 25.0 [s]

Step-out detection time

0.0

High-speed torque adjustment coefficient

0.00 ~ 650.0

0.00

Note 1: When using an PM motor, consult your Toshiba dealer, since the inverter is not compatible with all

types of PM motors.

Note 2: The inverter may fail to detect step-out in some cases, because it uses an electrical method to detect

step-out. To avoid detection failures, you are recommended to install a mechanical step-out detector.

Note 3: There is no need adjust Hꢄꢀꢃ under normal conditions. (Do not change the setting, unless

otherwise instructed by Toshiba technical staff.)

F-83

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

7. Applied operation

Applied operation can be performed by selecting the frequency mode and command mode setting. However in

LOC

REM

case the LOCAL mode is selected by

key (lighting a LOC/REM lamp), frequency setting mode and

command mode are fixed operation panel key setting mode. The following explanations are applied REMOTE

mode only.

7.1

Setting the operation frequency

Applied operation can be performed by selecting the inverter frequency setting. To make settings for applied

operation, use the basic parameter HOQF (selection of frequency setting mode 1), and the extended

parameters Hꢀꢁꢁ (frequency priority selection) and Hꢀꢁꢂ (selection of frequency setting mode 2).

(1) Operation panel key setting

(2) External potentiometer setting

VIA

RES

SW3

PLC

VIA

VIB

VIA

VIB

RUN

STOP

RUN

STOP

HOQF:ꢃ

HOQF:ꢄ

Hꢀꢁꢁ:ꢁ

Use the parameters Hꢀꢁꢄ to Hꢀꢁꢅ for this

setting.

Enter the number with the operation panel

ENT

keys, then press the

(Save the setting)

key to conform.

G-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

(3) Input voltage setting 1 (0 to 10 Vdc)

(4) Input voltage setting 2 (0 to 10 Vdc)

VIA

RES

SW3

PLC

VIA

VIB

PLC

VIA

VIB

Voltage signal

RUN

STOP

RUN

STOP

HOQF: ꢄ

HOQF: ꢀ

Hꢀꢁꢁ: ꢁ

Use the parameters Hꢀꢁꢄto Hꢀꢁꢅ for this

Use the parameters Hꢀꢄꢁto Hꢀꢄꢃ for this

setting.

(5) Input current setting (4 to 20 mAdc)

(6) External contact UP/DOWN

VIA

RES

R (UP)

RES (DOWN)

SW3

PLC

VIA (CLR)

VIB

VIA

Current

VIB

signal

RUN

STOP

RUN

STOP

P24

HOQF: ꢄ

Hꢀꢁꢁ: ꢁ

Use parameters Hꢀꢁꢄ to Hꢀꢁꢅ for this

setting.

(Hꢀꢁꢄ: 20%)

HOQF: ꢆ, Hꢀꢁꢁ: ꢁ

Use the parameters Hꢀꢇꢅ to Hꢀꢇꢈ for this setting.

To change the frequency when power is off, set

Hꢀꢇꢉ: ꢄ (Rewriting of Hꢀꢇꢈ when power is turned

off.)

Hꢄꢄꢀ: ꢅꢄ (Allocation of UP)

Hꢄꢄꢃ: ꢅꢀ (Allocation of DOWN)

Hꢄꢄꢈ: ꢅꢃ (Allocation of CLR)

Hꢄꢁꢉ: ꢄ (VIA-contact input (Sink))

G-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

VIA

(7) Preset-speed

(8) Voltage/current switching 1

R (SS1)

RES (SS2)

RES (FCHG)

SW3

PLC

VIA (SS3)

VIB

PLC

VIA

VIB

Current signal

Voltage signal

RUN

STOP

RUN

STOP

P24

EOQF: ꢁ (Terminal board)

UTꢄ to UTꢂ: 1-7-speed run

To select 7-speed run, use the terminals R, RES

and VIA.

Hꢀꢁꢁ: ꢁ (Forced switching of FCHG)

Hꢄꢄꢃ: ꢃꢈ (Allocation of FCHG)

HOQF: ꢄ

Hꢀꢁꢂ: ꢀ

Hꢄꢄꢀ: ꢇ (Allocation of SS1)

Hꢄꢄꢃ: ꢂ (Allocation of SS2)

Hꢄꢄꢈ: ꢈ (Allocation of SS3)

Hꢄꢁꢉ: ꢄ (VIA-contact input (Sink))

G-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

(9) Voltage/current switching 2

(10) Switching between analog setting and preset

speed setting

VIA

RES

R (SS1)

RES (SS2)

SW3

PLC

Voltage/current

signal

Current signal

VIA

VIB

VIA

VIB

Voltage signal

Voltage

signal

RUN

STOP

RUN

STOP

Hꢀꢁꢁ: ꢄ (Automatic switching)

HOQF: ꢄ

Hꢀꢁꢂ: ꢀ

HOQF: ꢄ (VIA) or ꢀ (VIB)

EOQF: ꢁ (Terminal board)

Hꢀꢁꢁ: ꢁ

To switch to preset-speed setting, use the

external terminals R and RES

Hꢄꢄꢀ: ꢇ (Allocation of SS1)

Hꢄꢄꢃ: ꢂ (Allocation of SS2)

(11) Switching between analog setting and terminal

setting from the operation panel

(12) Setting by means of a remote input device

RES

RES (FCHG)

PLC

VIA

VIB

Voltage/current

signal

VIA

VIB

RUN

STOP

RUN

STOP

Voltage

signal

Connector for communication

HOQF: ꢅ (Serial communication)

HOQF: ꢃ (Operation panel)

Hꢄꢄꢃ: ꢃꢈ (Allocation of FCHG)

To switch to Hꢀꢁꢂ setting, enter the

command through FCHG.

Hꢀꢁꢁ: ꢁ Hꢀꢁꢂ: ꢄ(VIA) or ꢀ (VIB).

G-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

(13)Switching between communication and terminal

control

Communication command fa00h 14bit: 1

HOQF: ꢄor ꢀ

Hꢄꢄꢃ: ꢅꢈ (Allocation of SL/LC)

Switched to terminal when a command is

entered through SC and LC during operation by

means of communication

RES (SC/LC)

PLC

VIA

VIB

RUN

STOP

Connector for commucation

7.2

Setting the operation mode

Applied operation can be performed by selecting the operation mode. To set the operation mode, use the basic

parameter EOQF (command mode selection) and the input terminal selection parameter.

(1) Operation panel operation

(2) Terminal board operation

RES

PLC

VIA

VIB

VIA

VIB

RUN

STOP

RUN

STOP

EOQF: ꢄ (Operation panel)

EOQF: ꢁ (Terminal board)

G-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

(3) Operation from an external input device

(4) Switching from communication to the terminal

board

RES

RES (SC/LC)

PLC

VIA

VIB

VIA

VIB

RUN

STOP

RUN

STOP

Connector for communication

EOQF: ꢀ (Serial communication)

EOQF: ꢁ (Terminal board)

Hꢄꢄꢃ: ꢅꢈ (Allocation of SC/LC)

Remote control can be switched forcefully

to terminal control from the external SC/LC by

setting the remote command fa00h 15-bit at 1.

Operation is controlled from the terminal board.

G-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

8. Monitoring the operation status

Refer to section 4.1 about flow of monitor.

8.1

Status monitor mode

8.1.1 Status monitor under normal conditions

In this mode, you can monitor the operation status of the inverter.

To display the operation status during normal operation:

Press the

MODE

key twice.

Setting procedure (eg. operation at 60Hz)

Key

operated

LED

display

Communic

ation No.

Item displayed

Description

The operation frequency is displayed (Operation at

60Hz). (When standard monitor display selection

Hꢃꢄꢁ is set at 0 [operation frequency])

The first basic parameter “CWH” (Wizard function)

is displayed.

ꢀꢁꢂꢁ

Parameter setting

mode

MODE

CWH

The direction of rotation is displayed.

(HTꢅH: forward run, HTꢅT: reverse run)

Direction of

rotation

HTꢅH

FE01

FE02

Operation

frequency

command

The operation frequency command value (Hz/free

unit) is displayed.

Note 1

Hꢀꢁꢂꢁ

The inverter output current (load current) (%/A) is

displayed.

Note 2

Note 3

Load current

Input voltage

Output voltage

Torque

Eꢆꢇꢁ

[ꢄꢁꢁ

Rꢄꢁꢁ

SꢆꢀQ

Yꢆꢈꢁ

Nꢆꢃꢁ

Mꢆꢇꢁ

Jꢆꢃꢉ

Zꢀꢁꢂꢁ

FE03

FE04

FE05

FE18

FE20

FE27

FE29

FE30

FD00

The inverter input (DC) voltage (%/V) is displayed.

The inverter output voltage (%/V) is displayed.

The torque (%) is displayed.

Torque current

Inverter load factor

Input power

The torque current (%/A) is displayed.

The inverter load factor (%) is displayed.

The inverter input power (kW) is displayed.

The inverter output power (kW) is displayed.

Output power

Operation

frequency

The operation frequency (Hz/free unit) is

displayed.

(Continued overleaf)

H-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

(Continued)

Item displayed

Key

operated

LED

display

Communic

ation No.

Description

The ON/OFF status of each of the control signal

input terminals (F, R, RES and VIA) is displayed in

bits.

ON: ꢄ

OFF: _

_ꢆꢆꢆꢆ_KK

Note 4

_ꢆꢆꢆꢆ_KK

Input terminal

FE06

VIA

RES

The ON/OFF status of each of the control signal

output terminals (RY and FL) is displayed in bits.

ON: ꢄ

Output terminal

ꢁꢆ_ꢆK

FE07

OFF: _

ꢁ

_ꢆK

RY-RC

CPU1 version

CPU2 version

Memory version

PID feedback

Xꢄꢁꢄ

XYꢁꢄ

XGꢁꢁ

Fꢆꢉꢁ

FE08

FE73

FE09

FE22

The version of the CPU1 is displayed.

The version of the CPU2 is displayed.

The version of the memory mounted is displayed.

The PID feedback value is displayed. (Hz/free unit)

Frequency

command value

(PID-computed)

The PID-computed frequency command value is

displayed. (Hz/free unit)

Dꢆꢃꢁ

FE15

Integral input

power

The integrated amount of power (kWh) supplied to

the inverter is displayed.

Note 5

Mꢆꢇꢉ

Jꢆꢃꢉ

Cꢄꢊꢉ

ꢄꢉꢁꢁ

Oꢆꢉꢁ

FE76

FE77

FE70

FE90

FA15

Integral output

power

The integrated amount of power (kWh) supplied

from the inverter is displayed.

Rated current

Output speed

The rated current of the inverter (A) is displayed.

Displays the motor speed ( min-1) by calculating

with output frequency and pole numbers.

Communication

counter

Displays the counter numbers of communication

through the network.

Normal state

communication

counter

Displays the counter numbers of communication

only at normal state in the all communication

through network.

Pꢆꢉꢁ

FA16

(Continued overleaf)

H-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

(Continued)

Item displayed

Key

operated

LED

display

Communic

ation No.

Description

Past trip 1 (displayed alternately)

Past trip 2 (displayed alternately)

Note 6

Past trip 1

Past trip 2

Past trip 3

Past trip 4

FE10

FE11

FE12

FE13

QEꢋ ⇔ꢄ

QJ ⇔ꢌ

Note 6

Past trip 3 (displayed alternately)

Past trip 4 (displayed alternately)

QRꢋ ⇔ꢋ

PGTT ⇔ꢍ

The ON/OFF status of each of the cooling fan,

circuit board capacitor, main circuit capacitor of

parts replacement alarm or cumulative operation

time are displayed in bits.

ON: ꢄ

OFF: _

Note 7

Parts replacement

alarm information

Oꢆꢆ___K

FE79

FE14

___K

Cumulative

operation time

Cooling fan

Control circuit board capacitor

Main circuit capacitor

Cumulative

operation time

The cumulative operation time is displayed.

(0.01=1 hour, 1.00=100 hours)

Note 8

Vꢁꢂꢄꢁ

ꢀꢁꢂꢁ

Default display

mode

The operation frequency is displayed (Operation at

60Hz).

MODE

H-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

8.1.2 Display of detailed information on a past trip

ENT

Details on a past trip (of trips 1 to 4) can be displayed, as shown in the table below, by pressing the

when the trip record is selected in the status monitor mode.

key

Unlike the "Display of detailed trip information at the occurrence of a trip" in 8.2.2, details on a past trip can be

displayed, even after the inverter is turned off or reset.

Key

operated

Item displayed

Past trip 1

LED display

QEꢄꢆ⇔ꢄ

Pꢆꢌ

Description

Note 10

Note 1

Past trip 1 (displayed alternately)

The number of time the same trip occurred in succession is

displayed. (Unit: times)

ENT

Continuous trips

The operation frequency when the trip occurred is

displayed.

Operation

frequency

Zꢀꢎꢁ

HTꢅH

The direction of rotation when the trip occurred is displayed.

(HTꢅH: Forward run, HTꢅT: Reverse run)

Direction of

rotation

Operation

frequency

command

The operation command value when the trip occurred is

displayed.

Hꢇꢎꢁ

The inverter output current when the trip occurred is

displayed. (%/A)

Note 2

Note 3

Load current

Input voltage

Output voltage

Eꢄꢉꢁ

[ꢄꢌꢁ

Rꢄꢁꢁ

The inverter input voltage (DC) when the trip occurred is

displayed. (%/V).

The inverter output voltage when the trip occurred is

displayed. (%/V)

The ON/OFF statuses of the control input terminals (F, R,

RES and VIA) are displayed in bits.

ON: ꢄ

_ꢆꢆꢆꢆ_KK

OFF: _

Input terminal

_ꢆꢆꢆꢆ_KK

Note 4

VIA

RES

The ON/OFF statuses of the control output terminals (RY

and FL) are displayed in bits.

ON: ꢄ

OFF: _

ꢁ

_ꢆK

Output terminal

ꢁꢆ_ꢆK

Note 5

Note 8

RY-RC

The cumulative operation time when the trip occurred is

displayed.

(0.01=1 hour, 1.00=100 hours)

Cumulative

operation time

Vꢏꢉꢀ

MODE

Past trip 1

Press this key to return to past trip 1.

QEꢄꢆ⇔ꢆꢄ

H-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

8.2

Display of trip information

8.2.1 Trip code display

If the inverter trips, an error code is displayed to suggest the cause. Since trip records are retained, information

on each trip can be displayed anytime in the status monitor mode.

■ Display of trip information

Failure

Error code

Description

code

0000

0001

0002

0003

0004

0005

0008

0009

000A

000B

000C

000D

000E

0010

0011

0012

PGTT(*)

No error

Overcurrent during acceleration

Overcurrent during deceleration

Overcurrent during constant speed operation

Load-side overcurrent during start-up

Armature-side overcurrent during start-up

Input phase failure or exhaustion of main circuit capacitor

Output phase failure

QEꢄ

QEꢌ

QEꢋ

QEN

QEC

GRJꢄ

GRJꢁ

QRꢄ

QRꢌ

QRꢋ

QNꢄ

QNꢌ

Overvoltage during acceleration

Overvoltage during deceleration

Overvoltage during constant-speed operation

Inverter overload trip

Motor overload trip

Overheating trip or thermal detector failure

Emergency stop

E²PROM fault 1 (writing error)

E²PROM fault 2 (initialization error) or power-off during the setting of

V[R

GGRꢄ

0013

GGRꢌ

0014

0015

0016

0017

0018

001A

001B

001D

001E

0020

0022

0025

E²PROM fault 3 (reading error)

GGRꢋ

GTTꢌ

GTTꢋ

GTTꢍ

GTTꢉ

GTTꢃ

GTTꢇ

Inverter RAM fault

Inverter ROM fault

CPU fault trip 1

Communication error

Current defector fault

Network error

Small-current trip

Undervoltage trip

WRꢄ

Over-torque trip

Ground fault

GHꢌ

Overcurrent flowing in element during acceleration

QEꢄR

(Continued overleaf)

H-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

(Continued)

Error code

Failure

code

Description

0026

0027

0054

0029

002E

0032

0033

0034

0035

002F

Overcurrent flowing in element during deceleration

QEꢌR

QEꢋR

GVPꢄ

GV[R

QJꢌ

Overcurrent flowing in element during constant-speed operation

Auto-tuning error

Inverter type error

External thermal input

VIA cable break

Gꢅꢄꢇ

Gꢅꢄꢈ

Gꢅꢌꢁ

Gꢅꢌꢄ

UQWV

Communication error between CPUs

V/F control error

CPU fault 2

Step-out (for PM motors only)

Note: Past trip records (trip records retained or trips that occurred in the past) can be called up.

⇒ See section 8.1 "Status monitor mode" for the call-up procedure.

(*) Strictly speaking, this code is not an error code; this code is displayed to show the absence of error

when the past trip monitor mode is selected.

8.2.2 Display of trip information at the occurrence of a trip

At the occurrence of a trip, the same information as that displayed in the mode described in 8.1.1, "Status monitor

under normal conditions," can be displayed, as shown in the table below, if the inverter is not turned off or reset.

To display trip information after turning off or resetting the inverter, follow the steps described in 8.1.2, "Display of

detailed information on a past trip."

■ Example of call-up of trip information

Key

operated

LED

display

Communic

ation No.

Item displayed

Description

Status monitor mode (The code blinks if a trip

occurs.)

The motor coasts and comes to a stop (coast stop).

The first basic parameter “CWH” (Wizard function)

is displayed.

Cause of trip

QRꢌ

CWH

Parameter setting

mode

MODE

The direction of rotation at the occurence of a trip

is displayed. (HTꢅH: forward run, HTꢅT:

reverser run).

The operation frequency command value (Hz/free

unit) at the occurrence of a trip is displayed.

Direction of

rotation

HTꢅH

FE01

FE02

Operation

frequency

command

Note 1

Hꢀꢁꢂꢁ

The output power of the inverter at the occurrence

of a trip (%/A) is displayed.

Note 2

Note 3

Load current

Input voltage

Eꢄꢋꢁ

[ꢄꢍꢄ

Rꢄꢁꢁ

FE03

FE04

FE05

The inverter input (DC) voltage (%/V) at the

occurrence of a trip is displayed.

The output voltage of the inverter at the

occurrence of a trip (%/V) is displayed.

Output voltage

(Continued overleaf)

H-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

(Continued)

Item displayed

Key

operated

LED

display

Communic

ation No.

Description

The torque at the occurrence of a trip (%) is

displayed.

Torque

SꢆꢀQ

Yꢆꢈꢁ

Nꢆꢃꢁ

Mꢆꢇꢁ

Jꢆꢃꢉ

Zꢀꢁꢂꢁ

FE18

FE20

FE27

FE29

FE30

FE00

The torque current (%/A) at the occurrence of a

trip is displayed.

Torque current

Inverter load factor

Input power

The inverter load factor (%) at the occurrence of a

trip is displayed.

The inverter input power (kW) at the occurrence of

a trip is displayed.

The inverter output power (kW) at the occurrence

of a trip is displayed.

Output power

The inverter output frequency (Hz/free unit) at the

occurrence of a trip is displayed.

Operation

frequency

The ON/OFF statuses of the control input

terminals (F, R, RES and VIA) are displayed in

bits.

_ꢆꢆꢆꢆ_KK

ON: ꢄ

OFF: _

Note 4

Input terminal

_ꢆꢆꢆꢆ_KK

FE06

VIA

RES

The ON/OFF status of each of the control signal

output terminals (RY and FL) at the occurrence of

a trip is displayed in bits.

Output terminal

ꢁꢆ_ꢆK

FE07

ON: ꢄ

ꢁ

_ꢆK

OFF: _

RY-RC

CPU1 version

CPU2 version

Memory version

PID feedback

Xꢄꢁꢄ

XYꢁꢄ

XGꢁꢄ

Fꢆꢉꢁ

FE08

FE73

FE09

FE22

The version of the CPU1 is displayed.

The version of the CPU2 is displayed.

The version of the memory mounted is displayed.

The PID feedback value at the occurrence of a trip

is displayed. (Hz/free unit)

Frequency

command value

(PID-computed)

The PID-computed frequency command value at

the occurrence of a trip is displayed. (Hz/free unit)

Dꢆꢃꢁ

Mꢆꢇꢉ

FE15

FE76

The integrated amount of power (kWh) supplied to

the inverter is displayed.

(0.01=1kWh, 1.00=100kWh)

Integral input

power

(Continued overleaf)

H-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

(Continued)

Item displayed

Key

operated

LED

display

Communic

ation No.

Description

The integrated amount of power (kWh) supplied

from the inverter is displayed.

(0.01=1kWh, 1.00=100kWh)

Integral output

power

Jꢆꢃꢉ

FE77

The inverter rated current (A) at the occurrence of

a trip is displayed.

Rated current

Output speed

Cꢄꢊꢉ

ꢄꢉꢁꢁ

FE70

FE90

Displays the motor speed ( min-1) by calculating

with output frequency and pole numbers.

Displays the counter numbers of communication

through the network.

Note that they are current values, not at tripping.

Displays the counter numbers of communication

only at normal state in the all communication

through network.

Communication

counter

Oꢆꢉꢁ

Pꢆꢉꢁ

FA15

FA16

Normal state

communication

counter

Note that they are current values, not at tripping.

Past trip 1

Past trip 2

Past trip 3

Past trip 4

FE10

FE11

FE12

FE13

Past trip 1 (displayed alternately)

Past trip 2 (displayed alternately)

Past trip 3 (displayed alternately)

Past trip 4 (displayed alternately)

QRꢌ ⇔ꢄ

QJ ⇔ꢌ

Note 6

QRꢋ ⇔ꢋ

PGTT ⇔ꢍ

The ON/OFF status of each of the cooling fan,

circuit board capacitor, main circuit capacitor of

parts replacement alarm or cumulative operation

time are displayed in bits.

ON: ꢄ

Parts replacement

alarm information

OFF: _

Oꢆꢆ___K

FE79

FE14

Note 7

Note 8

___K

Cooling fan

Control circuit board capacitor

Main circuit capacitor

operation time

Cumulative

operation time

The cumulative operation time is displayed.

(0.01=1 hour, 1.00=100 hours)

Vꢁꢂꢄꢁ

QRꢌ

Default display

mode

MODE

The cause of the trip is displayed.

Note 1: Items displayed can be changed by pressing

key in the each monitor mode.

Note 2: You can switch between % and A (ampere)/V (volt), using the parameter Hꢃꢁꢄ (current/voltage unit

selection).

Note 3: The input (DC) voltage displayed is 1

times as large as the rectified d.c. input voltage.

H-8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

Note 4: The number of bars displayed varies depending on the setting of Hꢄꢁꢈ (analog input/logic input

function selection). The bar representing VIA is displayed only when the logic input function is assigned

to the VIA terminal, respectively.

If Hꢄꢁꢈ = ꢁ: The bar representing VIA is not displayed.

If Hꢄꢁꢈ = ꢄ or ꢌ: The bar representing VIA is displayed.

Note 5: The integrated amounts of input and output power will be reset to zero, if you press and hold down the

ENT

key for 3 seconds or more when power is off or when the input terminal function CKWH (input

terminal function: 51) is turned on or displayed.

Note 6: Past trip records are displayed in the following sequence: 1 (latest trip record) ⇔2⇔3⇔4 (oldest trip

record). If no trip occurred in the past, the message “PGTT” will be displayed. Details on past trip

record 1, 2, 3 or 4 can be displayed by pressing the ^ENTkey when past trip 1, 2, 3 or 4 is displayed.

⇒ For more information, see section 8.1.2.

Note 7: Parts replacement alarm is displayed based on the value calculated from the annual average ambient

temperature, the ON time of the inverter, the operating time of the motor and the output current ( load

factor) specified using Hꢀꢋꢍ. Use this alarm as a guide only, since it is based on a rough estimation.

Note 8: The cumulative operation time increments only when the machine is in operation.

Note 9: At the occurrence of a trip, maximum values are not always recorded and displayed for reasons of

detecting time.

Note10: If there is no trip record, PGTT is displayed.

Of the items displayed on the monitor, the reference values of items expressed in percent are listed below.

•

Load current:

The current monitored is displayed. The reference value (100% value) is

the rated output current indicated on the nameplate. The unit can be

switched to A (amperes).

•

Input voltage:

The voltage displayed is the voltage determined by converting the voltage

measured in the DC section into an AC voltage. The reference value

(100% value) is 200 volts for 200V models, 400 volts for 400V models.

The unit can be switched to V (volts).

•

Torque:

The torque generated by the drive motor is displayed. The reference value

(100% value) is the rated torque of the motor.

Torque current:

The current required to generate torque is calculated from the load current

by vector operations. The value thus calculated is displayed. The

reference value (100% value) is the value at the time when the load

current is 100%.

•

Load factor of inverter:

Depending on the PWM carrier frequency (Hꢋꢁꢁ) setting and so on, the

actual rated current may become smaller than the rated output current

indicated on the nameplate. With the actual rated current at that time (after

a reduction) as 100%, the proportion of the load current to the rated

current is indicated in percent. The load factor is also used to calculate the

conditions for overload trip (QNꢄ).

H-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

9. Measures to satisfy the standards

9.1

How to cope with the CE directive

In Europe, the EMC directive and the low-voltage directive, which took effect in 1996 and 1997, respectively,

make it obligatory to put the CE mark on every applicable product to prove that it complies with the directives.

Inverters do not work alone but are designed to be installed in a control panel and always used in combination

with other machines or systems which control them, so they themselves are not considered to be subject to the

EMC directive. However, the CE mark must be put on all inverters because they are subject to the low-voltage

directive.

The CE mark must be put on all machines and systems with built-in inverters because such machines and

systems are subject to the above directives. It is the responsibility of the manufacturers of such final products to

put the CE mark on each one. If they are "final" products, they might also be subject to machine-related directives.

It is the responsibility of the manufacturers of such final products to put the CE mark on each one. In order to

make machines and systems with built-in inverters compliant with the EMC directive and the low-voltage directive,

this section explains how to install inverters and what measures should be taken to satisfy the EMC directive.

We have tested representative models with them installed as described later in this manual to check for

conformity with the EMC directive. However, we cannot check all inverters for conformity because whether or not

they conform to the EMC direction depends on how they are installed and connected. In other words, the

application of the EMC directive varies depending on the composition of the control panel with a built-in

inverter(s), the relationship with other built-in electrical components, the wiring condition, the layout condition, and

so on. Therefore, please verify yourself whether your machine or system conforms to the EMC directive.

9.1.1 About the EMC directive

Inverters themselves are not subject to approval for CE marking.

The CE mark must be put on every final product that includes an inverter(s) and a motor(s). The VF-FS1 series of

inverters complies with the EMC directive if an EMI filter recommended by Toshiba is connected to it and wiring is

carried out correctly.

■

EMC directive 89/336/EEC

The EMC standards are broadly divided into two categories; immunity- and emission-related standards, each of

which is further categorized according to the operating environment of each individual machine. Since inverters

are intended for use with industrial systems under industrial environments, they fall within the EMC categories

listed in Table 1 below. The tests required for machines and systems as final products are almost the same as

those required for inverters.

I-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

Table 1 EMC standards

Product

Category

Emission

Subcategory

Test standard and level

IEC61800-3

Radiation noise

Transmission noise

IEC 61800-3

9.1.2 Measures to satisfy the EMC directive

This subsection explains what measures must be taken to satisfy the EMC directive.

(1) Insert a recommended EMI filter (Table 2) on the input side of the inverter to reduce and transmission noise

and radiation noise from input cables.

In the combinations listed in Table 2, Inverters are tested in these combination to see if they comply with

transmission noise standards. For inverters used in Japan, it is recommended to use the NF series of noise

filters.

Table 2 lists noise filters recommended for the inverters.

Table 2 Combinations of inverter and EMI filter

Three-phase 200V class

Combination of inverter and filter

Transmission noise

EN61800-3, 1st Environment, C2

EN61800-3, 1st Environment, C1

Inverter

Length of motor

Applicable filters

connecting cable (m)

VFFS1-2004PM

VFFS1-2007PM

VFFS1-2015PM

VFFS1-2022PM

VFFS1-2037PM

VFFS1-2055PM

VFFS1-2075PM

VFFS1-2110PM

VFFS1-2150PM

VFFS1-2185PM

VFFS1-2220PM

VFFS1-2300PM

EMFS11-4015BZ

EMFS11-4025CZ

EMFS11-4047DZ

EMFS11-2083EZ

EMF3-4090F

EMFS11-4015BZ

EMFS11-4025CZ

EMFS11-4047DZ

EMFS11-2083EZ

EMF3-4090F

100

EMF3-4180H

I-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

Three-phase 400V class

Inverter

Combination of inverter and filter

Transmission noise

EN61800-3, 2nd Environment, C3

EN61800-3, 1st Environment, C2

EN61800-3, 1st Environment, C1

Length of

motor

connecting

motor

Applicable filters

connecting

cable (m)

VFFS1-4004PL

VFFS1-4007PL

VFFS1-4015PL

VFFS1-4022PL

VFFS1-4037PL

VFFS1-4055PL

VFFS1-4075PL

VFFS1-4110PL

VFFS1-4150PL

VFFS1-4185PL

VFFS1-4220PL

VFFS1-4300PL

With a built-in filter

EMFS11-4015BZ

EMFS11-4025CZ

EMFS11-4047DZ

EMFS11-4049EZ

EMF3-4090F

100

EMFS11-4015BZ

EMFS11-4025CZ

EMFS11-4047DZ

EMFS11-4049EZ

EMF3-4090F

100

EMF3-4092G

(2) Use shielded power cables, such as inverter output cables, and shielded control cables. Route the cables

and wires so as to minimize their lengths. Keep a distance between the power cable and the control cable

and between the input and output wires of the power cable. Do not route them in parallel or bind them

together, instead cross at right angle.

(3) Install the inverter and the filter on the same metal plate. It is more effective in limiting the radiation noise to

install the inverter in a sealed steel cabinet. Using wires as thick and short as possible, earth the metal plate

and the control panel securely with a distance kept between the earth cable and the power cable.

(4) Route the EMI filter input and output wires apart from each other.

(5) To suppress radiation noise from cables, ground all shielded cables through a noise cut plate.

It is effective to earth shielded cables in the vicinity of the inverter, cabinet and filter (within a radius of 10cm

from each of them). Inserting a ferrite core in a shielded cable is even more effective in limiting the radiation

noise.

(6) To further limit the radiation noise, insert a zero-phase reactor in the inverter output line and insert ferrite

cores in the earth cables of the metal plate and cabinet.

I-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

[Example of wiring]

Note: Strip and earth the shielded cable, following the example shown in Fig.

Shielded cable

Strip the cable and fix it to the metal plate by means

of a metal saddle for electrical work or equivalent.

9.1.3 About the low-voltage directive

The low-voltage directive provides for the safety of machines and systems. All Toshiba inverters are CE-marked

in accordance with the standard EN 50178 specified by the low-voltage directive, and can therefore be installed in

machines or systems and imported without problem to European countries.

Applicable standard: EN/IEC 61800-5-1

Electronic equipment for use in power installations

Pollution level: 2 (5.2.15.2)

Overvoltage category: 3

200V class - 3.0mm (5.2.16.1)

400V class - 5.5mm (5.2.16.1)

I-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

EN 50178 applies to electrical equipment intended specially for use in power installations, and sets out the

conditions to be observed for electric shock prevention when designing, testing, manufacturing and installing

electronic equipment for use in power installations.

9.1.4 Measures to satisfy the low-voltage directive

When incorporating the inverter into a machine or system, it is necessary to take the following measures so that

the inverter satisfies the low-voltage directive.

(1) Install the inverter in a cabinet and ground the inverter enclosure. When doing maintenance, be extremely

careful not to put your fingers into the inverter through a wiring hole and touch a charged part, which may

occur depending on the model and capacity of the inverter used.

(2) Do not connect two or more wires to the main circuit earth terminal of the inverter. If necessary, install an

additional earth terminal on the metal plate on which the inverter is installed and connect another cable to it.

Or install the EMC plate (attached as standard) and another cable connect to earth terminal on the EMC

plate. Refer to the table 10.1 for earth cable sizes.

(3) Install a non-fuse circuit breaker or a fuse on the input side of the inverter.

9.2

Compliance with UL Standard and CSA Standard

The VF-FS1 models, that conform to the UL Standard and CSA Standard have the UL/CSA mark on the

nameplate.

9.2.1 Compliance with Installation

The VF-FS1 inverter must be installed in a panel, and used within the ambient temperature specification.

⇒ See section 1.4.4.

9.2.2 Compliance with Connection

Use the UL conformed cables (Rating 75 °C or more) to the main circuit terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2,

W/T3).

Refer to the table of next page about wire sizes.

9.2.3 Compliance with Peripheral devices

Use the UL listed fuses at connecting to power supply.

Short circuit test is performed under the condition of the power supply short-circuit currents in below.

These interrupting capacities and fuse rating currents depend on the applicable motor capacities.

I-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

■ AIC, Fuse and Wire sizes

Capacity of

applicable

motor

(kW)

AIC (A)

(Interrupting

capacity)

Voltage

class

Fuse class and Input wire sizes of Out put wire sizes

Inverter model

Earth

current (A)

power circuit

of power circuit

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

4.0

5.5

7.5

VFFS1-2004PM

VFFS1-2007PM

VFFS1-2015PM

VFFS1-2022PM

VFFS1-2037PM

AIC 5000A

J 3A max.

J 6A max.

AWG 14

AWG 12

AWG 10

AWG 8

AWG 14

AWG 10

AWG 8

AWG 6

AWG 4

AWG 3

AWG 2

AWG 1/0

AWG 14

AWG 12

AWG 10

AWG 8

J 10A max.

J 15A max.

J 25A max.

J 35A max.

J 45A max.

J 70A max.

J 90A max.

J 100 A max.

J 125A max.

J 175A max.

VFFS1-2055PM AIC 22000A

VFFS1-2075PM AIC 22000A

VFFS1-2110PM AIC 22000A

VFFS1-2150PM AIC 22000A

VFFS1-2185PM AIC 22000A

VFFS1-2220PM AIC 22000A

VFFS1-2300PM AIC 22000A

Three-phase

200V class

AWG 6

AWG 4

18.5

AWG 4

AWG 2

AWG 8

AWG 1/0

AWG 6

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

4.0

5.5

7.5

VFFS1-4004PL

VFFS1-4007PL

VFFS1-4015PL

VFFS1-4022PL

VFFS1-4037PL

AIC 5000A

J 3A max.

J 6A max.

J 10A max.

J 15A max.

J 20A max.

J 25A max.

J 35A max.

J 45A max.

J 60A max.

J 70A max.

J 90A max.

AWG 14

AWG 12

AWG 10

AWG 8

AWG 14

AWG 12

AWG 10

AWG 8

AWG 14

AWG 10

VFFS1-4055PL AIC 22000A

VFFS1-4075PL AIC 22000A

VFFS1-4110PL AIC 22000A

VFFS1-4150PL AIC 22000A

VFFS1-4185PL AIC 22000A

VFFS1-4220PL AIC 22000A

VFFS1-4300PL AIC 22000A

Three-phase

400V class

18.5

AWG 8

AWG 6

AWG 4

9.2.4 Motor thermal protection

Selects the electronic thermal protection characteristics that fit with the ratings and characteristics of the motor. In

case of multi motor operation with one inverter, thermal relay should be connected to each motor.

I-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

10. Peripheral devices

Danger

• When using switchgear for the inverter, it must be installed in a cabinet.

Failure to do so can lead to risk of electric shock and can result in death or serious injury.

Mandatory

• Connect earth cables securely.

Failure to do so can lead to risk of electric shock or fire in case of a failure or short-circuit or electric

leak.

Be Grounded

10.1 Selection of wiring materials and devices

Wire size (See Note 4)

Capacity of

applicable motor

(kW)

Power circuit

Earth cable

(mm²)

Voltage

class

Inverter model

(mm²) Note 1)

For IEC60364-5-

For JAPAN

For IEC60364-5-

For JAPAN

523/54

JEAC8001-1995

523/54

JEAC8001-1995

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

4.0

5.5

7.5

VFFS1-2004PM

VFFS1-2007PM

VFFS1-2015PM

VFFS1-2022PM

VFFS1-2037PM

VFFS1-2055PM

VFFS1-2075PM

VFFS1-2110PM

VFFS1-2150PM

VFFS1-2185PM

VFFS1-2220PM

VFFS1-2300PM

1.5

2.5

3.5

5.5

2.5

3.5

5.5

Three-phase

200V class

18.5

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

4.0

5.5

7.5

VFFS1-4004PL

VFFS1-4007PL

VFFS1-4015PL

VFFS1-4022PL

VFFS1-4037PL

VFFS1-4055PL

VFFS1-4075PL

VFFS1-4110PL

VFFS1-4150PL

VFFS1-4185PL

VFFS1-4220PL

VFFS1-4300PL

1.5

3.5

5.5

2.5

Three-phase

400V class

3.5

5.5

18.5

Note 1: Sizes of the wires connected to the input terminals R/L1, S/L2 and T/L3 and the output terminals U/T1,

V/T2 and W/T3 when the length of each wire does not exceed 30m.

Note 2: For the control circuit, use shielded wires 0.75 mm²or more in diameter.

Note 3: For grounding, use a cable with a size equal to or larger than the above.

Note 4: The wire sizes specified in the above table apply to HIV wires (cupper wires shielded with an insulator

with a maximum allowable temperature of 75°C) used at an ambient temperature of 40°C or less.

Note 5: If there is a need to bring the inverter into UL compliance, use wires specified in Chapter 9.

J-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

■ Selection of wiring devices

Molded case circuit

breaker (MCCB)

Earth leakage circuit

breaker (ELCB)

Input current (A)

Capacity of

Magnetic contactor

(MC)

applicable

motor

(kW)

Voltage class

Inverter model

200V class:200V 200V class:240V

400V class:380V 400V class:480V

Operational current(A)

AC-1

Rated current (A)

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

5.5

7.5

VFFS1-2004PM

VFFS1-2007PM

VFFS1-2015PM

VFFS1-2022PM

VFFS1-2037PM

VFFS1-2055PM

VFFS1-2075PM

VFFS1-2110PM

VFFS1-2150PM

VFFS1-2185PM

VFFS1-2220PM

VFFS1-2300PM

100

125

175

1.9

3.3

6.1

1.6

2.7

5.1

8.7

7.3

15.7

20.8

27.9

42.1

56.1

67.3

80.4

113.3

13.0

17.3

23.3

34.4

45.5

55.8

66.4

89.5

Three-phase

200V class

100

125

18.5

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

5.5

7.5

1.0

1.7

3.2

4.6

8.1

10.9

14.7

21.1

28.5

34.8

41.6

56.7

0.8

1.4

2.5

3.6

6.4

VFFS1-4004PL

VFFS1-4007PL

VFFS1-4015PL

VFFS1-4022PL

VFFS1-4037PL

VFFS1-4055PL

VFFS1-4075PL

VFFS1-4110PL

VFFS1-4150PL

VFFS1-4185PL

VFFS1-4220PL

VFFS1-42300PL

100

Three-phase

400V class

Note 4)

8.6

11.7

16.8

22.8

27.8

33.1

44.7

18.5

Note 1: Selections for use of the Toshiba 4-pole standard motor with power supply voltage of 200V/400V-50Hz.

Note 2: Choose the MCCB according to the power supply capacity.

For comply with UL and CSA standard, use the fuse certified by UL and CSA.

Note 3: When using on the motor side during commercial-power supply operation, choose the MC with class

AC-3 rated current for the motor rated current.

Note 4: Attach surge killers to the magnetic contactor and exciting coil of the relay.

Note 5: In the case the magnetic contactor (MC) with 2a-type auxiliary contacts is used for the control circuit,

raise the reliability of the contact by using 2a-type contacts in parallel connection.

J-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

10.2 Installation of a magnetic contactor

If using the inverter without installing a magnetic contactor (MC) in the primary circuit, use an MCCB (with a

power cutoff device) to open the primary circuit when the inverter protective circuit is activated.

■ Magnetic contactor in the primary circuit

To detach the inverter from the power supply in any of the following cases, insert a magnetic contactor

(primary-side magnetic contactor) between the inverter and the power supply.

(1) If the motor overload relay is tripped

(2) If the protective detector (FL) built into the inverter is activated

(3) In the event of a power failure (for prevention of auto-restart)

When using the inverter with no magnetic contactor (MC) on the primary side, install a non-fuse circuit

breaker with a voltage tripping coil instead of an MC and adjust the circuit breaker so that it will be tripped if

the protective relay referred to above is activated. To detect a power failure, use an undervoltage relay or

the like.

Example of connection of a magnetic contactor in the primary circuit

Notes on wiring

•

When frequently switching between start and stop, do not use the magnetic contactor on the primary side as

an on-off switch for the inverter.

Instead, stop and start the inverter by using terminals F and CC (forward run) or R and CC (reverse run).

Be sure to attach a surge killer to the exciting coil of the magnetic contactor (MC).

•

J-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

■ Magnetic contactor in the secondary circuit

A magnetic contactor may be installed on the secondary side to switch controlled motors or supply

commercial power to the load when the inverter is out of operation.

Notes on wiring

•

Be sure to interlock the magnetic contactor on the secondary side with the power supply to prevent commercial

power from being applied to the inverter output terminals.

•

When installing a magnetic contactor (MC) between the inverter and the motor, avoid turning the magnetic

contactor on or off during operation. Turning the magnetic contactor on or off during operation causes a current

to rush into the inverter which could lead to malfunction.

10.3 Installation of an overload relay

The VF-FS1 inverter has an electronic-thermal overload protective function.

In the following cases, however, an overload relay suitable for the adjustment of the motor electronic

thermal protection level (VJT) and appropriate to the motor used should be installed between the inverter

and the motor.

•

When using a motor with a current rating different to that of the corresponding Toshiba general-purpose

motor

•

When operating a single motor with an output smaller than that of the applicable standard motor or more

than one motor simultaneously.

When using the VF-FS1 inverter to operate a constant-torque motor, such as the Toshiba VF motor, adjust

the protection characteristic of the electronic thermal protection unit (ꢀNO) to the VF motor use.

It is recommended to use a motor with a thermal relay embedded in the motor coil to give sufficient

protection to the motor, especially when it runs in a low-speed range.

J-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

10.4 Optional external devices

The following external devices are optionally available for the VF-FS1 series of inverters.

(8) Parameter writer

(9) Extension panel

(10) Internal LonWorks^®communication circuit board

(11) Internal Metasys^®N2 communication circuit board

(12) Internal Siemens APOGEE^TMFLN communication

circuit board

(13) Internal BACnet^®communication circuit board

(14) USB communication converter unit

(15) Remote panel

(16) Application control unit

(17) Conduit pipe attachment kit

J-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

11.Table of parameters and data

11.1 User parameters

Minimum

setting unit

Panel/Commun

ication

Default

setting

User

setting

Title

Function

Unit

Adjustment range

Reference

3.2

Operation frequency of operation

panel

0.1/0.01

NN-WN

0.0

11.2 Basic parameters

Minimum

setting unit

Panel/Commun

ication

Communication

Default

setting

User

setting

Title

Function

Unit

Adjustment range

Reference

No.

Wizard function

The wizard function refers to the

special function of calling up ten

frequently used parameters.

Displays parameters in groups of five

in the reverse order to that in which

their settings were changed.

* (Possible to edit)

4.2.4

6.20.7

CWH

History function

4.2.5

CWJ

0000

0040

Automatic

acceleration/

deceleration

Parameter setting

macro function

0: Disabled (manual)

1: Automatic

2: Automatic (only at acceleration)

0: Disabled

5.1.1

5.2

CWꢀ

CWꢁ

1: Coast stop

2: 3-wire operation

3: External input UP/DOWN setting

4: 4-20 mA current input operation

0: Terminal board

1: Operation panel

2: Serial communication

1: VIA

2: VIB

3: Operation panel

0003

0004

Command mode

selection

5.3

7.2

EOQF

HOQF

Frequency setting

mode selection 1

5.3

6.5.1

7.1

4: Serial communication

5: UP/DOWN from external contact

K-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

Minimum

setting unit

Panel/Commun

ication

Communication

No.

Default

setting

User

setting

Title

Function

Unit

Adjustment range

Reference

5.4

0005

Meter selection

0: Output frequency

HOUN

1: Output current

2: Set frequency

3: DC voltage

4: Output voltage command value

5: Input power

6: Output power

7: Torque

8: Torque current

9: Motor cumulative load factor

10: Inverter cumulative load factor

11: - (do not select)

12: Frequency setting value (after

PID)

13: VIA Input value

14: VIB Input value

15: Fixed output 1 (Output current:

100%)

16: Fixed output 2 (Output current:

50%)

17: Fixed output 3 (Supposition

output at HOUN=17)

18: Serial communication data

19: For adjustments (HO set value is

displayed.)

0006

0007

Meter adjustment

Default setting

0: -

4.2.7

4.2.8

5.5

V[R

1: 50Hz default setting

2: 60Hz default setting

3: Default setting (Initialization)

4: Trip record clear

5: Cumulative operation time clear

6: Initialization of type information

7: Save user setting parameters

8. Call user-defined parameters

9. Cumulative fan operation time

record clear

0008

Forward/reverse

run selection

(Operation panel

operation)

0: Forward run

1: Reverse run

2: Forward run (F/R switching

possible)

5.6

3: Reverse run (F/R switching

possible)

0009

0010

0011

0012

0013

0014

0409

Acceleration time

Deceleration time

Maximum

frequency

Upper limit

frequency

Lower limit

frequency

Base frequency 1

0.1/0.1

0.1/0.01

1/0.1

0.0-3200

5.1.2

CEE

FGE

0.0-3200

30.0-200.0

0.5-HJ

80.0

5.7

5.8

50.0 (WP)

60.0 (WN)

0.0

0.0-WN

25.0-200.0

50.0 (WP)

60.0 (WN)

5.9

Base frequency

voltage 1

50-330 (200V class)

50-660 (400V class)

5.9

6.12.5

XNX

K-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

Minimum

setting unit

Panel/Commun

ication

Communication

No.

Default

setting

User

setting

Title

Function

Unit

Adjustment range

Reference

5.10

0015

V/F control mode

selection

0: V/F constant

1: Variable torque

2: Automatic torque boost control

3: Vector control

4: Energy-saving

5: - (Do not select)

6: PM motor control

0.0-30.0

0016

0600

Torque boost 1

0.1/0.1

1/1

* 2

5.11

Motor electronic-

thermal protection

level 1

Electronic-thermal

protection

(A)

10-100

100

5.12

6.17.1

VJT

Setting

Overload protection OL stall

0017

5.12

QNO

{

Standard

motor

characteristic

selection *3

{

VF motor

{

0018

0019

0020

0021

0022

0023

0024

Preset-speed

operation

frequency 1

Preset-speed

operation

frequency 2

Preset-speed

operation

frequency 3

Preset-speed

operation

frequency 4

Preset-speed

operation

frequency 5

Preset-speed

operation

frequency 6

Preset-speed

operation

0.1/0.01

NN-WN

15.0

20.0

25.0

30.0

35.0

40.0

45.0

5.13

UTꢀ

UTꢂ

UTꢃ

UTꢁ

UTꢄ

UTꢅ

UTꢆ

frequency 7

Extended

4.2.2

4.2.3

Hꢇꢇꢇ

ITꢈW

parameters

Automatic edit

function

*1 : 230 (WP/WN type), 400 (WP type), 460 (WN type)

*2 : Default values vary depending on the capacity. ⇒ See the table of page K-14.

*3 : { : valid, × : invalid

K-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

11.3 Extended parameters

•

Input/output parameters 1

Minimum

setting unit

Panel/Commun

ication

Communication

No.

Default

setting

User

setting

Title

Function

Unit

Adjustment range

Reference

0100

0101

0102

0108

0109

Low-speed signal

output frequency

Speed reach

setting frequency

Speed reach

detection band

Always active

function selection 1

Analog/contact

input function

selection (VIA

terminal)

0.1/0.01

0.0-HJ

0.0

2.5

6.1.1

6.1.3

6.1.2

6.3.1

6.2.1

Hꢀꢉꢉ

Hꢀꢉꢀ

Hꢀꢉꢂ

Hꢀꢉꢊ

Hꢀꢉꢋ

0-71 (No function)

0: VIA - analog input

1: VIA - contact input (Sink)

2: VIA - contact input (Source)

0110

0111

0112

0113

Always-active

function selection 2

Input terminal

selection 1 (F)

Input terminal

selection 2 (R)

Input terminal

selection 3 (RES)

Input terminal

selection 8 (VIA)

Output terminal

selection 1A

0-71 (ST)

0-71 (F)

6.3.1

6.3.2

Hꢀꢀꢉ

Hꢀꢀꢀ

Hꢀꢀꢂ

Hꢀꢀꢃ

0-71 (R)

0-71 (RES)

0-71 (SS1)

0-255 (LOW)

0118

Hꢀꢀꢊ

6.3.3

6.3.4

0130

0132

0137

Hꢀꢃꢉ

Hꢀꢃꢂ

Hꢀꢃꢆ

(RY-RC)

Output terminal

selection 3 (FL)

Output terminal

selection 1B

0-255 (FL)

0-255 (always ON)

255

(RY-RC)

0139

0167

Output terminal

logic selection

(RY-RC)

0: Hꢀꢃꢉ and Hꢀꢃꢆ

1: Hꢀꢃꢉ or Hꢀꢃꢆ

0.0-HJ

Hꢀꢃꢋ

Hꢀꢅꢆ

Frequency

command

agreement

detection range

0.1/0.01

2.5

6.3.5

6.4.1

0170

0171

Base frequency 2

0.1/0.01

1/0.1

25.0-200.0

50.0 (WP)

60.0 (WN)

* 2

Hꢀꢆꢉ

Hꢀꢆꢀ

Base frequency

voltage 2

Torque boost 2

50-330 (200V class)

50-660 (400V class)

0.0-30.0

0172

0173

0.1/0.1

1/1

* 1

Hꢀꢆꢂ

Hꢀꢆꢃ

Motor electronic-

thermal protection

level 2

(A)

10-100

100

5.12

6.4.1

0185

Stall prevention

level 2

(A)

1/1

10-110,

111 (disabled)

110

6.4.1

6.17.2

Hꢀꢊꢄ

*1 : Default values vary depending on the capacity. ⇒ See the table of page K-14.

*2 : 230 (WP/WN type), 400 (WP type), 460 (WN type)

K-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

•

Frequency parameters

Minimum

setting unit

Panel/Commun

ication

Communication

No.

Default

setting

User

setting

Title

Function

Unit

Adjustment range

Reference

0200

Frequency priority

selection

0: HOQF (Switchable to Hꢂꢉꢆ by

terminal input)

6.5.1

7.1

Hꢂꢉꢉ

1: HOQF (Switchable to Hꢂꢉꢆ at

less than 1.0Hz of designated

frequency)

0201

0202

0203

0204

0207

VIA input point 1

setting

VIA input point 1

frequency

VIA input point 2

setting

VIA input point 2

frequency

1/1

0.1/0.01

1/1

0-100

6.5.2

Hꢂꢉꢀ

Hꢂꢉꢂ

Hꢂꢉꢃ

Hꢂꢉꢁ

Hꢂꢉꢆ

0.0-200.0

0-100

0.0

100

0.1/0.01

0.0-200.0

50.0 (WP)

60.0 (WN)

Frequency setting

mode

selection 2

1: VIA

2: VIB

6.3.5

6.5.1

7.1

3: Operation panel

4: Serial communication

5: UP/DOWN from external contact

0-100

0210

0211

0212

0213

0240

0241

0242

VIB input point 1

setting

VIB input point 1

frequency

VIB input point 2

setting

VIB input point 2

frequency

Starting frequency

setting

Operation starting

frequency

Operation starting

frequency

1/1

6.5.2

Hꢂꢀꢉ

Hꢂꢀꢀ

Hꢂꢀꢂ

Hꢂꢀꢃ

Hꢂꢁꢉ

Hꢂꢁꢀ

Hꢂꢁꢂ

0.1/0.01

1/1

0.0-200.0

0-100

0.0

100

0.1/0.01

0.0-200.0

0.5-10.0

0.0-HJ

50.0 (WP)

60.0 (WN)

0.5

6.6.1

6.6.2

0.0

hysteresis

0250

0251

DC braking

starting frequency

DC braking

0.1/0.01

1/1

0.0-HJ

0-100

0.0

6.7.1

Hꢂꢄꢉ

Hꢂꢄꢀ

%(A)

current

0252

0256

DC braking time

0.1/0.1

0.0-20.0

1.0

0.0

Hꢂꢄꢂ

Hꢂꢄꢅ

Auto-stop in case

of lower-limit

frequency

0.0: Disabled

0.1-600.0

6.8

continuous

operation time

External contact

input - UP

response time

External contact

input - UP

0264

0265

0.1/0.1

0.0-10.0

0.1

6.5.3

Hꢂꢅꢁ

Hꢂꢅꢄ

0.1/0.01

0.0-HJ

frequency steps

K-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

Minimum

setting unit

Panel/Commun

ication

Communication

No.

Default

setting

User

setting

Title

Function

Unit

Adjustment range

Reference

6.5.3

0266

0267

External contact

input - DOWN

response time

External contact

input - DOWN

frequency steps

Initial UP/DOWN

frequency

0.1/0.1

0.0-10.0

0.0-HJ

0.1

Hꢂꢅꢅ

0.1/0.01

Hꢂꢅꢆ

NNꢇWN

0268

0269

0.1/0.01

0.0

Hꢂꢅꢊ

Hꢂꢅꢋ

Change of the

initial up/down

frequency

0: Not changed

1: Setting of Hꢂꢅꢊ changed when

power is turned off

0.0-HJ

0270

0271

0272

0273

Jump frequency 1

0.1/0.01

0.0

6.9

Hꢂꢆꢉ

Hꢂꢆꢀ

Hꢂꢆꢂ

Hꢂꢆꢃ

Jumping width 1

Jump frequency 2

Jumping width 2

0.0-30.0

0.0-HJ

0.0-30.0

0274

0275

0294

Jump frequency 3

Jumping width 3

0.1/0.01

0.0-HJ

0.0-30.0

NN-WN

0.0

Hꢂꢆꢁ

Hꢂꢆꢄ

Hꢂꢋꢁ

Forced fire-speed

setting frequency

Bumpless

50.0

6.18

6.10

0295

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

Hꢂꢋꢄ

operation

selection

•

Operation mode parameters

Minimum

setting unit

Panel/Commun

ication

Communication

No.

Default

setting

User

setting

Title

Function

Unit

Adjustment range

6.0 - 16.0

Reference

0300

0301

PWM carrier

frequency

Auto-restart

control selection

kHz

0.1/0.1

* 1

6.11

Hꢃꢉꢉ

Hꢃꢉꢀ

0: Disabled

1: At auto-restart after momentary

stop

6.12.1

2: When turning ST-CC on or off

3: At auto-restart or when turning ST-

CC on or off

4: At start-up

0302

Instantaneous

power failure

coast stop

0: Disabled

1: - (Do not select)

2: Coast stop

6.12.2

Hꢃꢉꢂ

selection

0303

0305

Retry selection

(number of times)

Overvoltage limit

operation

Times

1/1

0: Disabled

1-10

0: Enabled

1: Disabled

6.12.3

6.12.4

Hꢃꢉꢃ

Hꢃꢉꢄ

(Slowdown stop

mode selection)

2: Enabled (Quick deceleration)

3: Enabled (Dynamic quick

deceleration)

K-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

Minimum

setting unit

Panel/Commun

ication

Communication

No.

Default

setting

User

setting

Title

Function

Unit

Adjustment range

Reference

6.12.5

0307

Supply voltage

correction

0: Supply voltage uncorrected, output

voltage limited

Hꢃꢉꢆ

(limitation of

output voltage)

1: Supply voltage corrected, output

voltage limited

2: Supply voltage uncorrected, output

voltage unlimited

3: Supply voltage corrected, output

voltage unlimited

0311

Reverse-run

prohibition

0: Forward/reverse run permitted

1: Reverse run prohibited

2: Forward run prohibited

0: Disabled

1: Automatic setting

0: Carrier frequency not reduced

automatically

6.12.6

6.11

Hꢃꢀꢀ

0312

0316

Random mode

Hꢃꢀꢂ

Hꢃꢀꢅ

Carrier frequency

control mode

selection

1: Carrier frequency reduced

automatically

2: Carrier frequency not reduced

automatically

Support for 400V models

3: Carrier frequency reduced

automatically

Support for 400V models

0320

0323

Droop gain

1/1

0-100

6.13

6.14

％

Hꢃꢂꢉ

Hꢃꢂꢃ

Droop insensitive

torque band

PID control

waiting time

PID control

0-100

0359

0360

1/1

0-2400

Hꢃꢄꢋ

Hꢃꢅꢉ

0: Disabled,

1: Enabled (Feedback: VIA)

2: Enabled (Feedback: VIB)

0.01-100.0

0362

0363

0366

Proportional gain

Integral gain

0.01/0.01

0.30

0.20

0.00

Hꢃꢅꢂ

Hꢃꢅꢃ

Hꢃꢅꢅ

0.01-100.0

0.00-2.55

Differential gain

*1 : Default values vary depending on the capacity. ⇒ See the table of page K-14.

K-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

•

Torque boost parameters 1

Minimum

setting unit

Panel/Commun

ication

Communication

No.

Default

setting

User

setting

Title

Function

Unit

Adjustment range

Reference

0400

Auto-tuning

5.10

6.15.1

Hꢁꢉꢉ

0: Auto-tuning disabled

1: Application of individual settings of

Hꢁꢉꢂ (after execution: 0)

2: Auto-tuning enabled

(after execution: 0)

0401

0402

0415

0416

Slip frequency

gain

Automatic torque

boost value

Motor rated

current

1/1

0.1/0.1

1/1

0-150

* 1

Hꢁꢉꢀ

Hꢁꢉꢂ

Hꢁꢀꢄ

Hꢁꢀꢅ

0.0-30.0

0.1-200.0

10-100

Motor no-load

current

0417

0418

Motor rated speed

min-1

1/1

100-15000

1-150

* 1

Hꢁꢀꢆ

Hꢁꢀꢊ

Speed control

response

coefficient

0419

Speed control

stability coefficient

1/1

1-100

Hꢁꢀꢋ

*1 : Default values vary depending on the capacity. ⇒ See the table of page K-14.

•

Input/output parameters 2

Minimum

setting unit

Panel/Commun

ication

Communication

No.

Default

setting

User

setting

Title

Function

Unit

Adjustment range

Reference

6.5.4

0470

0471

0472

0473

VIA input bias

VIA input gain

VIB input bias

VIB input gain

0-255

128

148

128

148

Hꢁꢆꢉ

Hꢁꢆꢀ

Hꢁꢆꢂ

Hꢁꢆꢃ

•

Torque boost parameters 2

Minimum

setting unit

Panel/Commun

ication

Communication

No.

Default

setting

User

setting

Title

Function

Unit

Adjustment range

Reference

0480

0481

Exciting current

coefficient

Power supply

compensation filter

Inhibitor filter

1/1

100-130

0-9999

100

5.10

6.15.2

6.17.16

Hꢁꢊꢉ

Hꢁꢊꢀ

0482

0483

0485

0-9999

442

100.0

100

Hꢁꢊꢂ

Hꢁꢊꢃ

Hꢁꢊꢄ

Hꢁꢋꢂ

Inhibitor gain

0.1

1/1

0.0-300.0

10-250

Stall prevention

control coefficient 1

Stall prevention

control coefficient 2

Motor adjustment

coefficient

5.10

6.15.2

0492

0494

0495

1/1

50-150

0-200

100

* 1

Hꢁꢋꢁ

Hꢁꢋꢄ

Maximum voltage

adjustment

90-120

104

coefficient

K-8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

Minimum

setting unit

Panel/Commun

ication

Communication

No.

Default

setting

User

setting

Title

Function

Unit

kHz

Adjustment range

Reference

0496

Waveform switching

adjustment

0.1/0. 1

0.1-14.0

14.0

5.10

6.15.2

Hꢁꢋꢅ

coefficient

*1 : Default values vary depending on the capacity. ⇒ See the table of page K-14.

•

Acceleration/deceleration time parameters

Minimum

Communication

No.

setting unit

Panel/Commun

ication

Default

setting

User

setting

Title

Function

Unit

Adjustment range

Reference

6.16

0500

0501

0502

0503

0504

Acceleration time

Deceleration time

0.1/0.1

0.0-3200

0: Linear

* 1

Hꢄꢉꢉ

Hꢄꢉꢀ

Hꢄꢉꢂ

Hꢄꢉꢃ

Hꢄꢉꢁ

0.1/0.1

Acceleration/decel

eration 1 pattern

Acceleration/decel

eration 2 pattern

Selecting an

acceleration/decel

eration pattern

Acceleration/decel

eration 1 and 2

switching

1: S-pattern 1

2: S-pattern 2

1: Acceleration/deceleration 1

2: Acceleration/deceleration 2

0505

0.1/0.01

0.0-WN

0.0

Hꢄꢉꢄ

frequency

0506

0507

S-pattern lower-

limit adjustment

amount

S-pattern upper-

limit adjustment

amount

1/1

0-50

Hꢄꢉꢅ

Hꢄꢉꢆ

*1 : Default values vary depending on the capacity. ⇒ See the table of page K-14.

•

Protection parameters

Minimum

setting unit

Panel/Commun

ication

Communication

No.

Default

setting

User

setting

Title

Function

Unit

Adjustment range

Reference

0601

0602

0603

Stall prevention

level 1

Inverter trip

retention selection

Emergency stop

selection

(A)

10-110，

111 (disabled)

0: Canceled with the power off

1: Still retained with the power off

0: Coast stop

110

1/1

6.17.2

6.17.3

6.17.4

Hꢅꢉꢀ

Hꢅꢉꢂ

Hꢅꢉꢃ

1: Slowdown stop

2: Emergency DC braking

0604

0605

Emergency DC

braking time

Output phase

failure detection

mode selection

1.0

0.1/0.1

0.0-20.0

Hꢅꢉꢁ

Hꢅꢉꢄ

0: Disabled

1: At start-up (only one time after

power is turned on)

6.17.5

2: At start-up (each time)

3: During operation

4: At start-up + during operation

5: Detection of cutoff on output side

10-2400

0607

0608

Motor 150%-

1/1

300

6.17.1

6.17.6

Hꢅꢉꢆ

Hꢅꢉꢊ

overload time limit

Input phase failure

detection mode

selection

0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

K-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

Minimum

setting unit

Panel/Commun

ication

Communication

No.

Default

setting

User

setting

Title

Function

Unit

Adjustment range

Reference

6.17.7

0609

0610

Small current

detection current

hysteresis

Small current

trip/alarm

1/1

1-20

Hꢅꢉꢋ

Hꢅꢀꢉ

0: Alarm only

1: Tripping

selection

0611

0612

0613

Small current

detection current

Small current

detection time

Detection of

(A)

1/1

0-100

0-255

Hꢅꢀꢀ

Hꢅꢀꢂ

Hꢅꢀꢃ

0: Each time (standard pulse)

1: Only one time after power is turned

on (standard pulse)

2: Each time (short-time pulse)

3: Only one time after power is turned

on (short-time pulse)

6.17.8

6.17.9

output short-circuit

during start-up

0615

Over-torque

trip/alarm

0: Alarm only

1: Tripping

Hꢅꢀꢄ

selection

0616

0618

0619

Over-torque

detection level

Over-torque

detection time

Over-torque

detection level

hysteresis

1/1

0.1/0.1

1/1

0-200

130

0.5

Hꢅꢀꢅ

Hꢅꢀꢊ

Hꢅꢀꢋ

0.0-10.0

0-100

0621

Cumulative

operation time

alarm setting

Overvoltage limit

operation level

Undervoltage

trip/alarm

100

Time

0.1/0.1

(=10 hours)

0.0-999.9

100-150

610.0

6.17.10

Hꢅꢂꢀ

0626

0627

1/1

140

6.12.4

Hꢅꢂꢅ

Hꢅꢂꢆ

0: Alarm only

(detection level below 60%)

6.17.12

selection

1: Tripping

(detection level below 60%)

2: Alarm only

(detection level below 50%,

input reactor necessary)

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

0: Disabled, 1-100

0632

0633

0634

Thermal memory

selection

Trip at VIA low

level input mode

Annual average

ambient

temperature (For

parts replacement

alarms)

％

1/1

6.17.1

6.17.13

6.17.14

Hꢅꢃꢂ

Hꢅꢃꢃ

Hꢅꢃꢁ

1: -10 to +10°C

2: 11-20°C

3: 21-30°C

4: 31-40°C

5: 41-50°C

6: 51-60°C

0645

PTC thermal

selection

0: Disabled

6.17.15

6.18

Hꢅꢁꢄ

1: Enabled (trip mode)

2: Enabled (alarm mode)

100-9999

0646

0650

PTC detection

resistor value

Forced fire-speed

control selection

Ω

1/1

3000

Hꢅꢁꢅ

Hꢅꢄꢉ

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

K-10

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

•

Output parameters

Minimum

setting unit

Panel/Commun

ication

Communication

No.

Default

setting

User

setting

Title

Function

Unit

Adjustment range

Reference

6.19.1

0691

0692

Inclination

0: Negative inclination (downward

Hꢅꢋꢀ

Hꢅꢋꢂ

characteristic of

analog output

Bias of analog

output

slope)

1: Positive inclination (upward slope)

1/1

0－100

•

Operation panel parameters

Minimum

setting unit

Panel/Commun

ication

Communication

No.

Default

setting

User

setting

Title

Function

Unit

Adjustment range

Reference

0700

0701

0702

Prohibition of

0: Permitted

1: Prohibited

0: %

1: A (ampere)/V (volt)

0.00: Free unit display disabled

(display of frequency)

0.01-200.0

6.20.1

6.20.2

6.20.3

Hꢆꢉꢉ

Hꢆꢉꢀ

Hꢆꢉꢂ

parameter change

Current/voltage

display mode

Frequency free

unit magnification

Times

0.01/0.01

0.00

0705

Inclination

0: Negative inclination (downward

slope)

1: Positive inclination (upward slope)

Hꢆꢉꢄ

characteristic of

free unit display

Bias of free unit

display

0706

0707

0.01/0.01

0.00-HJ

0.00

Hꢆꢉꢅ

Hꢆꢉꢆ

Free step 1

0.00: Disabled

6.20.4

6.20.5

(pressing a panel

key once)

Free step 2 (panel

display)

Standard monitor

display selection

0.01-HJ

0708

0710

1/1

0: Disabled

1-255

0: Operation frequency (Hz/free

unit/step)

Hꢆꢉꢊ

Hꢆꢀꢉ

1: Frequency command (Hz/free

unit/step)

2: Output current (%/A)

3: Inverter rated current (A)

4: Inverter load factor (%)

5: Output power (kW)

6: Frequency command after PID

control (Hz/free unit/step)

7: Optional item specified from an

external control unit

8: Output speed

9: Communication counter

10: Normal state communication

counter

0: Slowdown stop

1: Coast stop

0721

0730

Selection of

operation panel

stop pattern

Prohibition of

frequency setting

on the operation

panel (HE)

6.20.6

6.20.1

Hꢆꢂꢀ

Hꢆꢃꢉ

0: Permitted

1: Prohibited

0732

0733

Prohibition of

panel local/remote

operation

(LOC/REM key)

Prohibition of

panel operation

(RUN/STOP keys)

0: Permitted

1: Prohibited

Hꢆꢃꢂ

Hꢆꢃꢃ

0: Permitted

1: Prohibited

K-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

Minimum

setting unit

Panel/Commun

ication

Communication

No.

Default

setting

User

setting

Title

Function

Unit

Adjustment range

Reference

6.20.1

0734

0735

0738

0748

0749

Prohibition of

panel emergency

stop operation

Prohibition of

panel reset

operation

Head of

parameter display

selection

Integral output

power retention

selection

Display unit

selection for

integral output

power

0: Permitted

1: Prohibited

Hꢆꢃꢁ

0: Permitted

1: Prohibited

Hꢆꢃꢄ

Hꢆꢃꢊ

Hꢆꢁꢊ

Hꢆꢁꢋ

0: AUF

1: AUH

6.20.7

6.20.8

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

0: 1=1kWh

1: 0.1=1kWh

2: 0.01=1kWh

3: 0.001=1kWh

*1 : Default values vary depending on the capacity. ⇒ See the table of page K-14.

•

Communication parameters

Minimum

setting unit

Panel/Commun

ication

Communication

No.

Default

setting

User

setting

Title

Function

Unit

Adjustment range

0: 9600bps

Reference

6.21

0800

0801

Communication

rate

Parity

Hꢊꢉꢉ

Hꢊꢉꢀ

1: 19200bps

0: NON (No parity)

1: EVEN (Even parity)

2: ODD (Odd parity)

0-247

0802

0803

Inverter number

1/1

Hꢊꢉꢂ

Hꢊꢉꢃ

Communication

error trip time

0: Disabled

1-100

0805

0806

Communication

waiting time

Setting of master

and slave for

communication

between inverters

0.01/0.01

0.00: Regular communication

0.01-2.00

0.00

Hꢊꢉꢄ

Hꢊꢉꢅ

0: Slave (0 Hz command issued in

case the master inverter fails)

1: Slave (Operation continued in case

the master inverter fails)

2: Slave (Emergency stop tripping in

case the master inverter fails)

3: Master (transmission of frequency

commands)

4: Master (transmission of output

frequency signals)

0-100

0811

0812

0813

0814

0829

Communication

command point 1

setting

Communication

command point 1

frequency

Communication

command point 2

setting

Communication

command point 2

frequency

1/1

0.1/0.01

1/1

6.5.2

6.21

Hꢊꢀꢀ

Hꢊꢀꢂ

Hꢊꢀꢃ

Hꢊꢀꢁ

Hꢊꢂꢋ

0.0-200.0

0-100

0.0

100

0.1/0.01

0.0-200.0

50.0 (WP)

60.0 (WN)

Selection of

communication

protocol

0: Toshiba inverter protocol

1: ModbusRTU protocol

2: Metasys N2 protocol

3: APOGEE FLN protocol

4: BAC-net protocol

6.21

K-12

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

Minimum

setting unit

Panel/Commun

ication

Communication

No.

Default

setting

User

setting

Title

Function

Unit

Adjustment range

Reference

6.21

0851

Operation at

communication error

by disconnection

0:Inverter stop, communication

command, frequency mode open

(by EOQF, HOQF)

1:None (continued operation)

2:Deceleration stop

3:Coast stop

Hꢊꢄꢀ

4:Communication error (GTTꢄ trip)

or Network error (GTTꢊ trip)

1: 2 poles

0856

Number of motor

poles for

Hꢊꢄꢅ

2: 4 poles

communication

3: 6 poles

4: 8 poles

5: 10 poles

6: 12 poles

7: 14 poles

8: 16 poles

0870

0871

Block write data 1

Block write data 2

0: No selection

1: Command 1

2: Command 2

Hꢊꢆꢉ

Hꢊꢆꢀ

3: Frequency command

4: Output data on the terminal board

5: Analog output for communications

6: Motor speed command

0: No selection

1: Status information

2: Output frequency

3: Output current

0875

0876

0877

0878

0879

Block read data 1

Block read data 2

Block read data 3

Block read data 4

Block read data 5

Hꢊꢆꢄ

Hꢊꢆꢅ

Hꢊꢆꢆ

Hꢊꢆꢊ

Hꢊꢆꢋ

4: Output voltage

5: Alarm information

6: PID feedback value

7: Input terminal board monitor

8: Output terminal board monitor

9: VIA terminal board monitor

10: VIB terminal board monitor

11: Output motor speed monitor

0-65535

0880

0890

Free notes

1/1

Hꢊꢊꢉ

Hꢊꢋꢉ

Parameter for

option 1

Parameter for

option 2

Parameter for

option 3

Parameter for

option 4

Parameter for

option 5

Parameter for

option 6

Parameter for

option 7

Parameter for

option 8

0-65535

6.22

0891

0892

0893

0894

0895

0896

0897

0898

0899

1/1

Hꢊꢋꢀ

Hꢊꢋꢂ

Hꢊꢋꢃ

Hꢊꢋꢁ

Hꢊꢋꢄ

Hꢊꢋꢅ

Hꢊꢋꢆ

Hꢊꢋꢊ

Hꢊꢋꢋ

Parameter for

option 9

Parameter for

option 10

K-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

•

PM motor parameters

Minimum

setting unit

Panel/Commun

ication

Communication

Default

setting

User

setting

Title

Function

Unit

Adjustment range

Reference

6.23

No.

0910

0911

0912

Step-out detection

current level

Step-out detection

time

High-speed torque

adjustment

(A)

1/1

10-150

100

0.0

Hꢋꢀꢉ

0.1/0.1

0.01/0.01

0.0: No detection

0.1-25.0

Hꢋꢀꢀ

Hꢋꢀꢂ

0.00-650.0

0.00

coefficient

■ Default settings by inverter rating

Automatic

Motor

adjustment

coefficient

Display unit

selection for

integral

Acceleration

Deceleration boost value

time

Torque

PWM

carrier

frequency

Motor

rated

current current

Motor

no-load

torgue

boost

value

Motor rated speed

1/2

output power

Inverter type

CEE, FGE,

Hꢄꢉꢉ,

Hꢄꢉꢀ

Hꢁꢀꢆ (min-1)

XD/Hꢀꢆꢂ Hꢃꢉꢉ

Hꢁꢉꢂ Hꢁꢀꢄ Hꢁꢀꢅ

Hꢁꢋꢁ

Hꢆꢁꢋ

(kHz)

(%)

(A)

(%)

WN/V[R: 2 WP/V[R: 1

VFFS1-2004PM

VFFS1-2007PM

VFFS1-2015PM

VFFS1-2022PM

VFFS1-2037PM

VFFS1-2055PM

VFFS1-2075PM

VFFS1-2110PM

VFFS1-2150PM

VFFS1-2185PM

VFFS1-2220PM

VFFS1-2300PM

6.0

5.0

4.0

3.0

2.0

12.0

8.0

6.2

5.8

4.3

4.1

3.4

3.0

2.5

2.3

2.0

1.8

2.0

3.4

1680

1690

1680

1690

1730

1750

1745

1400

1408

1400

1408

1441

1458

1454

6.2

8.9

14.8

21.0

28.2

40.6

54.6

68.0

80.0

108.0

8.0

VFFS1-4004PL

VFFS1-4007PL

VFFS1-4015PL

VFFS1-4022PL

VFFS1-4037PL

VFFS1-4055PL

VFFS1-4075PL

VFFS1-4110PL

VFFS1-4150PL

VFFS1-4185PL

VFFS1-4220PL

VFFS1-4300PL

6.0

5.0

4.0

3.0

2.0

12.0

8.0

6.2

5.8

4.3

4.1

3.4

2.6

2.3

2.2

1.9

1.8

1.0

1.7

1680

1690

1680

1690

1730

1750

1745

1400

1408

1400

1408

1441

1458

1454

3.1

4.5

7.4

10.5

14.1

20.3

27.3

34.0

40.0

54.0

8.0

K-14

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

■ Table of input terminal functions 1

Function

No.

Code

Function

Action

No function is assigned

Disabled

Standby terminal

ON: Ready for operation

OFF: Coast stop (gate off)

AD2

Forward run command

Reverse run command

Acceleration/deceleration 2 pattern selection

ON: Forward run OFF: Slowdown stop

ON: Reverse run OFF: Slowdown stop

ON: Acceleration/deceleration 2

OFF: Acceleration/deceleration 1 or 3

SS1

SS2

SS3

RES

Preset-speed command 1

Preset-speed command 2

Preset-speed command 3

Reset command

Selection of 7-speed with SS1 to SS3 (3bits)

ON: Acceptance of reset command

ON → OFF: Trip reset

EXT

PID

Trip stop command from external input device

DC braking command

PID control prohibited

ON: G Trip stop

ON: DC braking

ON: PID control prohibited

OFF: PID control permitted

PWENE

Permission of parameter editing

ON: Parameter editing permitted

OFF: Parameter editing prohibited (If Hꢆꢉꢉ = ꢀ)

ON: Simultaneous input from ST and RES

ON: Simultaneous input from F and AD2

ST+RES

F+AD2

Combination of standby and reset commands

Combination of forward run and

acceleration/deceleration 2

R+AD2

F+SS1

Combination of reverse run and

acceleration/deceleration 2

Combination of forward run and preset-speed

command 1

Combination of reverse run and preset-speed

command 1

Combination of forward run and preset-speed

command 2

Combination of reverse run and preset-speed

command 2

Combination of forward run and preset-speed

command 3

Combination of reverse run and preset-speed

command 3

Combination of forward run, preset-speed

command 1 and acceleration/deceleration 2

ON: Simultaneous input from R and AD2

ON: Simultaneous input from F and SS1

ON: Simultaneous input from R and SS1

ON: Simultaneous input from F and SS2

ON: Simultaneous input from R and SS2

ON: Simultaneous input from F and SS3

ON: Simultaneous input from R and SS3

ON: Simultaneous input from F, SS1 and AD2

ON: Simultaneous input from R, SS1 and AD2

ON: Simultaneous input from F, SS2 and AD2

ON: Simultaneous input from R, SS2 and AD2

ON: Simultaneous input from F, SS3 and AD2

ON: Simultaneous input from R, SS3 and AD2

R+SS1

F+SS2

R+SS2

F+SS3

R+SS3

F+SS1+AD2

R+SS1+AD2 Combination of reverse run, preset-speed

command 1 and acceleration/deceleration 2

F+SS2+AD2

Combination of forward run, preset-speed

command 2 and acceleration/deceleration 2

R+SS2+AD2 Combination of reverse run, preset-speed

command 2 and acceleration/deceleration 2

F+SS3+AD2

Combination of forward run, preset-speed

command 3 and acceleration/deceleration 2

R+SS3+AD2 Combination of reverse run, preset-speed

command 3 and acceleration/deceleration 2

FCHG

Frequency command forced switching

ON: Hꢂꢉꢆ (If Hꢂꢉꢉ = ꢉ)

OFF: HOQF

ON: No.2 V/F setting

VF2

No.2 Switching of V/F setting

(RV=0, Hꢀꢆꢉ, Hꢀꢆꢀ, Hꢀꢆꢂ, Hꢀꢆꢃ)

OFF: No.1 V/F setting

(Set value of RV, XN, XNX, XD, VJT)

MOT2

No.2 motor switching

ON: No.2 motor

(RV=0, Hꢀꢆꢉ, Hꢀꢆꢀ, Hꢀꢆꢂ, Hꢀꢆꢃ,

Hꢀꢊꢄ, Hꢄꢉꢉ, Hꢄꢉꢀ, Hꢄꢉꢃ)

OFF: No.1 motor (Set value of RV, XN, XNX,

XD, VJT, CEE, FGE, Hꢄꢉꢂ, Hꢅꢉꢀ)

ON: Increase in frequency

（VF2＋AD2＋OCS2）

DOWN

Frequency UP signal input from external contacts

Frequency DOWN signal input from external

contacts

ON: Reduction in frequency

K-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

■ Table of input terminal functions 2

Function

No.

Code

Function

Action

CLR

Frequency UP/DOWN cancellation signal input

from external contacts

OFF→ON: Resetting of UP/DOWN frequency by

means of external contacts

CLR+RES

EXTN

Combination of frequency UP/DOWN cancellation

and reset by means of external contacts

Inversion of trip stop command from external

device

ON: Simultaneous input from CLR and RES

OFF: G Trip stop

OHN

Thermal trip stop signal input from external device

Inversion of thermal trip stop command from

external device

ON: QJꢂ Trip stop

OFF: QJꢂ Trip stop

SC/LC

Forced switching from remote to local control

Enabled when remote control is exercised

ON: Local control (setting of EOQF, HOQF and

Hꢂꢉꢆ)

OFF: Remote control

ON: F (forward run)/R: (reverse run) held, 3-wire

operation

Operation holding (stop of 3-wire operation)

OFF: Slowdown stop

CKWH

Display cancellation of the cumulative power

amount (kWh)

Forced operation (factory configuration required)

ON: Monitor display cancellation of the cumulative

power amount (kWh)

FORCE

ON: Forced operation mode in which operation is

not stopped in the event of the occurrence of

a soft fault (preset speed operation frequency

7) To use this function, the inverter needs to

be so configured at the factory.

OFF: Normal operation

FIRE

Fire-speed control

ON: Fire-speed operation (Hꢂꢋꢁ Forced fire-

speed setting frequncy)

OFF: Normal operation

STN

RESN

Coast stop (gate off)

Inversion of RES

ON: Coast stop (gate off)

ON: Acceptance of reset command

OFF→ ON: Trip reset

F+ST

R+ST

OCS2

Combination of forward run and standby

Combination of reverse run and standby

Forced switching of stall prevention level 2

ON: Simultaneous input from F and ST

ON: Simultaneous input from R and ST

ON: Enabled at the value of Hꢀꢊꢄ

OFF: Enabled at the value of Hꢅꢉꢀ

ON: Once turned on, RY-RC are held on.

OFF: The status of RY-RC changes in real time

according to conditions.

HDRY

Holding of RY-RC terminal output

PRUN

Cancellation (clearing) of operation command from 0: Operation command canceled (cleared)

panel

1: Operation command retained

ICLR

PID control integral value clear

ON: PID control integral value always zero

OFF: PID control permitted

ST+F+SS1

ST+R+SS1

ST+F+SS2

ST+R+SS2

ST+F+SS3

ST+R+SS3

Combination of standby, forward run and preset-

speed command 1

ON: Simultaneous input from ST, F and SS1

Combination of standby, reverse run and preset-

speed command 1

Combination of standby, forward run and preset-

speed command 2

Combination of standby, reverse run and preset-

speed command 2

Combination of standby, forward run and preset-

speed command 3

ON: Simultaneous input from ST, R and SS1

ON: Simultaneous input from ST, F and SS2

ON: Simultaneous input from ST, R and SS2

ON: Simultaneous input from ST, F and SS3

ON: Simultaneous input from ST, R and SS3

Combination of standby, reverse run and preset-

speed command 3

Note: When function 1, 10, 11, 16, 38, 41-47, 51-55, 62 or 64 is assigned to an input terminal board, the input

terminal board is enabled even if the parameter command mode selection EOQF is set at ꢀꢌ(panel).

K-16

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

■ Table of output terminal functions 1

Function

Code

Function

Action

No.

Frequency lower limit

ON: The output frequency is above the NN set

value.

OFF: The output frequency is equal to or less than

the NN set value.

LLN

Inversion of frequency lower limit

Frequency upper limit

Inversion of LL setting

ON: Output frequency is equal to or higher than

WN value.

OFF: Output frequency is lower than WN value.

ULN

LOW

Inversion of frequency upper limit

Low-speed detection signal

Inversion of UL setting

ON: Output frequency is equal to or higher than

Hꢀꢉꢉ value.

OFF: Output frequency is lower than Hꢀꢉꢉ

value.

LOWN

RCH

Inversion of low-speed detection signal

Designated frequency attainment signal

(completion of acceleration/deceleration)

Inversion of LOW setting

ON: The output frequency is equal to or less than

the specified frequency ± frequency set with

Hꢀꢉꢂ.

OFF: The output frequency is above the specified

frequency ± frequency set with Hꢀꢉꢂ.

Inversion of RCH setting

RCHN

RCHF

Inversion of designated frequency attainment

signal (inversion of completion of

acceleration/deceleration)

Set frequency attainment signal

ON: The output frequency is equal to or less than

the frequency set with Hꢀꢉꢀ ± Hꢀꢉꢂ.

OFF: The output frequency is above the frequency

set with Hꢀꢉꢀ ± Hꢀꢉꢂ.

RCHFN

Inversion of set frequency attainment signal

Failure signal (trip output)

Inversion of RCHF setting

ON: When inverter is tripped

OFF: When inverter is not tripped

FLN

Inversion of failure signal (inversion of trip output)

Over-torque detection

Inversion of FL setting

ON: Torque current is equal to or larger than

Hꢅꢀꢅ set value and longer than Hꢅꢀꢊ

set time.

OFF: The torque current is equal to or less than

(Hꢅꢀꢅ set value - Hꢅꢀꢋ set value).

Inversion of OT

ON: When operation frequency is output or during

(FD)

OTN

RUN

Inversion of over-torque detection

Start/Stop

OFF: Operation stopped

RUNN

POL

Inversion of RUN/STOP

OL pre-alarm

Inversion of RUN setting

ON: 50% or more of calculated value of overload

protection level

OFF: Less than 50% of calculated value of

overload protection level

POLN

POT

Inversion of OL pre-alarm

Over-torque detection pre-alarm

Inversion of POL setting

ON: Torque current is equal to or larger than 70%

of Hꢅꢀꢅ set value.

OFF: The torque current is below (Hꢅꢀꢅ set

value x 70% - Hꢅꢀꢋ set value).

Inversion of POT setting

One of the following is turned on:

ON POL, POT, MOFF, UC, OT, LL stop, COT,

and instantaneous power failure coast stop.

or E,ꢌR,ꢌJ issues an alarm

All the following are turned off:

OFF POL, POT, MOFF, UC, OT, LL stop,

COT, and instantaneous power failure coast

stop.

POTN

PAL

Inversion of over-torque detection pre-alarm

Pre-alarm

or E,ꢌR,ꢌJ issues no alarm

K-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

■ Table of output terminal functions 2

Function

No.

Code

Function

Action

Inversion of PAL setting

PALN

Inversion of pre-alarm

Small-current detection

ON: The output current is equal to or less than

Hꢅꢀꢀ set value for Hꢅꢀꢂ set time.

OFF: The output current is equal to or larger than

Hꢅꢀꢀ set value + 10%.

UCN

HFL

Inversion of small-current detection

Significant failure

Inversion of UC setting

ON: QEC,ꢌQEN,ꢌQV,ꢌG,ꢌ

GGRꢀ,ꢌGVP,ꢌGRJQ,ꢌGTTꢂ-

ꢄ,ꢌQJꢂ,ꢌWRꢀ,ꢌGHꢂ,ꢌWE,ꢌ

GV[R,ꢌGRJꢀ)

OFF: Failure other than the above

HFLN

LFL

Inversion of significant failure

Insignificant failure

Inversion of HFL setting

ON: (QEꢀ-ꢃ,ꢌQRꢀ-ꢃ,ꢌQJ,ꢌQNꢀ-ꢂ)

OFF: Failure other than the above

Inversion of LFL setting

ON: Ready for operation (ST and RUN are also

ON)

LFLN

RDY1

Inversion of insignificant failure

Ready for operation (including ST/RUN)

OFF: Others

RDY1N

RDY2

Inversion of ready for operation (including

ST/RUN)

Ready for operation (excluding ST/RUN)

Inversion of RDY1 setting

ON: Ready for operation (ST and RUN are not

ON)

OFF: Others

RDY2N

FCVIB

Inversion of ready for operation (excluding ST/RUN)

Frequency VIB selection

Inversion of RDY2

ON: VIB selected as frequency command

OFF: Terminal other than VIB selected as

frequency command

FCVIBN

FLR

Inversion of frequency VIB selection

Fault signal (put out also at the time of a retry)

Inversion of FCVIB

ON: When inverter trips or retries

OFF: When inverter does not trip or retry

Inversion of FLR

FLRN

OUT0

Inversion of failure signal (put out also at the time

of a retry)

Specified data output 1

ON: Specified data from remote control FA50:

BIT0= 1

OFF: Specified data from remote control FA50:

BIT0= 0

OUT0N

COT

Inversion of specified data output 1

Cumulative operation time alarm

Inversion of OUT0 setting

ON: Cumulative operation time is equal to or

longer than Hꢅꢂꢀ

OFF: Cumulative operation time is shorter than

Hꢅꢂꢀ

COTN

LTA

Inversion of cumulative operation time alarm

Parts replacement alarm

Inversion of COT

ON: Calculation for parts replacement time is

equal to or longer than the preset time

ON: Calculation for parts replancement time is

shorter than the preset time

LTAN

LI1

Inversion of replacement alarm

F terminal input signal

Inversion of LTA

ON: The signal input to F terminal is ON

OFF: The signal input to F terminal is OFF

Inversion of LI1

ON: The signal input to R terminal is ON

OFF: The signal input to R terminal is OFF

Inversion of LI2

ON: Frequency commanded by HOQF or

Hꢂꢉꢆ and that by VIA show the same

value.

LI1N

LI2

Inversion of F terminal input signal

R terminal input signal

LI2N

PIDF

Inversion of R terminal input signal

Signal in accordance of frequency command (VIA)

OFF: Frequency commanded by HOQF or

Hꢂꢉꢆ and that by VIA show different

values.

K-18

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

■ Table of output terminal functions 3

Function

No.

Code

Function

Action

Inversion of PIDF setting

PIDFN

Inversion of signal in accordance of frequency

command (VIA)

MOFF

Undervoltage detection

ON: Undervoltage detected

OFF: Other than undervoltage

Inversion of MOFF

MOFFN

LOC

Inversion of undervoltage detection

Local/remote switching

ON: Local mode

OFF: Remote mode

LOCN

PTC

Inversion of local/remote switching

PTC thermal alarm

Inversion of LOC

ON: 60% and over the protection level by PTC

OFF: Normal condition

PTCN

PIDFB

Inversion of PTC thermal alarm

Signal in accordance of frequency command (VIB)

Inversion of PTC

ON: Frequency commanded by HOQF or

Hꢂꢉꢆ and that by VIB show the same

value.

OFF: Frequency commanded by HOQF or

Hꢂꢉꢆ and that by VIB show different

values.

PIDFBN

Inversion of signal in accordance of frequency

command (VIB)

Inversion of PIDFB setting

62-253

254

255

Disabled

AOFF

AON

Invalid settings, always OFF (ignored)

Always OFF

Always ON

Invalid settings, always OFF (ignored)

Always OFF

Always ON

K-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

■ Order of precedence of combined functions

XX: Impossible combination, X: Invalid, + : Valid under some conditions, O: Valid, @: Priority

6/9 10 11 13 14 15 46 48 41 43 49 38 39 40 52/

Function No. / Function

Standby

/42

Forward run command

Reverse run command

Acceleration/deceleratio

5/58

6~9

n 2 selection

Preset-speed run

commands 1 to 3

Reset command

Trip stop command from

external input device

DC braking command

PID control prohibited

Permission of

parameter editing

Thermal trip stop

command from external

Remote/local control

forced switching

41/4 Frequency UP/DOWN

signal input from

Clearing of UP/DOWN

frequency with external

Operation holding

(cancellation of 3-wire

Frequency commands

forced switching

No.2 Switching of V/F

setting

No.2 motor switching

52/ Forced operation

53 Fire-speed control

For the functions of combined terminals (combined functions), refer to the table of their respective functions.

K-20

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

12. Specifications

12.1 Models and their standard specifications

■ Standard specifications

Item

Input voltage

Specification

3-phase 200V

Applicable motor (kW)

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

4.0

5.5

VFFS1

2004PM 2007PM 2015PM 2022PM 2037PM 2055PM 2075PM 2110PM 2150PM 2185PM 2220PM 2300PM

7.5

18.5

Type

Form

Capacity (kVA) Note 1)

Rated output/current

(A) Note 2)

1.1

1.8

2.9

4.0

6.7

9.2

12.2

17.6

23.2

28.5

74.8

33.5

88.0

44.6

117.0

2.8

4.6

7.5

10.6

17.5

24.2

46.2

(67.3) (79.2) (105.3)

Output voltage Note 3)

3-phase 200V to 240V

Overload current rating

Voltage-current

110％-60 seconds, 180%-2 second

3-phase 200V to 240V - 50/60Hz

Allowable fluctuation

Voltage + 10%, -15% Note 4), frequency ±5%

IP00 Enclosed

type

(JEM1030)

Note 5)

Protective method

IP20 Enclosed type (JEM1030)

Cooling method

Color

Built-in filter

Forced air-cooled

Munsel 5Y-8/0.5

Basic filter

Item

Specification

Input voltage

Applicable motor (kW)

Type

3-phase 400V

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

4.0

5.5

VFFS1

4004PL 4007PL 4015PL 4022PL 4037PL 4055PL 4075PL 4110PL 4150PL 4185PL 4220PL 4300PL

7.5

18.5

Form

Capacity (kVA) Note 1)

Rated output current

(A) Note 2)

1.1

1.6

2.8

3.9

6.9

9.1

12.2

17.1

23.2

28.2

37.0

33.2

43.5

44.6

58.5

1.4

2.2

3.7

5.1

9.1

12.0

16.0

22.5

30.5

(33.3) (39.2) (52.7)

Rated output voltage

Note 3)

3-phase 380V to 480V

Overload current rating

110％-60 seconds, 180% -2 second

Voltage-current

3-phase 380V to 480V - 50/60Hz

Allowable fluctuation

Voltage + 10%, -15% Note 4), frequency ±5%

IP00 Enclosed

type (JEM1030)

Note 5)

Protective method,

IP20 Enclosed type (JEM1030)

Cooling method

Color

Built-in filter

Forced air-cooled

Munsel 5Y-8/0.5

EMI filter

Note 1: Capacity is calculated at 220V for the 200V models, at 440V for the 400V models.

Note 2: The rated output current in the parenthesis is at 12kHz of PWM carrier frequency (Hꢀꢁꢁ) setting.

Note 3: Maximum output voltage is the same as the input voltage.

Note 4: ±10% when the inverter is used continuously (load of 100%).

Note 5: Inverter, 22kW or greater, do not have wiring port covers, they have large openings, but there is no space to bend the

external cables inside the unit. If they are fitted external to the cabinet, please use an optional wiring port cover.

L-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

■ Common specification

Item

Specification

Control system

Sinusoidal PWM control

Rated output voltage

Adjustable within the range of 50 to 660V by correcting the supply voltage (not adjustable above the input

voltage)

Output frequency range 0.5 to 200.0Hz, default setting: 0.5 to 80Hz, maximum frequency: 30 to 200Hz

Minimum setting steps

of frequency

0.1Hz: analog input (when the max. frequency is 100Hz), 0.01Hz: Operation panel setting and

communication setting.

Frequency accuracy

Digital setting: within ±0.01% of the max. frequency (-10 to +60°C)

Analog setting: within ±0.5% of the max. frequency (25°C ±10°C)

Voltage/frequency

characteristics

V/F constant, variable torque, automatic torque boost, vector control, automatic energy-saving, PM motor

control. Auto-tuning. Base frequency (25 - 200Hz) adjusting to 1 or 2, torque boost (0 - 30%) adjusting to

1 or 2, adjusting frequency at start (0.5 - 10Hz)

Frequency setting

signal

External frequency potentiometer (connectable to a potentiometer with a rated impedance of 1 - 10kΩ), 0

- 10Vdc (input impedance: VIA/VIB=30kΩ, 4 - 20mAdc (Input impedance: 250Ω).

The characteristic can be set arbitrarily by two-point setting. Possible to set individually for three

functions: analog input (VIA and VIB) and communication command.

Terminal board base

frequency

Frequency jump

Upper- and lower-limit

frequencies

Three frequencies can be set. Setting of the jump frequency and the range.

Upper-limit frequency: 0 to max. frequency, lower-limit frequency: 0 to upper-limit frequency

PWM carrier frequency

PID control

Adjustable within a range of 6.0 to 16.0Hz (default: 8 or 12kHz).

Setting of proportional gain, integral gain, differential gain and control wait time. Checking whether the

amount of processing amount and the amount of feedback agree.

Acceleration/decelerati

on time

Selectable from among acceleration/deceleration times 1 and 2 (0.0 to 3200 sec.). Automatic

acceleration/deceleration function. S-pattern acceleration/deceleration 1 and 2 and S-pattern adjustable.

Control of forced rapid deceleration and dynamic rapid deceleration

DC braking

Braking start-up frequency: 0 to maximum frequency, braking rate: 0 to 100%, braking time: 0 to 20

seconds, emergency DC braking

Input terminal function

(programmable)

Possible to select from among 57 functions, such as forward/reverse run signal input, operation base

signal input and reset signal input, to assign to 4 input terminals. Logic selectable between sink and

source.

Output terminal

functions

(programmable)

Possible to select from among 58 functions, such as upper/lower limit frequency signal output, low speed

detection signal output, specified speed reach signal output and failure signal output, to assign to FL

relay output, RY output terminals.

Forward/reverse run

The RUN and STOP keys on the operation panel are used to start and stop operation, respectively. The

switching between forward run and reverse run can be done from one of the three control units: operation

panel, terminal board and external control unit.

Preset speed operation Base frequency + 7-speed operation possible by changing the combination of 3 contacts on the terminal

board.

Retry operation

Capable of restarting automatically after a check of the main circuit elements in case the protective

function is activated. 10 times (Max.) (selectable with a parameter)

Various prohibition

settings

Possible to write-protect parameters and to prohibit the change of panel frequency settings and the use

of operation panel for operation, emergency stop or resetting.

Auto-restart operation

In the event of a momentary power failure, the inverter reads the rotational speed of the coasting motor

and outputs a frequency appropriate to the rotational speed in order to restart the motor smoothly. This

function can also be used when switching to commercial power.

Drooping function

The motor is allowed to “slip” according to the load torque current.

Failure detection signal 1c-contact output: (250Vac-0.5A-cosФ=0.4)

L-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

Item

Specification

Protective function

Stall prevention, current limitation, over-current, output short circuit, over-voltage, over-voltage limitation,

undervoltage, ground fault, power supply phase failure, output phase failure, overload protection by

electronic thermal function, armature over-current at start-up, load side over-current at start-up, over-

torque, undercurrent, overheating, cumulative operation time, life alarm, emergency stop, various pre-

alarms

Electronic thermal

characteristic

Reset function

Switching between standard motor and constant-torque VF motor, switching between motors 1 and 2,

setting of overload trip time, adjustment of stall prevention levels 1 and 2, selection of overload stall

Function of resetting by closing contact 1a or by turning off power or the operation panel. This function is

also used to save and clear trip records.

Alarms

Causes of failures

Stall prevention, overvoltage, overload, under-voltage, setting error, retry in process, upper/lower limits

Over-current, overvoltage, overheating, short-circuit in load, ground fault, overload on inverter, over-

current through arm at start-up, over-current through load at start-up, CPU fault, EEPROM fault, RAM

fault, ROM fault, communication error. (Selectable: Emergency stop, under-voltage, low voltage, over-

torque, motor overload, output open-phase)

Monitoring function

Operation frequency, operation frequency command, forward/reverse run, output current, voltage in DC

section, output voltage, torque, torque current, load factor of inverter, input power, output power,

information on input terminals, information on output terminals, version of CPU1, version of CPU2,

version of memory, PID feedback amount, frequency command (after PID), integral input power, integral

output power, rated current, output speed, communication counter, normal state communication counter,

causes of past trips 1 through 4, parts replacement alarm, cumulative operation time

Past trip monitoring

function

Stores data on the past four trips: number of trips that occurred in succession, operation frequency,

direction of rotation, load current, input voltage, output voltage, information on input terminals, information

on output terminals, and cumulative operation time when each trip occurred.

Output for frequency

meter

Analog output: (1mAdc full-scale DC ammeter or 7.5Vdc full-scale DC ammeter / Rectifier-type AC

voltmeter, 225% current Max. 1mAdc, 7.5Vdc full-scale), 4 to 20mA/0 to 20mA output

4-digit 7-segments LED Frequency:

inverter output frequency.

Alarm:

Status:

stall alarm “C”, overvoltage alarm “P”, overload alarm “L”, overheat alarm “H”.

inverter status (frequency, cause of activation of protective function, input/output voltage,

output current, etc.) and parameter settings.

Free-unit display: arbitrary unit (e.g. rotating speed) corresponding to output frequency.

Indicator

Lamps indicating the inverter status by lighting, such as RUN lamp, MON lamp, PRG lamp, % lamp, Hz

lamp, LOC/REM key lamp, UP/DOWN key lamp and RUN key lamp. The charge lamp indicates that the

main circuit capacitors are electrically charged.

Use environments

Indoor, altitude: 1000m (Max.), not exposed to direct sunlight, corrosive gas, explosive gas or vibration

(less than 5.9m/s²) (10 to 55Hz)

-10 to +60°C Note1) Note2)

Ambient temperature

Storage temperature

Relative humidity

-20 to +65°C

20 to 93% (free from condensation and vapor).

Note 1: Above 40°C: Remove the seal from the top of the inverter and use the inverter with the rated output current reduced.

Note 2: If inverters are installed side by side (with no sufficient space left between them): Remove the seal from the top of

each inverter.

When installing the inverter where the ambient temperature will rise above 40°C, remove the seal from the top of the

inverter and use the inverter with the rated output current reduced.

L-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

12.2 Outside dimensions and mass

■ Outside dimensions and mass

Dimensions (mm)

Applicable motor

(kW)

Approx. weight

(kg)

Voltage class

Inverter type

Drawing

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

4.0

5.5

7.5

VFFS1-2004PM

VFFS1-2007PM

VFFS1-2015PM

VFFS1-2022PM

VFFS1-2037PM

VFFS1-2055PM

VFFS1-2075PM

VFFS1-2110PM

VFFS1-2150PM

VFFS1-2185PM

VFFS1-2220PM

VFFS1-2300PM

1.2

105

130

150

121.5 13

140

180

170

220

150

170

126

160

157

210

2.1

4.3

3-phase 200V

8.6

18.5

245

310

190

225

295 19.5

8.9

16.4

38.0

240

320

420

630

214

290

206

280

403

605

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

4.0

5.5

7.5

VFFS1-4004PL

VFFS1-4007PL

VFFS1-4015PL

VFFS1-4022PL

VFFS1-4037PL

VFFS1-4055PL

VFFS1-4075PL

VFFS1-4110PL

VFFS1-4150PL

VFFS1-4185 PL

VFFS1-4220 PL

VFFS1-4300 PL

105

130

150

121.5 13

1.4

140

180

245

240

170

220

310

420

150

170

190

214

126

160

225

206

157

210

2.4

4.7

3-phase 400V

18.5

295 19.5

403

9.0

15.4

L-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

■ Outline drawing

Fig.A

Fig.B

Fig.C

Fig.D

L-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

Fig.E

Fig.F

Note 1: To make it easier to grasp the dimensions of each inverter, dimensions common to all inverters in these

figures are shown with numeric values but not with symbols.

Here are the meanings of the symbols used.

W: Width

H: Height

D: Depth

W1: Mounting dimension (horizontal)

H1: Mounting dimension (vertical)

H2: Height of EMC plate mounting area

Note 2: Here are the avaiable EMC plate

Fig.A, Fig.B

Fig.C

Fig.D

: EMP004Z (Approx. weight : 0.1kg)

: EMP005Z (Approx. weight : 0.3kg)

: EMP006Z (Approx. weight : 0.3kg)

Note 3: The models shown in Fig. A is sfixed at two points: in the upper left and lower right corners.

L-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

13. Before making a service call

- Trip information and remedies

13.1 Trip causes/warnings and remedies

When a problem arises, diagnose it in accordance with the following table.

If it is found that replacement of parts is required or the problem cannot be solved by any remedy described in the

table, contact your Toshiba dealer.

[Trip information]

Error code

Failure code

Problem

Possible causes

Remedies

0001

0025

Overcurrent during

acceleration

Overcurrent flowing

in element during

acceleration

•

The acceleration time CEE is too short.

The V/F setting is improper.

A restart signal is imput to the rotating

motor after a momentary stop, etc.

A special motor (e.g. motor with a small

impedance) is used.

•

Increase the acceleration time CEE.

Check the V/F parameter.

Use Hꢁꢂꢀ (auto-restart) and Hꢁꢂꢃ

(coast stop).

Adjust the carrier frequency Hꢁꢂꢂ.

Set the carrier frequency control mode

selection parameter Hꢁꢀꢄ to 1 or 3

(carrier frequency decreased

automatically).

QEꢀ

QEꢀR

•

There is possibility of Ground fault trip.

0002

0026

Overcurrent during

deceleration

Overcurrent flowing

in element during

decelearion

•

The deceleration time FGE is too short.

There is possibility of Ground fault trip.

•

Increase the deceleration time FGE.

Set the carrier frequency control mode

selection parameter Hꢁꢀꢄ to 1 or 3

(carrier frequency decreased

automatically).

QEꢃ

QEꢃR

0003

0027

Overcurrent during

constant speed

operation

Overcurrent flowing

in element during

operation

•

The load fluctuates abruptly.

The load is in an abnormal condition.

There is possibility of Ground fault trip.

•

Reduce the load fluctuation.

Check the load (operated machine).

Set the carrier frequency control mode

selection parameter Hꢁꢀꢄ to 1 or 3

(carrier frequency decreased

automatically).

QEꢁ

QEꢁR

0025

0026

0027

Ground fault trip

Arm overcurrent at

start-up

(for 11 and 15 kW

models only)

•

A current leaked from an output cable or

the motor to ground.

A main circuit elements is defective.

•

Check cables, connectors, and so on for

ground faults.

Make a service call.

ꢂEꢀR

ꢂEꢃR

ꢂEꢁR

0004

Overcurrent (An

overcurrent on the

load side at start-up)

•

The insulation of the output main circuit or

motor is defective.

The motor has too small impedance.

A 11 or 15 kW model was started,

although a current is leaked from an

output cable or the motor to ground.

•

Check the cables and wires for defective

insulation.

When using a 11 or 15 kW model, check

cables, connectors, and so on for ground

faults.

QEN

•

0005

0008

Arm overcurrent at

start-up

•

A main circuit elements is defective.

There is possibility of Ground fault trip.

A phase failure occured in the input line of

the main circuit.

•

Make a service call.

QEC

Input phase failure

•

Check the main circuit input line for phase

failure.

Enable Hꢄꢂꢅ (input phase failure

detection).

Check the capacitor in the main circuit for

exhaustion.

Check the main circuit output line, motor,

etc. for phase failure.

GRJꢀ

0009

Output phase failure

•

A phase failure occurred in the output line

of the main circuit.

GRJQ

Enable Hꢄꢂꢆ (Output phase failure

detection).

You can select a trip ON/OFF by parameters.

(Continued overleaf)

M-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

(Continued)

Failure code

000A

Error code

Problem

Possible causes

Remedies

Overvoltage during

acceleration

•

The imput voltage fluctuates abnormally.

(1) The power supply has a capacity of

200kVA or more.

•

Insert a suitable input reactor.

QRꢀ

(2) A power factor improvement capacitor is

opened or closed.

(3) A system using a thyrister is connected

to the same power distribution line.

•

A restart signal is input to the rotating

motor after a momentary stop, etc.

There is possibility of output phase

failure.

The deceleration time FGE is too short.

(Regenerative energy is too large.)

Hꢁꢂꢆ (overvoltage limit operation) is

off.

•

Use Hꢁꢂꢀ (auto-restart) and Hꢁꢂꢃ

(coast stop).

Check the main circuit output line, motor,

etc. for phase failure.

000B

Overvoltage during

deceleration

Increase the deceleration time FGE.

QRꢃ

Enable Hꢁꢂꢆ (overvoltage limit

operation).

Insert a suitable input reactor.

The input voltage fluctuates abnormally.

(1) The power supply has a capacity of

200kVA or more.

(2) A power factor improvement capacitor is

opened and closed.

(3) A system using a thyrister is connected

to the same power distribution line.

•

There is possibility of output phase

failure.

The input voltage fluctuates abnormally.

•

Check the main circuit output line, motor,

etc. for phase failure.

Insert a suitable input reactor.

000C

Overvoltage during

constant-speed

operation

•

QRꢁ

(1) The power supply has a capacity of

200kVA or more.

(2) A power factor improvement capacitor is

opened or closed.

(3) A system using a thyrister is connected

to the same power distribution line.

•

The motor is in a regenerative state

because the load causes the motor to run

at a frequency higher than the inverter

output frequency.

•

Check the main circuit output line, motor,

etc. for phase failure.

•

There is possibility of output phase

failure.

000D

000E

Inverter overload

Motor overload

•

The acceleration time ACC is too short.

The DC braking amout is too large.

The V/F setting is improper.

A restart signal is input to the rotating

motor after a momentary stop, etc.

The load is too large.

•

Increase the acceleration time CEE.

Reduce the DC braking amount Hꢃꢆꢀ

and the DC braking time Hꢃꢆꢃ.

Check the V/F parameter setting.

Use Hꢁꢂꢀ (auto-restart) and Hꢁꢂꢃ

(coast stop).

QNꢀ

QNꢃ

•

Use an inverter with a larger rating.

•

The V/F setting is improper.

The motor is locked up.

Low-speed operation is performed

continuously.

An excessive load is applied to the motor

during operation.

Over-torque reaches to a detection level

during operation.

Check the V/F parameter setting.

Check the load (operated machine).

Adjust QNO to the overload that the

motor can withstand during operation in a

low speed range.

•

0020

0010

Over-torque trip

Overheat

•

Enable Hꢄꢀꢆ (over-torque trip

selection).

Check system error.

Restart the operation by resetting the

inverter after it has cooled down enough.

The fan requires replacement if it does

not rotate during operation.

Secure sufficient space around the inverter.

Do not place any heat generating device

near the inverter.

•

The cooling fan does not rotate.

The ambient temperature is too high.

The vent is blocked up.

A heat generating device is installed close

to the inverter.

•

The thermistor in the unit is broken.

•

Make a service call.

You can select a trip ON/OFF by parameters.

(Continued overleaf)

M-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

(Continued)

Failure code

002E

Error code

Problem

Possible causes

Remedies

External thermal trip

•

An external thermal trip is input.

PTC protection worked.

During automatic operation or remote

operation, a stop command is entered

from the operation panel or a remote

input device.

•

Check the external thermal input.

Check the PTC in the motor.

Reset the inverter.

QJꢃ

0011

Emergency stop

0012

0013

0014

EEPROM fault 1

EEPROM fault 2

EEPROM fault 3

•

A data writing error occurs.

•

Turn off the inverter, then turn it again. If it

does not recover from the error, make a

service call.

Turn the power off temporarily and turn it

back on, and then try V[R operation

again.

Turn off the inverter, then turn it again. If it

does not recover from the error, make a

service call.

GGRꢀ

GGRꢃ

GGRꢁ

Power supply is cut off during V[R

operation and data writing is aborted.

A data reading error occurred.

0015

0016

0017

0018

Main unit RAM fault

Main unit ROM fault

CPU fault 1

•

The control RAM is defective.

The control ROM is defective.

The control CPU is defective.

•

Make a service call.

GTTꢃ

GTTꢁ

GTTꢇ

GTTꢆ

GTTꢈ

GTTꢅ

Communication error

An error arises during serial

communication.

Check the remote control device, cables,

etc.

001A

001B

Current detector fault

Network error

•

The current detector is defective.

•

Make a service call.

The error was occurred during Network

communication.

Check the Network device and wiring.

001D

Low-current

operation

Trip

•

The output current decreased to a low-

current detection level during operation.

•

Enable Hꢄꢀꢂ (low-current detection).

Check the suitable detection level for the

system (Hꢄꢀꢀ, Hꢄꢀꢃ).

•

Make a service call if the setting is

correct.

001E

Undervoltage trip

(main circuit)

•

The input voltage (in the main circuit) is

too low.

•

Check the input voltage.

Enable Hꢄꢃꢈ (undervoltage trip

selection).

WRꢀ

•

To cope with a momentary stop due to

undervoltage, enable Hꢁꢂꢃ (coast stop)

and Hꢁꢂꢀ (auto-restart).

0022

0054

Ground fault trip

Auto-tuning error

•

A ground fault occurs in the output cable

or the motor.

Check the motor parameter Hꢇꢂꢀ to Hꢇꢉꢇ.

The motor with the capacity of 2 classes or less than the inverter is used.

The output cable is too thin.

The motor is rotating.

The inverter is used for loads other than those of three-phase induction motors.

Circuit board is changed.

(Or main circuit/drive circuit board)

The signal input via VIA is below the

analog sinal detectio level set with

Hꢄꢁꢁ.

A communications error occurs between

control CPUs.

•

Check the cable and the motor for ground

faults.

GHꢃ

•

GVPꢀ

0029

0032

Inverter

type error

Brea in analog signal

cable

•

Make a service call.

GV[R

•

Check the cables for breaks. And check

the setting of input signal or setting value

of Hꢄꢁꢁ.

Gꢊꢀꢅ

0033

0034

CPU

communications

error

Excessive torque

boosted

•

Make a service call.

Gꢊꢀꢉ

Gꢊꢃꢂ

The torque boost parameter Hꢇꢂꢃ is

set too high.

The motor has too small impedance.

•

Re do the Auto-tuning then set Hꢇꢂꢃ.

Decrease the setting of the torque boost

parameter Hꢇꢂꢃ.

•

0035

002F

CPU fault 2

The control CPU is defective.

•

Make a service call.

Gꢊꢃꢀ

UQWV

Step-out

(For PM motor only)

•

The motor shaft is locked.

One output phase is open.

An impact load is applied.

•

Unlock the motor shaft.

Check the interconnect cables between

the inverter and the motor.

You can select a trip ON/OFF by parameters.

M-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

[Alarm information]

Error code

Each message in the table is displayed to give a warning but does not cause the inverter to

trip.

Problem

Possible causes

Remedies

•

The ST-CC circuit is opened.

•

Close the ST-CC circuit.

ST terminal OFF

QHH

OQHH

Undervoltage in main

circuit

The supply voltage between R, S and T is

under voltage.

Measure the main circuit supply voltage.

If the voltage is at a normal level, the

inverter requires repairing.

Retry in process

•

The inverter is n the process of retry.

A momentary stop occurred.

•

The inverter is normal if it restarts after

several tens of senconds.

TVT[

The inverter restarts automatically. Be

careful of the machine because it may

suddenly restart.

Frequency point

setting error alarm

Clear command

acceptable

•

The frequency setting signals at points 1

and 2 are set too close to each other.

This message is displayed when pressing

the STOP key while an error code is

displayed.

•

Set the frequency setting signals at points

1 and 2 apart from each other.

Press the STOP key again to clear the

trip.

GTTꢀ

ENT

Emergency stop

command

acceptable

•

The operation panel is used to stop the

operation in automatic control or remote

control mode.

•

Press the STOP key for an emergency

stop.

To cancel the emergency stop, press any

other key.

Check whether the setting is made

correctly.

GQHH

Setting error alarm /

An error code and

data are displayed

alternately twice

each.

An error is found in a setting when data is

reading or writing.

Jꢀ/

Display of first/last

data items

•

The first and last data item in the CWJ

data group is displayed.

•

Press MODE key to exit the data group.

JGCF/

GPF

DC braking

•

DC braking in process

•

The message goes off in several tens of

seconds if no problem occurs. Note)

Normal if the message disappears when

a stop command is entered (or the

operation command is canceled).

Shaft fixing control

Motor shaft fixing control is in process.

FDZP

Flowing out of

excess number of

digits

Instantaneous power

failure coast stop

function activated.

Auto-stop because of

continuous operation

at the lower-limit

frequency

•

The number of digits such as frequencies

is more than 4.

(The upper digits have a priority.)

The coast stop function set with Hꢁꢂꢃ

(Instantaneous power failure coast stop)

is activated.

•

Lower the fequency free unit

magnification Hꢈꢂꢃ.

Gꢀ

To restart operation, reset the inverter or

input an operation signal again.

UVQR

NUVR

The automatic stop function selected with

Hꢃꢆꢄ was activated.

To deactivate the automatic stop function,

increase the frequency command above

the lower-limit frequency (LL) + 0.2 Hz or

turn off the operation command.

Parameters in the

process of

initialization

Operation panel key

fault

•

Parameters are being initialized to default

values.

•

Normal if the message disappears after a

while (several seconds to several tens of

seconds).

KPKV

Gꢊꢀꢈ

The RUN or STOP key is held down for

more than 20 seconds.

Check the operation panel.

•

The RUN or STOP key is faulty.

Auto-tuning in process

Auto-tuning

•

Normal if it the message disappears after

a few seconds.

Press and hold down the ENT key for 3

seconds or more when power is off or

when the input terminal function CKWH

is turned on or displayed.

CVPꢀ

Mꢉꢉꢉ

Integral input power

•

Integral input power is more than

999.99kWh.

Integral output power

•

Integral output power is more than

999.99kWh.

•

Press and hold down the ENT key for 3

seconds or more when power is off or

when the input terminal function CKWH

is turned on or displayed.

Jꢉꢉꢉ

Note: When the ON/OFF function is selected for DC braking (DB), using the input terminal selection parameter,

you can judge the inverter to be normal if “FD” disappears when opening the circuit between the terminal and

CC.

M-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

[Prealarm display]

Overcurrent alarm

Same as QE (overcurrent)

Same as QR (overvoltage)

Same as QNꢀ and QNꢃ (overload)

Same as QJ (overheat)

Overvoltage alarm

Overload alarm

Overheat alarm

If two or more problems arise simultaneously, one of the following alarms appears and blinks.

ER, RN, ERN

The blinking alarms E, R, N, J are displayed in this order from left to right.

13.2 Restoring the inverter from a trip

Do not reset the inverter when tripped because of a failure or error before eliminating the cause. Resetting the

tripped inverter before eliminating the problem causes it to trip again.

The inverter can be restored from a trip by any of the following operations:

(1) By turning off the power (Keep the inverter off until the LED turns off.)

Note: ⇒ See section 6.17.3 (inverter trip retention selection Hꢄꢂꢃ) for details.

(2) By means of an external signal (Short circuit between RES and CC on terminal board → Open)

(3) By operation panel operation

(4) By inputting a trip clear signal from a remote input device

(Refer to the remote input device operating manual for details.)

To reset the inverter by operation panel operation, follow these steps.

Press the ^STOPkey and make sure that ENT is displayed.

Pressing the ^STOPkey again will reset the inverter if the cause of the trip has already been eliminated.

In case of a trip due to overheating (QJ), the inverter checks the temperature within. Wait until the

temperature in the inverter falls sufficiently before resetting the inverter.

[Caution]

Turning the inverter off then turning it on again resets the inverter immediately. You can use this mode of

resetting if there is a need to reset the inverter immediately. Note, however, that this operation may damage

the system or the motor if it is repeated frequently.

M-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

13.3 If the motor does not run while no trip message is

displayed ...

If the motor does not run while no trip message is displayed, follow these steps to track down the cause.

YES:

The motor does not run.

Is the 7-segment LED

extinguished?

Check the power supply and the MCCB.

Is power being supplied normally?

Supply the power

normally.

Make a service call.

Is QHH displayed?

•

The ST-CC circuit is opened. Close the circuit between CC and the terminal to which

the ST (standby) function on the control circuit terminal is assigned.

Check the setting of Hꢀꢀꢂ (always active function selection). ⇒ See section 6.3.1.

Is any failure message

displayed?

⇒ See section 1.3.1.

Track down and eliminate the cause of the failure and then reset the inverter.

⇒ See section 13.2.

Are TVT[ and a failure

message displayed alternately?

The inverter is in the process of retrying. The retry function can be disabled by normal

or emergency stop operation, or by turning off the inverter.

Is the RUN key lamp lighted?

Is the RUN key lamp off?

ꢋQ displayed?

•

When operation panel operation is selected ... Press the RUN key to start the operation.

Check whether the operation panel operation frequency is set properly.

⇒ See section 3.1.2

When another control mode is selected ... Change the setting of the operation control

mode selection EOQF. ⇒ See section 5.3.

•

When operation panel operation is selected ... Change the setting of the operation

control mode selection parameter EOQF to 1. ⇒ See section 5.3.

You can check the setting of each input terminal on the monitor. ⇒ See section 8.1.

When another control mode is selected ... Check whether the external operation

command is entered.

•

Check to see that the frequency setting signal is not set at zero.

Check the settings of the frequency setting signal parameters HOQF, Hꢃꢂꢂ, Hꢃꢂꢈ.

⇒ See section 6.5.

•

Check the frequency setting signal points 1 and 2 settings. ⇒ See section 6.5.

Check that the start-up frequency is not higher than the operation frequency.

⇒ See section 6.6.

Check that the frequency setting (preset-speed operation frequency, etc.) is not set at

zero.

•

Check that the motor is not under a too large load or not locked up.

→Reduce the load if necessary.

Determine the cause, using the parameter display function and the status monitoring function.

⇒ See section 11 for the parameter display function or section 8 for the status motoring function.

M-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

13.4 How to determine the causes of other problems

The following table provides a listing of other problems, their possible causes and remedies.

Problems

Causes and remedies

The motor runs in the

wrong direction.

•

Invert the phases of the output terminals U, V and W.

Invert the forward/reverse run-signal terminals of the external input device.

⇒ See section 6.3 "Assignment of functions to control terminals".

Change the setting of the parameter HT in the case of panel operation.

The load is too heavy. Reduce the load.

The soft stall function is activated. Disable the soft stall function. ⇒ See section 5.12.

The maximum frequency HJ and the upper limit frequency WN are set too low.

Increase the maximum frequency HJ and the upper limit frequency WN.

The frequency setting signal is too low. Check the signal set value, circuit, cables, etc.

Check the setting characteristics (point 1 and point 2 settings) of the frequency setting

signal parameters. ⇒ See section 6.5.

•

The motor runs but its

speed does not change

normally.

•

If the motor runs at a low speed, check to see that the stall prevention function is

activated because the torque boost amount is too large.

Adjust the torque boost amount (XD) and the acceleration time (CEE).

⇒ See section 5.11 and 5.1.

The motor does not

ac-celerate or decelerate

smoothly.

•

The acceleration time (CEE) or the deceleration time (FGE) is set too short.

Increase the acceleration time (CEE) or the deceleration time (FGE).

A too large current flows

into the motor.

•

The load is too heavy. Reduce the load.

If the motor runs at a low speed, check whether the torque boost amount is too large. ⇒

⇒ See section 5.11.

The motor runs at a higher

or lower speed than the

specified one.

•

The motor has an improper voltage rating. Use a motor with a proper voltage rating.

The motor terminal voltage is too low.

Check the setting of the base frequency voltage parameter (XNX) .

⇒ See section 6.12.5.

Replace the cable with a cable larger in diameter.

•

The reduction gear ratio, etc., are not set properly. Adjust the reduction gear ratio, etc.

The output frequency is not set correctly. Check the output frequency range.

Adjust the base frequency. ⇒ See section 5.9.

The load is too heavy or too light. Reduce the load fluctuation.

• The inverter or motor used does not have a rating large enough to drive the load.

Use an inverter or motor with a rating large enough.

The motor speed fluctu-ates

during operation.

•

Check whether the frequency setting signal changes.

If the V/F control selection parameter RV is set at ꢁ, check the vector control setting,

operation conditions, etc. ⇒ See section 5.10.

Parameter settings cannot

be changed.

Change the setting of the parameter Hꢈꢂꢂ (prohibition of change of parameter

setting) to ꢂ (permitted) if it is set at ꢀ (prohibited).

For reasons of safety, some parameters cannot be reprogrammed while the inverter is

running. ⇒ See section 4.2.6.

How to cope with parameter setting-related problems

If you forget parameters

•

You can search for all reset parameters and change their settings.

which have been reset

⇒ See section 4.2.3 for details.

If you want to return all

reset parameters to their

respective default settings

You can return all parameters which have been reset to their default settings.

⇒ See section 4.2.7 for details.

M-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

14. Inspection and maintenance

Danger

• The equipment must be inspected every day.

If the equipment is not inspected and maintained, errors and malfunctions may not be discovered

which could lead to accidents.

• Before inspection, perform the following steps.

(1) Shut off all input power to the inverter.

(2) Wait at least ten minutes and check to make sure that the charge lamp is no longer lit.

(3) Use a tester that can measure DC voltages (800V DC or more), and check that the voltage to the

DC main circuits (across PA/+ and PC/-) does not exceed 45V.

Mandatory

Performing an inspection without carrying out these steps first could lead to electric shock.

Be sure to inspect the inverter regularly and periodically to prevent it from breaking down because of the environment

of use, such as temperature, humidity, dust and vibration, or deterioration of its components with aging.

14.1 Regular inspection

Since electronic parts are susceptible to heat, install the inverter in a cool, well-ventilated and dust-free place.

This is essential for increasing the service life.

The purpose of regular inspections is to maintain the correct environment of use and to find any sign of failure or

malfunction by comparing current operation data with past operation records.

Inspection procedure

Subject of

inspection

Criteria for judgement

Inspection

cycle

Inspection item

Inspection method

1)Dust, temperature

and gas

Occasionally 1)Visual check, check 1)Improve the environment if

by means of a

thermometer, smell

check

it is found to be

unfavorable.

1. Indoor

environment

2)Drop of water or

other liquid

Occasionally 2)Visual check

2)Check for any trace of

water condensation.

3)Room temperature Occasionally 3)Check by means of

a thermometer

3)Max. temperature: 60°C

Is something unusual is

found, open the door and

check the transformer,

reactors, contactors, relays,

cooling fan, etc., inside. If

necessary, stop the

operation.

2. Units and

components

Tactile check of the

1)Vibration and noise Occasionally

cabinet

1)Load current

2)Voltage (*)

Occasionally Moving-iron type AC

ammeter

Occasionally Rectifier type AC

voltmeter

To be within the rated

current, voltage and

temperature.

No significant difference

from data collected in a

normal state.

3. Operation

data

(output side)

3) Temperature

Occasionally Thermometer

*) The voltage measured may slightly vary from voltmeter to voltmeter. When measuring the voltage,

always take readings from the same circuit tester or voltmeter.

N-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

■ Check points

1. Something unusual in the installation environment

2. Something unusual in the cooling system

3. Unusual vibration or noise

4. Overheating or discoloration

5. Unusual odor

6. Unusual motor vibration, noise or overheating

7. Adhesion or accumulation of foreign substances (conductive substances)

■ Cautions about cleaning

To clean the inverter, wipe dirt off only its surface with a soft cloth but do not try to remove dirt or stains from

any other part. If stubborn stains persist, remove them by wiping gently with a cloth dampened with neutral

detergent or ethanol.

Never use any of the chemicals in the table below; the use of any of them may damage or peel the coating

away from molded parts (such as plastic covers and units) of the inverter.

Acetone

Benzen

Ethylene chloride

Ethyl acetate

Glycerin

Tetrachloroethane

Trichloroethylene

Xylene

Chloroform

14.2 Periodical inspection

Make a periodical inspection at intervals of 3 or 6 months depending on the operating conditions.

Danger

•Before inspection, perform the following steps.

(1) Shut off all input power to the inverter.

(2) Wait at least ten minutes and check to make sure that the charge lamp is no longer lit.

(3) Use a tester that can measure DC voltages (800V DC or more), and check that the voltage to the

DC main circuits (across PA/+ and PC/-) does not exceed 45V.

Mandatory

Performing an inspection without carrying out these steps first could lead to electric shock.

• Never replace any part.

This could be a cause of electric shock, fire and bodily injury. To replace parts, call the local sales

agency.

Prohibited

■ Check items

1. Check to see if all screwed terminals are tightened firmly. If any screw is found loose, tighten it again

with a screwdriver.

2. Check to see if all caulked terminals are fixed properly. Check them visually to see that there is no trace

of overheating around any of them.

3. Check all cables and wires for damage. Check them visually.

4. Remove dirt and dust. With a vacuum cleaner, remove dirt and dust. When cleaning, clean the vents

and the printed circuit boards. Always keep them clean to prevent an accident due to dirt or dust.

N-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

5. If no power is supplied to the inverter for a long time, the performance of its capacity electrolytic

capacitor declines.

When leaving the inverter unused for a long time, supply it with electricity once every two years, for 5

hours or more each, to recover the performance of the capacity electrolytic capacitor. And also check the

function of the inverter. It is advisable not to supply the commercial power directly to the inverter but to

gradually increase the power supply voltage with a transformer, etc.

6. If the need arises, conduct an insulation test on the main circuit terminal board only, using a 500V

insulation tester. Never conduct an insulation test on control terminals other than terminals on the

printed circuit board or on control terminals. When testing the motor for insulation performance, separate

it from the inverter in advance by disconnecting the cables from the inverter output terminals U, V and W.

When conducting an insulation test on peripheral circuits other than the motor circuit, disconnect all

cables from the inverter so that no voltage is applied to the inverter during the test.

Note: Before an insulation test, always disconnect all cables from the main circuit terminal board and

test the inverter separately from other equipment..

R/L 1

S/L 2

T/L 3

U/T 1

V/T 2

W/T 3

500V

(megger)

7. Never test the inverter for pressure. A pressure test may cause damage to its components.

8. Voltage and temperature check

Recommended voltmeter : Input side ... Moving-iron type voltmeter (

Output side ... Rectifier type voltmeter (

)

It will be very helpful for detecting a defect if you always measure and record the ambient temperature

before, during and after the operation.

■ Replacement of expendable parts

The inverter is composed of a large number of electronic parts including semiconductor devices. The

following parts deteriorate with the passage of time because of their composition or physical properties. The

use of aged or deteriorated parts leads to degradation in the performance or a breakdown of the inverter. To

avoid such trouble, the inverter should be checked periodically.

Note: Generally, the life of a part depends on the ambient temperature and the conditions of use. The life

spans listed below are applicable to parts when used under normal environmental conditions.

N-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

1) Cooling fan

The fan, which cools down heat-generating parts, has a service life of about 30,000 hours (about 2 or 3

years of continuous operation). The fan also needs to be replaced if it makes a noise or vibrates

abnormally.

2) Smoothing capacitor

• Main circuit

The smoothing capacitors applied to this inverter in the main circuit DC section are film type

capacitors. Those life time in design value is 15 years, but it is recommended to replace them after it

is used for about 10 years under normal conditions. Since the smoothing capacitors are mounted on

a printed circuit board, it needs to be replaced together with the circuit board.

• Control circuit

The smoothing aluminum electrolytic capacitor degrades in performance because of ripple current,

etc. The life time in design value is 15 years, but it is recommended to replace them after it is used for

about 10 years under normal conditions. Since the smoothing capacitors are mounted on a printed

circuit board, it needs to be replaced together with the circuit board.

•

Absence of liquid leak

Absence of case dampaged

Note: The operation time is helpful for roughly determining the time of replacement. For the replacement of

parts, contact your nearest Toshiba inverter distributor. For safety’s sake, never replace any part on

your own. (Parts replacement alarms can be known by monitor and alarm output, if it is set.

⇒ See section 6.17.14.

■ Standard replacement cycles of principal parts

As guides, the table below lists part replacement cycles that were estimated based on the assumption that

the inverter would be used in a normal use environment under normal conditions (ambient temperature,

ventilation conditions, and energizing time). The replacement cycle of each part does not mean its service

life but the number of years over which its failure rate does not increase significantly.

Part name

Cooling fan

Standard

replacement cycle

2 to 3 years

Replacement mode and others

Replacement with a new one

Main circuit

10 years

Replacement with a new one

smoothing electrolytic

capacitor

Relay and contactor

Aluminum electrolytic

capacitor mounted on

a printed circuit board

Whether to replace or not depends on the check results

Replace with a new circuit board

10 years

Note: The life of a part greatly varies depending on the environment of use.

N-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

14.3 Making a call for servicing

For the Toshiba service network, refer to the back cover of this instruction manual. If defective conditions are

encountered, please contact the Toshiba service section in charge via your Toshiba dealer.

When making a call for servicing, please inform us of the contents of the rating label on the right panel of the

inverter, the presence or absence of optional devices, etc., in addition to the details of the failure.

14.4 Keeping the inverter in storage

Take the following precautions when keeping the inverter in storage temporarily or for a long period of time.

Store the inverter in a well-ventilated place away from heat, damp, dust and metal powder.

If the printed circuit board in your inverter has an anti-static cover (black cover), do not leave it detached

from the circuit board during storage. The cover must be detached before turning on the inverter.

If no power is supplied to the inverter for a long time, the performance of its capacity electrolytic capacitor

declines.

When leaving the inverter unused for a long time, supply it with electricity once every two years, for 5 hours

or more each, to recover the performance of the capacity electrolytic capacitor. And also check the function

of the inverter. It is advisable not to supply the commercial power directly to the inverter but to gradually

increase the power supply voltage with a transformer, etc.

N-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

15. Warranty

Any part of the inverter that proves defective will be repaired and adjusted free of charge under the following conditions:

This warranty applies only to the inverter main unit.

Any part of the inverter which fails or is damaged under normal use within twelve months from the date of delivery shall

be repaired free of charge.

For the following kinds of failure or damage, the repair cost shall be borne by the customer even within the warranty

period.

•

Failure or damage caused by improper or incorrect use or handling, or unauthorized repair or modification of the

inverter

•

Failure or damage caused by the inverter falling or an accident during transportation after the purchase

Failure or damage caused by fire, salty water or wind, corrosive gas, earthquake, storm or flood, lightning,

abnormal voltage supply, or other natural disasters

•

Failure or damage caused by the use of the inverter for any purpose or application other than the intended one

All expenses incurred by Toshiba for on-site services shall be charged to the customer, unless a service contract is

signed beforehand between the customer and Toshiba, in which case the service contract has priority over this

warranty.

O-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

E6581381

16. Disposal of the inverter

Warning

• If you throw away the inverter, have it done by a specialist in industry waste disposal(*). If you throw

away the inverter by yourself, this can result in explosion of capacitor or produce noxious gases,

resulting in injury.

(*) Persons who specialize in the processing of waste and known as "industrial waste product collectors

and transporters" or "industrial waste disposal persons. "If the collection, transport and disposal of

industrial waste is done by someone who is not licensed for that job, it is a punishable violation of the

law. (Laws in regard to cleaning and processing of waste materials)

Mandatory

For safety’s sake, do not dispose of the disused inverter yourself but ask an industrial waste disposal agent.

Disposing of the inverter improperly could cause its capacitor to explode and emit toxic gas, causing injury to persons.

P-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TOS

PORATIO

TERNATIONA

TOS

IBA

TERNATIONA

CORPORATION PTY.,

13131 West Little York RD., Houston,

TX 77041, U.S.A

TEL: +1-713-466-0277

2 Morton Street Parramatta, NSW2150, Australia

TEL: +61-(0)2-9768-6600

FAX: +61-(0)2-9890-7542

TOS

HIBA

AND POWE

SE VI ES CO AN

FAX: +1-713-896-5226

INDUST

SYSTE

TOS

IBA

FOR

TIO

, I NDUST

AND

TOSH

SIA

ACIFIC

PTE., LT

POWE

SYSTE

S T IWAN

COR

152 Beach Rd., #16-00 Gateway East,

Singapore 189721

TEL: +65-6297-0900

6F, No66, Sec1 Shin Sheng N.RD, Taipei, Taiwan

TEL: +886-(0)2-2581-3639

FAX: +886-(0)2-2581-3631

OVERSEAS SALES & MARKETING DEPT.

ELECTRICAL APPARATUS & MEASUREMENT

DIV.

FAX: +65-6297-5510

1-1, Shibaura 1-chome, Minato-Ku,

Tokyo 105-8001, Japan

TEL: +81-(0)3-3457-4911

FAX: +81-(0)3-5444-9268

TOS

BA CH

O., LT

23rd Floor, HSBC Tower, 101 Yin Cheng

East Road, Pudong New Area, Shanghai

200120, The People's Republic of China

TEL: +86-(0)21-6841-5666

For further information, please contact your nearest Toshiba Liaison Representative or International Operations - Producer Goods.

The data given in this manual are subject to change without notice.

2006-01

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Technicolor Thomson TV Receiver LDK 4502 User Manual
Tektronix Sprinkler SG 5010 User Manual
Telex Power Supply MS 2002 User Manual
Telex Telephone BTR 300 User Manual
Tiger Games 65 123 User Manual
Toshiba Air Conditioner RAV SP180AT2 UL User Manual
Toshiba Flat Panel Television 26AV502RY User Manual
Toshiba Oxygen Equipment LF620F User Manual
Tricity Bendix Oven BD 912 User Manual
Vulcan Hart Griddle 924RE 936RE 948RE 960RE 972RE ML 135221 00G24 ML 135222 00G36 ML 135223 00G48 ML 135224 00G60 ML 135225 00G72 User Manual